P. 1
Ref 610

Ref 610

|Views: 627|Likes:
Published by amitvishnoi

More info:

Published by: amitvishnoi on Sep 21, 2011
Copyright:Attribution Non-commercial

Availability:

Read on Scribd mobile: iPhone, iPad and Android.
download as PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
See more
See less

01/07/2013

pdf

text

original

Sections

  • 1. Introduction
  • 1.1. About this manual
  • 1.2. The use of the relay
  • 1.3. Features
  • 1.4. Guarantee
  • 2. Safety information
  • 3. Instructions
  • 3.1. Application
  • 3.2. Requirements
  • 3.3. Configuration
  • 4. Technical description
  • 4.1. Functional description
  • 4.1.1. Product functions
  • 4.1.1.1. Protection functions
  • 4.1.1.4. Disturbance recorder
  • 4.1.1.6. Non-volatile memory
  • 4.1.1.7. Self-supervision
  • 4.1.1.8. Time synchronization
  • 4.1.2. Measurements
  • 4.1.3. Configuration
  • 4.1.4. Protection
  • 4.1.4.1. Block diagram
  • 4.1.4.2. Overcurrent protection
  • 4.1.4.3. Earth-fault protection
  • 4.1.4.4. Thermal protection for cables
  • 4.1.4.5. Phase discontinuity protection
  • 4.1.4.6. Circuit-breaker failure protection
  • 4.1.4.7. Arc protection
  • 4.1.4.8. Auto-reclose function
  • Blocking of protection stages
  • 4.1.4.9. Inverse definite minimum time characteristics
  • 4.1.4.10. Settings
  • 4.1.4.11. Technical data on protection functions
  • 4.1.5. Trip-circuit supervision
  • 4.1.6. Trip lockout function
  • 4.1.7. Trip counters for circuit-breaker condition monitoring
  • 4.1.8. Indicator LEDs and operation indication messages
  • 4.1.9. Demand values
  • 4.1.10. Commissioning tests
  • 4.1.11. Disturbance recorder
  • 4.1.11.2. Disturbance recorder data
  • 4.1.11.3. Control and indication of disturbance recorder status
  • 4.1.11.4. Triggering
  • 4.1.11.5. Settings and unloading
  • 4.1.11.6. Event code of the disturbance recorder
  • 4.1.12. Recorded data of the last events
  • 4.1.13. Communication ports
  • 4.1.14. IEC 60870-5-103 remote communication protocol
  • 4.1.15. Modbus remote communication protocol
  • 4.1.15.1. Protocol overview
  • 4.1.15.2. Profile of Modbus REF 610
  • Event records
  • 4.1.16. DNP 3.0 remote communication protocol
  • 4.1.16.1. Protocol overview
  • 4.1.16.2. Protocol parameters of REF 610
  • 4.1.16.3. DNP 3.0 point list of REF 610
  • 4.1.16.4. DNP 3.0 device profile of REF 610
  • 4.1.16.5. REF 610-specific DNP features
  • Unsolicited reporting start up
  • 4.1.17. SPA bus communication protocol parameters
  • 4.1.17.1. Event codes
  • 4.1.18. Self-supervision (IRF) system
  • 4.1.19. Relay parameterization
  • 4.2. Design description
  • 4.2.1. Input/output connections
  • 4.2.2. Light sensor input connections
  • 4.2.3. Serial communication connections
  • 4.2.4. Technical data
  • 5. Application examples
  • 5.1. Auto-reclose function
  • 5.1.1. Fast tripping and initiation of shot 1 using two protection stages
  • 5.1.2. Fast tripping and initiation of shot 1 using start signals
  • 5.1.3. Selecting adaptive sequence length
  • 5.2. Arc protection
  • 5.2.1. Arc protection with one REF 610 relay
  • 5.2.2. Arc protection with several REF 610 relays
  • 5.2.3. Arc protection with several REF 610 relays and one REA 101
  • Q5
  • Q3
  • 6. Ordering information
  • 9. Check lists

REF 610

Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
Issued: 05.10.2004
Version: A/05.10.2004
©Copyright 2004 ABB Oy, Distribution Automation, Vaasa, FINLAND 3
Contents
1. Introduction ...............................................................................6
1.1. About this manual .........................................................................6
1.2. The use of the relay ......................................................................6
1.3. Features ........................................................................................6
1.4. Guarantee .....................................................................................8
2. Safety information .....................................................................9
3. Instructions ..............................................................................10
3.1. Application ...................................................................................10
3.2. Requirements ..............................................................................10
3.3. Configuration ...............................................................................10
4. Technical description .............................................................13
4.1. Functional description .................................................................13
4.1.1. Product functions .............................................................13
4.1.1.1. Protection functions ............................................13
4.1.1.2. Inputs .................................................................13
4.1.1.3. Outputs ...............................................................14
4.1.1.4. Disturbance recorder ..........................................14
4.1.1.5. HMI .....................................................................14
4.1.1.6. Non-volatile memory ..........................................14
4.1.1.7. Self-supervision ..................................................14
4.1.1.8. Time synchronization .........................................15
4.1.2. Measurements .................................................................16
4.1.3. Configuration ....................................................................16
4.1.4. Protection .........................................................................18
4.1.4.1. Block diagram ....................................................18
4.1.4.2. Overcurrent protection .......................................19
4.1.4.3. Earth-fault protection ..........................................20
4.1.4.4. Thermal protection for cables .............................21
4.1.4.5. Phase discontinuity protection ...........................26
4.1.4.6. Circuit-breaker failure protection ........................26
4.1.4.7. Arc protection .....................................................26
4.1.4.8. Auto-reclose function .........................................28
4.1.4.9. Inverse definite minimum time characteristics ...34
4.1.4.10.Settings ..............................................................46
4.1.4.11.Technical data on protection functions ..............58
4.1.5. Trip-circuit supervision .....................................................62
4.1.6. Trip lockout function .........................................................63
4.1.7. Trip counters for circuit-breaker condition monitoring ......64
1MRS 755310
4
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
4.1.8. Indicator LEDs and operation indication messages ......... 64
4.1.9. Demand values ................................................................ 64
4.1.10.Commissioning tests ........................................................ 65
4.1.11.Disturbance recorder ....................................................... 65
4.1.11.1.Function ............................................................. 65
4.1.11.2.Disturbance recorder data ................................. 65
4.1.11.3.Control and indication of disturbance recorder
status ................................................................. 66
4.1.11.4.Triggering .......................................................... 67
4.1.11.5.Settings and unloading ...................................... 67
4.1.11.6.Event code of the disturbance recorder ............. 67
4.1.12.Recorded data of the last events ..................................... 67
4.1.13.Communication ports ....................................................... 69
4.1.14.IEC 60870-5-103 remote communication protocol .......... 70
4.1.15.Modbus remote communication protocol ......................... 74
4.1.15.1.Protocol overview .............................................. 74
4.1.15.2.Profile of Modbus REF 610 ............................... 75
4.1.16.DNP 3.0 remote communication protocol ........................ 88
4.1.16.1.Protocol overview .............................................. 88
4.1.16.2.Protocol parameters of REF 610 ....................... 88
4.1.16.3.DNP 3.0 point list of REF 610 ............................ 88
4.1.16.4.DNP 3.0 device profile of REF 610 .................... 92
4.1.16.5.REF 610-specific DNP features ......................... 99
4.1.17.SPA bus communication protocol parameters ............... 102
4.1.17.1.Event codes ..................................................... 117
4.1.18.Self-supervision (IRF) system ........................................ 121
4.1.19.Relay parameterization .................................................. 123
4.2. Design description .................................................................... 123
4.2.1. Input/output connections ............................................... 123
4.2.2. Light sensor input connections ...................................... 128
4.2.3. Serial communication connections ................................ 128
4.2.4. Technical data ............................................................... 133
5. Application examples .......................................................... 138
5.1. Auto-reclose function ................................................................ 138
5.1.1. Fast tripping and initiation of shot 1 using two
protection stages ........................................................... 138
5.1.2. Fast tripping and initiation of shot 1 using start signals . 139
5.1.3. Selecting adaptive sequence length .............................. 140
5.2. Arc protection ............................................................................ 141
5.2.1. Arc protection with one REF 610 relay .......................... 141
5.2.2. Arc protection with several REF 610 relays ................... 142
5.2.3. Arc protection with several REF 610 relays and one
REA 101 ......................................................................... 143
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
5
6. Ordering information ............................................................144
7. References .............................................................................146
8. Abbreviations ........................................................................147
9. Check lists .............................................................................149
6
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
1. Introduction
1.1. About this manual
This manual provides thorough information on the protection relay REF 610 and its
applications, focusing on giving a technical description of the relay.
Refer to the Operator’s Manual for instructions on how to use the
Human-Machine Interface (HMI) of the relay, also known as the Man-Machine
Interface (MMI), and to the Installation Manual for installation of the relay.
1.2. The use of the relay
The feeder protection relay REF 610 is a versatile multifunction protection relay
mainly designed to protect incoming and outgoing feeders in a wide range of feeder
applications.
REF 610 is based on a microprocessor environment. A self-supervision system
continuously monitors the operation of the relay.
The HMI includes a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) which makes the local use of the
relay safe and easy.
Local control of the relay via serial communication can be carried out with a
computer connected to the front communication port. Remote control can be carried
out via the rear connector connected to the control and monitoring system through
the serial communication bus.
1.3. Features
• Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection with definite-time or IDMT
characteristic, low-set stage
• Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection, high-set stage
• Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection, instantaneous stage
• Non-directional earth-fault protection with definite-time or IDMT characteristic,
low-set stage
• Non-directional earth-fault protection, high-set stage
• Phase discontinuity protection
• Three-phase thermal overload protection for cables
• Arc protection
• two lens sensors for arc detection (optional)
• automatic reference level adjustment based on backlight intensity
• arc detection via a remote light signal
• Automatic reclosing 1...3 shots
• Circuit-breaker failure protection
• Trip counters for circuit-breaker condition monitoring
• Trip-circuit supervision with possibility to route the warning signal to a signal
output
• Trip lockout function
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
7
• Four accurate current inputs
• User-selectable rated frequency 50/60 Hz
• Three normally open power output contacts
• Two change-over signal output contacts and three additional change-over signal
output contacts on the optional I/O module
• Output contact functions freely configurable for desired operation
• Two galvanically isolated digital inputs and three additional galvanically isolated
digital inputs on the optional I/O module
• Disturbance recorder
• recording time up to 80 seconds
• triggering by one or several internal or digital input signals
• records four analogue channels and up to eight user-selectable digital channels
• adjustable sampling rate
• Non-volatile memory for
• up to 100 event codes with time stamp
• setting values
• disturbance recorder data
• recorded data of the five last events with time stamp
• number of AR shots and starts/trips for protection stages
• operation indication messages and LEDs showing the status at the moment of
power failure
• HMI with an alphanumeric LCD and manoeuvring buttons
• eight programmable LEDs
• Operation indication messages displayed in either the IEC or ANSI mode
• Multi-language support
• User-selectable password protection for the HMI
• Display of primary current values
• Demand values
• All settings can be modified with a PC
• Optical front communication connection: wirelessly or via cable
• Optional rear communication module with plastic fibre-optic, combined
fibre-optic (plastic and glass) or RS-485 connection for system communication
using the SPA-bus, IEC 60870-5-103 or Modbus (RTU and ASCII)
communication protocol
• Optional DNP 3.0 rear communication module with RS-485 connection for
system communication using the DNP 3.0 communication protocol.
• Battery back-up for real-time clock
8
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
• Battery charge supervision
• Continuous self-supervision of electronics and software.
• Detachable plug-in unit
1.4. Guarantee
Please inquire about the terms of guarantee from your nearest ABB representative.
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
9
2. Safety information
Dangerous voltages can occur on the connectors, even though the
auxiliary voltage has been disconnected.
National and local electrical safety regulations must always be
followed.
The device contains components which are sensitive to electrostatic
discharge. Unnecessary touching of electronic components must
therefore be avoided.
The frame of the device has to be carefully earthed.
Only a competent electrician is allowed to carry out the electrical
installation.
Non-observance can result in death, personal injury or substantial
property damage.
Breaking the sealing tape on the upper handle of the device will result
in loss of warranty and proper operation will no longer be guaranteed.
When the plug-in unit has been detached from the case, do not touch
the inside of the case. The relay case internals may contain high voltage
potential and touching these may cause personal injury.
!
10
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
3. Instructions
3.1. Application
REF 610 is a versatile multifunction protection relay mainly designed for protection
of incoming and outgoing feeders in MV distribution substations. REF 610 can also
be used as back-up protection for motors, transformers and generators, in industrial
as well as in utility applications.
The large number of integrated protection functions, including three-stage
overcurrent protection, two-stage, non-directional earth-fault protection as well as
thermal protection, makes REF 610 a complete protection against overcurrent and
earth faults.
The optional arc protection for detection of arc situations in air insulated metal-clad
switchgears and the auto-reclose function for automatic clearing of overhead line
faults increase the range of applications further.
The large number of digital inputs and output contacts allows a wide range of
applications.
3.2. Requirements
To secure correct and safe operation of the relay, preventive maintenance is
recommended to be performed every five years when REF 610 is operating under
the specified conditions; see below and section Technical data.
When being used for real-time clock or recorded data functions, the battery should
be changed every five years.
Environmental conditions
3.3. Configuration
Setting and connection examples
The appropriate configuration of the output contact matrix enables the use of the
signals from the protection stages as contact functions. The start signals can be used
for blocking co-operating protection relays and signalling.
Fig. 3.3.-1 and Fig. 3.3.-2 represent REF 610 with the default configuration: all trip
signals are routed to trip the circuit breaker. In Fig. 3.3.-1, the residual current is
measured via a core-balance current transformer and the output contacts are
connected to enable the use of the auto-reclose function. In Fig. 3.3.-2, the residual
current is measured via a summation connection of the phase current transformers
and the output contacts are connected to enable the use of the trip lockout function.
• Recommended temperature range (continuous) -10...+55°C
• Limit temperature range (short-term) -40...+70°C
• Temperature influence on the operation accuracy of the
protection relay within the specified service temperature range
0.1%/°C
• Transport and storage temperature range -40...+85°C
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
11
Fig. 3.3.-1 Connection diagram, example 1
2 3 4 5 6 1
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
S
G
B
4
S
G
B
3
S
G
B
2
S
G
B
1
S
G
B
5
X
3
.
1



6




5









4




3










2




1
X
4
.
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
1
1
2
1
6
1
7
S
G
R
4
S
G
R
3
S
G
R
2
S
G
R
1
S
G
R
5
S
O
1
P
O
2
S
O
2
I
R
F

3



4


5












6


7



8










9


1
0


1
1













1
2

1
3














1
4

1
5











1
6

1
7

1
8



1
9



2
1


2
2







2
3


2
4
θ
>
I
>
I
>
>
I
>
>
>
I
R
F
I
0
>
I
0
>
>

I
>
1
3
1
4
S
G
R
7
S
G
R
8
S
O
4
S
O
5
S
G
R
6
S
O
3
X
3
.
1
1
6

1
7

1
8








1
9

2
0

2
1








2
2

2
3

2
4
1
0
1
5
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
1
1
2
1
6
1
7
1
3
1
4
1
0
1
5
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
1
1
2
1
6
1
7
1
3
1
4
1
0
1
5
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
1
1
2
1
6
1
7
1
3
1
4
1
0
1
5
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
1
1
2
1
6
1
7
1
3
1
4
1
0
1
5
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
1
1
2
1
6
1
7
1
3
1
4
1
0
1
5
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
1
1
2
1
6
1
7
1
3
1
4
1
0
1
5
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
1
1
2
1
6
1
7
1
3
1
4
1
0
1
5
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
9
1
8
1
9
1
6
1
7
2
0 8 7
2 3 4 5 6 1
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5 9
1
8
1
9
1
6
1
7
2
0 8 7
2 3 4 5 6 1
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5 9
1
8
1
9
1
6
1
7
2
0 8 7
2 3 4 5 6 1
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5 9
1
8
1
9
1
6
1
7
2
0 8 7
2 3 4 5 6 1
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5 9
1
8
1
9
1
6
1
7
2
0 8 7
0

1
C
B
F
P
0 1
O
I
-
-
+
X
2
.
1




7







8


1






2



3






4


5







6
L
1

L
2

L
3
+
+
P
O
3
P
O
1
+







1






2
~
U
a
u
x
+
-
-
~
C
o
n
n
D
ia
g
r
1
R
E
F
6
1
0
_
a
X
5
.
1


X
5
.
2
S
G
F
1
.
.
.
S
G
F
5
S
G
L
1
.
.
.
S
G
L
8
D
I
3
D
I
2
D
I
1
D
I
4
D
I
5
O
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
S
t
a
r
t
T
r
ip
B
lo
c
k
in
g
S
t
a
r
t
T
r
ip
B
lo
c
k
in
g
A
r
c

lig
h
t

o
u
t
p
u
t

T
r
ip
I
n
d
ic
a
t
io
n
s

c
le
a
r
e
d

O
u
t
p
u
t

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
s

u
n
la
t
c
h
e
d

M
e
m
o
r
iz
e
d

v
a
lu
e
s

c
le
a
r
e
d

S
e
t
t
in
g

g
r
o
u
p

s
e
le
c
t
io
n

T
im
e

s
y
n
c

E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l
T
r
ip
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l
t
r
ip
S
t
a
r
t
T
r
ip
B
lo
c
k
in
g
B
lo
c
k
in
g
S
t
a
r
t
T
r
ip
S
t
a
r
t
T
r
ip
B
lo
c
k
in
g
S
t
a
r
t
T
r
ip
A
la
r
m

T
r
ip
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l A
r
c
A
r
c

I
>
/
I
0
>
C
B

P
o
s
it
io
n

O
p
e
n

C
B

P
o
s
it
io
n

C
lo
s
e
d

A
R

I
n
h
ib
it

C
B

C
lo
s
e

I
n
h
ib
it

E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l A
R

I
n
it
ia
t
io
n

O
p
e
n

C
B

C
o
m
m
a
n
d

C
lo
s
e

C
B

C
o
m
m
a
n
d

C
B

R
e
c
lo
s
in
g

F
a
ile
d

S
h
o
t

D
u
e

D
e
f
in
it
e

T
r
ip
A
la
r
m

A
R

L
o
c
k
o
u
t

E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l
T
r
ig
g
e
r
in
g

R
e
s
e
t
T
r
i
p

l
o
c
k
o
u
t
O
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l
T
r
ig
g
e
r
in
g
T
r
ip
W
a
r
n
in
g
L
i
g
h
t

s
e
n
s
o
r

1

L
i
g
h
t

s
e
n
s
o
r

2
T
r
ip

lo
c
k
o
u
t
O
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
S
e
l
f
-
s
u
p
e
r
v
i
s
i
o
n
12
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
Fig. 3.3.-2 Connection diagram, example 2
2 3 4 5 6 1
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
S
G
B
4
S
G
B
3
S
G
B
2
S
G
B
1
S
G
B
5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
1
1
2
1
6
1
7
S
G
R
4
S
G
R
3
S
G
R
2
S
G
R
1
S
G
R
5
θ
>
I
>
I
>
>
I
>
>
>
I
R
F
I
0
>
I
0
>
>

I
>
1
3
1
4
S
G
R
7
S
G
R
8
S
G
R
6
1
0
1
5
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
1
1
2
1
6
1
7
1
3
1
4
1
0
1
5
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
1
1
2
1
6
1
7
1
3
1
4
1
0
1
5
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
1
1
2
1
6
1
7
1
3
1
4
1
0
1
5
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
1
1
2
1
6
1
7
1
3
1
4
1
0
1
5
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
1
1
2
1
6
1
7
1
3
1
4
1
0
1
5
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
1
1
2
1
6
1
7
1
3
1
4
1
0
1
5
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
1
1
2
1
6
1
7
1
3
1
4
1
0
1
5
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
9
1
8
1
9
1
6
1
7
2
0 8 7
2 3 4 5 6 1
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5 9
1
8
1
9
1
6
1
7
2
0 8 7
2 3 4 5 6 1
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5 9
1
8
1
9
1
6
1
7
2
0 8 7
2 3 4 5 6 1
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5 9
1
8
1
9
1
6
1
7
2
0 8 7
2 3 4 5 6 1
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5 9
1
8
1
9
1
6
1
7
2
0 8 7
0

1
C
B
F
P
~
C
o
n
n
D
ia
g
r
2
R
E
F
6
1
0
_
a
X
5
.
1


X
5
.
2
X
3
.
1



6




5









4




3










2




1
X
4
.
1
S
O
1
P
O
2
S
O
2
I
R
F

3



4


5












6


7



8










9


1
0


1
1













1
2

1
3














1
4

1
5











1
6

1
7

1
8



1
9



2
1


2
2







2
3


2
4
S
O
4
S
O
5
S
O
3
X
3
.
1
1
6

1
7

1
8








1
9

2
0

2
1








2
2

2
3

2
4
0 1
O
I
-
-
+
X
2
.
1




7







8


1






2



3






4


5







6
L
1

L
2

L
3
+
P
O
3
P
O
1
+







1






2
U
a
u
x
~
S
G
F
1
.
.
.
S
G
F
5
S
G
L
1
.
.
.
S
G
L
8
D
I
3
D
I
2
D
I
1
D
I
4
D
I
5
O
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
S
t
a
r
t
T
r
ip
B
lo
c
k
in
g
S
t
a
r
t
T
r
ip
B
lo
c
k
in
g
A
r
c

lig
h
t

o
u
t
p
u
t

T
r
ip
I
n
d
ic
a
t
io
n
s

c
le
a
r
e
d

O
u
t
p
u
t

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
s

u
n
la
t
c
h
e
d

M
e
m
o
r
iz
e
d

v
a
lu
e
s

c
le
a
r
e
d

S
e
t
t
in
g

g
r
o
u
p

s
e
le
c
t
io
n

T
im
e

s
y
n
c

E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l
T
r
ip
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l
t
r
ip
S
t
a
r
t
T
r
ip
B
lo
c
k
in
g
B
lo
c
k
in
g
S
t
a
r
t
T
r
ip
S
t
a
r
t
T
r
ip
B
lo
c
k
in
g
S
t
a
r
t
T
r
ip
A
la
r
m

T
r
ip
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l A
r
c
A
r
c

I
>
/
I
0
>
C
B

P
o
s
it
io
n

O
p
e
n

C
B

P
o
s
it
io
n

C
lo
s
e
d

A
R

I
n
h
ib
it

C
B

C
lo
s
e

I
n
h
ib
it

E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l A
R

I
n
it
ia
t
io
n

O
p
e
n

C
B

C
o
m
m
a
n
d

C
lo
s
e

C
B

C
o
m
m
a
n
d

C
B

R
e
c
lo
s
in
g

F
a
ile
d

S
h
o
t

D
u
e

D
e
f
in
it
e

T
r
ip
A
la
r
m

A
R

L
o
c
k
o
u
t

E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l
T
r
ig
g
e
r
in
g

R
e
s
e
t
T
r
i
p

l
o
c
k
o
u
t
O
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l
T
r
ig
g
e
r
in
g
T
r
ip
W
a
r
n
in
g
L
i
g
h
t

s
e
n
s
o
r

1

L
i
g
h
t

s
e
n
s
o
r

2
T
r
ip

lo
c
k
o
u
t
O
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
S
e
l
f
-
s
u
p
e
r
v
i
s
i
o
n
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
13
4. Technical description
4.1. Functional description
4.1.1. Product functions
4.1.1.1. Protection functions
The protection functions of REF 610 with their IEC symbols and IEEE device
numbers are presented in the table below:
For descriptions of the protection functions, refer to sections:
• 4.1.4.2. Overcurrent protection
• 4.1.4.3. Earth-fault protection
• 4.1.4.4. Thermal protection for cables
• 4.1.4.5. Phase discontinuity protection
• 4.1.4.6. Circuit-breaker failure protection
• 4.1.4.7. Arc protection
• 4.1.4.8. Auto-reclose function
4.1.1.2. Inputs
REF 610 is provided with four energizing inputs, two optional light sensor inputs,
two digital inputs and three optional digital inputs controlled by an external voltage.
Three of the energizing inputs are for the phase currents and one for the earth-fault
current. For details, refer to section Input/output connections and tables 4.1.4.10-7,
4.2.1-1 and 4.2.1-5. The functions of the digital inputs are determined with the
SGB switches.
Table 4.1.1.1-1 IEC symbols and IEEE device numbers
Function description IEC symbol
IEEE Device
No.
Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection,
low-set stage
I> 51
Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection,
high-set stage
I>> 50/51
Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection,
instantaneous stage
I>>> 50
Phase discontinuity protection ∆I> 46
Three-phase thermal overload protection for cables θ> 49
Non-directional earth-fault protection, low-set stage I
0
> 51N
Non-directional earth-fault protection, high-set stage I
0
>> 50N/51N
Arc protection ARC 50/50NL
Circuit-breaker failure protection CBFP 62BF
Automatic reclosing 0→1 79
Lockout relay 86
14
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
4.1.1.3. Outputs
REF 610 is provided with three power outputs (PO1, PO2 and PO3), two signal
outputs (SO1 and SO2) and three optional signal outputs (SO3, SO4 and SO5).
Switchgroups SGR1...8 are used for routing internal signals from the protection
stages, the external trip signal and signals from the auto-reclose function to the
desired signal or power output. The minimum pulse length can be configured to be
40 or 80 ms and the power outputs can all be configured to be latched.
4.1.1.4. Disturbance recorder
REF 610 includes an internal disturbance recorder which records the momentary
measured values, or the RMS curves of the measured signals, and up to eight
user-selectable digital signals: the digital input signals and the internal signals from
the protection stages. Any digital signal can be set to trigger the recorder on either
the falling or rising edge.
4.1.1.5. HMI
The HMI of REF 610 is equipped with six push-buttons, an alphanumeric
2x16 characters’ LCD, eight programmable indicator LEDs, three indicator LEDs
with fixed functionality, and an indicator LED for front communication. The
push-buttons are used for navigating in the menu structure and for adjusting setting
values.
An HMI password can be set to protect all user-changeable values from being
changed by an unauthorized person. The HMI password will remain inactive and
will thus not be required for altering parameter values until the default HMI
password has been replaced. Entering the HMI password successfully can be
selected to generate an event code. This feature can be used to indicate interaction
activities via the local HMI. For further information on the HMI, refer to the
Operator’s Manual.
4.1.1.6. Non-volatile memory
REF 610 can be configured to store various data in a non-volatile memory, which
will retain its data also in case of loss of auxiliary voltage (provided that the battery
has been inserted and is charged). Operation indication messages and LEDs,
disturbance recorder data, event codes and recorded data can all be configured to be
stored in the non-volatile memory whereas setting values will always be stored in
the EEPROM.
4.1.1.7. Self-supervision
The self-supervision system of REF 610 manages run-time fault situations and
informs the user about an existing fault. There are two types of fault indications:
internal relay fault (IRF) indications and warnings.
When the self-supervision system detects a permanent internal relay fault, which
will prevent relay operation, the green indicator LED (ready) will start to blink. At
the same time, the IRF contact, which is normally picked up, will drop off and a fault
code will appear on the LCD. The fault code is numerical and identifies the fault
type.
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
15
Fig. 4.1.1.7.-1 Permanent IRF
In case of a warning, the relay will continue to operate with full or reduced
functionality and the green indicator LED (ready) will remain lit as during normal
operation. A fault indication message (see Fig. 4.1.1.7.-2), with a possible fault code
(see Fig. 4.1.1.7.-3), will appear on the LCD indicating the type of fault. In case of
a warning due to an external fault in the trip circuit detected by the trip-circuit
supervision, or due to continuous light on the light sensor inputs, SO2 will be
activated (if SGF1/8=1).
Fig. 4.1.1.7.-2 Warning with text message
Fig. 4.1.1.7.-3 Warning with numeric code
For fault codes, refer to section Self-supervision (IRF) system.
4.1.1.8. Time synchronization
Time synchronization of the relay’s real-time clock can be realized in two different
ways: via serial communication using a communication protocol or via a digital
input.
Any digital input can be configured for time synchronization and used for either
minute-pulse or second-pulse synchronization. The synchronization pulse is
automatically selected and depends on the time range within which the pulse occurs.
The time must be set once, either via serial communication or manually via the HMI.
If the synchronization pulse differs more than +/- 0.05 seconds for second-pulse or
+/- 2 seconds for minute-pulse synchronization from the relay’s real-time clock, the
synchronization pulse will be rejected.
I
n
t
F
a
u
lt
_
a
INTERNAL FAULT
FAULT CODE :30
W
a
r
n
i
n
g
_
a
WARNING
BATTERY LOW
W
a
r
n
R
E
F
6
1
0
_
a
WARNING
FAULT CODE: 33
16
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
Time synchronization is always triggered on the rising edge of the digital input
signal. The time is adjusted in steps of five milliseconds per synchronization pulse.
The typical accuracy achievable with time synchronization via a digital input is
+2.5...-2.5 milliseconds for second-pulse and +5...-5 milliseconds for minute-pulse
synchronization.
Note!
The pulse length of the digital input signal does not affect time synchronization.
4.1.2. Measurements
The table below presents the measured values which can be accessed through the
HMI:
4.1.3. Configuration
Fig. 4.1.3.-1 illustrates how the internal and digital input signals can be configured
to obtain the required protection functionality.
Table 4.1.2-1 Measured values
Indicator Description
L1 Current measured on phase I
L1
L2 Current measured on phase I
L2
L3 Current measured on phase I
L3
I
0
Measured earth-fault current
∆I Calculated phase unbalance
θ Calculated thermal level
I
1_min
One-minute demand value
I
n_min
Demand value during the specified time range
Max I Maximum one-minute demand value during
the specified time range
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
17
Fig. 4.1.3.-1 Signal diagram
2 3 4 5 6 1
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
S
G
B
4
S
G
B
3
S
G
B
2
S
G
B
1
S
G
B
5
X
3
.
1



6




5









4




3










2




1
X
4
.
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
1
1
2
1
6
1
7
S
G
R
4
S
G
R
3
S
G
R
2
S
G
R
1
S
G
R
5
S
O
1
P
O
2
S
O
2
I
R
F

3



4


5












6


7



8










9


1
0


1
1













1
2

1
3














1
4

1
5











1
6

1
7

1
8



1
9



2
1


2
2







2
3


2
4
θ
>
I
>
I
>
>
I
>
>
>
I
R
F
I
0
>
I
0
>
>

I
>
1
3
1
4
S
G
R
7
S
G
R
8
S
O
4
S
O
5
S
G
R
6
S
O
3
X
3
.
1
1
6

1
7

1
8








1
9

2
0

2
1








2
2

2
3

2
4
1
0
1
5
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
1
1
2
1
6
1
7
1
3
1
4
1
0
1
5
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
1
1
2
1
6
1
7
1
3
1
4
1
0
1
5
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
1
1
2
1
6
1
7
1
3
1
4
1
0
1
5
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
1
1
2
1
6
1
7
1
3
1
4
1
0
1
5
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
1
1
2
1
6
1
7
1
3
1
4
1
0
1
5
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
1
1
2
1
6
1
7
1
3
1
4
1
0
1
5
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
1
1
2
1
6
1
7
1
3
1
4
1
0
1
5
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
9
1
8
1
9
1
6
1
7
2
0 8 7
2 3 4 5 6 1
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5 9
1
8
1
9
1
6
1
7
2
0 8 7
2 3 4 5 6 1
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5 9
1
8
1
9
1
6
1
7
2
0 8 7
2 3 4 5 6 1
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5 9
1
8
1
9
1
6
1
7
2
0 8 7
2 3 4 5 6 1
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5 9
1
8
1
9
1
6
1
7
2
0 8 7
0

1
C
B
F
P
P
O
3
P
O
1







1






2
~
S
ig
n
D
ia
g
r
R
E
F
6
1
0
_
a
X
5
.
1


X
5
.
2
I
L
1

I
L
2

I
L
3
I
o
S
G
F
1
.
.
.
S
G
F
5
S
G
L
1
.
.
.
S
G
L
8
D
I
3
D
I
2
D
I
1
D
I
4
D
I
5
O
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
S
t
a
r
t

T
r
i
p
B
l
o
c
k
i
n
g
S
t
a
r
t

T
r
i
p
B
l
o
c
k
i
n
g
A
r
c

l
i
g
h
t

o
u
t
p
u
t

T
r
i
p
I
n
d
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

c
l
e
a
r
e
d

O
u
t
p
u
t

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
s

u
n
l
a
t
c
h
e
d

M
e
m
o
r
i
z
e
d

v
a
l
u
e
s

c
l
e
a
r
e
d

S
e
t
t
i
n
g

g
r
o
u
p

s
e
l
e
c
t
i
o
n

T
i
m
e

s
y
n
c

E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

T
r
i
p
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

t
r
i
p
S
t
a
r
t

T
r
i
p
B
l
o
c
k
i
n
g
B
l
o
c
k
i
n
g
S
t
a
r
t

T
r
i
p
S
t
a
r
t

T
r
i
p
B
l
o
c
k
i
n
g
S
t
a
r
t

T
r
i
p
A
l
a
r
m

T
r
i
p
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

A
r
c
A
r
c

I
>
/
I
0
>
C
B

P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n

O
p
e
n

C
B

P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n

C
l
o
s
e
d

A
R

I
n
h
i
b
i
t

C
B

C
l
o
s
e

I
n
h
i
b
i
t

E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

A
R

I
n
i
t
i
a
t
i
o
n

O
p
e
n

C
B

C
o
m
m
a
n
d

C
l
o
s
e

C
B

C
o
m
m
a
n
d

C
B

R
e
c
l
o
s
i
n
g

F
a
i
l
e
d

S
h
o
t

D
u
e

D
e
f
i
n
i
t
e

T
r
i
p

A
l
a
r
m

A
R

L
o
c
k
o
u
t

E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

T
r
i
g
g
e
r
i
n
g

R
e
s
e
t
T
r
i
p

l
o
c
k
o
u
t
O
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

T
r
i
g
g
e
r
i
n
g
T
r
i
p
W
a
r
n
i
n
g
L
i
g
h
t

s
e
n
s
o
r

1

L
i
g
h
t

s
e
n
s
o
r

2
T
r
ip

lo
c
k
o
u
t
O
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
S
e
l
f
-
s
u
p
e
r
v
i
s
i
o
n
18
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
The functions of the relay are selected with the switches of switchgroups SGF, SGB,
SGR and SGL. The checksums of the switchgroups are found under SETTINGS in
the HMI menu. The functions of the switches are explained in detail in the
corresponding SG_ tables.
4.1.4. Protection
4.1.4.1. Block diagram
Fig. 4.1.4.1.-1 Block diagram
LED1
LED2
LED3
LED4
LED5
LED6
LED7
LED8
I
L1
I
L2
I
L3
PO1
PO2
PO3
SO1
SO2
SO3
SO4
SO5
IRF
SGB1...5
SGR1...5
I
0
SGL1...8
SGF1...SGF5
BlockDiagrREF610_a
I
L 1
I
L 2
I
L 3
I
0
θ>
CBFP
IL1
IL2
IL3
I
Io
Io
I>>> ∆I>
Start
Trip
I>>
I>
Io>>
Io>
Arc I>, Arc I
0
>
Programmable
LEDs
Disturbance recorder
(4 analogue + up to 8 digital channels)
Digital outputs
(Output contacts)
IRF INDICATION
START/ALARM INDICATION
TRIP INDICATION
IRF indication LED (green)
Start/Alarm (yellow) and
trip (red) indication LEDs
I> Start
I> Trip
I>> Start
I>> Trip
I>>> Start
I>>> Trip
I
0
> Start
I
0
> Trip
I
0
>> Start
I
0
>> Trip
∆I> Start
∆I> Trip
θ> Alarm
θ> Trip
Ext Trip
Open CB Cmd
Close CB Cmd
Definite Trip Alarm
CB Reclose Failled
Shot Due
AR Lockout
Arc Trip
Arc light output
The dashed line indicates optional functionality.
1) Clear indications by the digital input signal
2) Clear indications and unlatch output contacts by the
digital input signal
3) Reset indications and memorized values; unlatch output
contacts by the digital input signal
Optional digital
inputs
(I/O module)
Digital inputs
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
Switchgroups for
digital inputs Protection relay functions
Analogue inputs
Switchgroups for
programmable LEDs
Switchgroups for
output contacts
I> Start
I> Trip
I>> Start
I>> Trip
I>>> Start
I>>> Trip
I
0
> Start
I
0
> Trip
I
0
>> Start
I
0
>> Trip
∆I> Start
∆I> Trip
θ> Alarm
θ> Trip
Trip lockout
I> Trip
I>> Trip
I>>> Trip
I
0
> Trip
I
0
>> Trip
∆I> Trip
Θ> Alarm
Θ> Trip
Trip lockout
Definite Trip Alarm
Shot Due
AR Lockout
CB Pos Open
CB Pos Closed
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
Arc Trip
Arc light output
Reset 1
1)
Reset 2
2)
Reset 3
3)
Setting group
Time sync
Ext Trip
Ext Trig CBFP
Ext Trig Trip lockout
Ext Arc
Trip lockout reset
Block I>
Block I>>
Block I
0
>
Block I
0
>>
Block ∆I>
AR Inhibit
CB Close Inhibit
CB Pos Open
CB Pos Closed
Ext AR Initiation
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
Start
Alarm
Trip
Start
Trip
PO1
EXT TRIG PO2
Block
Start
Trip
Double
Block
Block
Start
Trip
Double
Block
Start
Trip
Block
Start
Trip
0→1, AR
Autoreclose
CB Pos Open
CB Pos Closed
AR Inhibit
CB Close Inhibit
Ext AR Initiation
I> Start
I> Trip
I>> Trip
I>>> Trip
Io> Start
Io> Trip
Io>> Trip
∆I> Trip
Θ> Alarm
Θ> Trip
Arc Trip
CBFP
Open CB Cmd
Close CB Cmd
CB Reclose Failed
Shot Due
Definite Trip Alarm
AR Lockout
Block I>
Block I>>
Block I>>>
Block Io>
Block Io>>
Trip lockout
Trip lockout
Ext Trig
Reset
PO3
Light output
Trip
Light1
Light2
Ext Arc
Light sensor input1
Light sensor input2
Optional arc detector inputs
(Communication module)
Optional digital
outputs
(I/O module)
Warning
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
19
4.1.4.2. Overcurrent protection
The non-directional overcurrent protection detects overcurrent caused by
phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth short circuits.
When one or several phase currents exceed the set start value of the low-set stage,
I>, the stage will generate a start signal after a ~ 55 ms’ start time. When the set
operate time at definite-time characteristic or the calculated operate time at IDMT
characteristic elapses, the stage will generate a trip signal.
Stage I> has a settable resetting time (both at definite-time and IDMT
characteristics), t
r
, for reset coordination with existing electromechanical relays or
for reducing fault clearance times of recurring, transient faults. If stage I> has started
and the phase currents fall below the set start value of the stage, the start of the stage
will remain active for the set resetting time. If the phase currents exceed the set start
value again, while the timer is being reset, the start of the stage will remain active.
Consequently, the set resetting time ensures that when the stage starts because of
current spikes, it will not be immediately reset. However, if stage I> has already
tripped, the stage will be reset in 50 ms after all three phase currents have fallen
below 0.5 times the set start value of the stage.
The inverse-time function of stage I> can be set to be inhibited when stage I>> and/
or I>>> starts. In this case, the operate time will be determined by stage I>> and/or
I>>>. The selection is made in SGF4.
It is possible to block the tripping of the low-set overcurrent stage by applying a
digital input signal to the relay.
When one or several phase currents exceed the set start value of the high-set stage,
I>>, the stage will generate a start signal after a ~ 30 ms’ start time. When the set
operate time at definite-time characteristic elapses, the stage will generate a trip
signal. Stage I>> can be given an instantaneous characteristic by setting the operate
time to the minimum, i.e. 0.04 s.
The set start value of stage I>> can be set to be automatically doubled in a start
situation, i.e. when the object to be protected is being connected to a network.
Consequently, a set start value below the connection inrush current level can be
selected for stage I>>. A start situation is defined as a situation where the maximum
phase current rises from a value below 0.12 x I> to a value above 1.5 x I> within less
than 60 ms. The start situation ends when all phase currents fall below 1.25 x I> and
remain below for at least 200 ms. The selection is made in SGF4.
It is possible to block the tripping of the high-set overcurrent stage by applying a
digital input signal to the relay.
Stage I>> can be set out of operation in SGF3. This state will be indicated by dashes
on the LCD and by “999” when the set start value is read via serial communication.
When one or several phase currents exceed the set start value of the instantaneous
stage, I>>>, the stage will generate a start signal after a ~ 30 ms’ start time. When
the set operate time at definite-time characteristic elapses, the stage will generate a
trip signal. Stage I>>> can be given an instantaneous characteristic by setting the
operate time to the minimum, i.e. 0.04 s.
20
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
Stage I>>> can be set out of operation in SGF3. This state will be indicated by
dashes on the LCD and by “999” when the set start value is read via serial
communication.
Stages I>> and I>>> will be reset in 50 ms after all three phase currents have fallen
below the set start value of the stage.
Note!
Stages I> and I>> can be set to be blocked by the auto-reclose function.
4.1.4.3. Earth-fault protection
The non-directional earth-fault current protection detects phase-to-earth currents,
caused by insulation failure due to ageing and thermal cycling, for instance.
When the earth-fault current exceeds the set start value of the low-set stage, I
0
>, the
stage will generate a start signal after a ~ 60 ms’ start time. When the set operate time
at definite-time characteristic or the calculated operate time at IDMT characteristic
elapses, the stage will generate a trip signal. The low-set stage can be given an
instantaneous characteristic by setting the operate time to the minimum, i.e. 0.05 s.
Stage I
0
> has a settable resetting time (both at definite-time and IDMT
characteristics), t
r0
, for reset coordination with existing electromechanical relays or
for reducing fault clearance times of recurring, transient faults. If stage I
0
> has
started and the earth-fault current falls below the set start value of the stage, the start
of the stage will remain active for the set resetting time. If the earth-fault current
exceeds the set start value again, while the timer is being reset, the start of the stage
will remain active. Consequently, the set resetting time ensures that when the stage
starts because of current spikes, it will not be immediately reset. However, if stage
I
0
> has already tripped, the stage will be reset in 50 ms after the earth-fault current
has fallen below 0.5 times the set start value of the stage.
The inverse-time function of stage I
0
> can be set to be inhibited when stage I
0
>>
starts. In this case, the operate time will be determined by stage I
0
>>. The selection
is made in SGF4.
When the earth-fault current exceeds the set start value of the high-set stage, I
0
>>,
the stage will generate a start signal after a ~ 40 ms’ start time. When the set operate
time at definite-time characteristic elapses, the stage will generate a trip signal. The
high-set stage can be given an instantaneous characteristic by setting the operate
time to the minimum, i.e. 0.04 s. The stage will be reset in 50 ms after the earth-fault
current has fallen below the set start value of the stage.
The set start value of stage I
0
>> can be set to be automatically doubled in a start
situation, i.e. when the object to be protected is being connected to a network.
Consequently, a set start value below the connection inrush current level can be
selected for the stage. A start situation is defined as a situation where the earth-fault
current rises from a value below 0.12 x I
0
> to a value above 1.5 x I
0
> within less
than 60 ms. The start situation ends when the current falls below 1.25 x I
0
> and
remain below for at least 200 ms. The selection is made in SGF4.
Stage I
0
>> can be set out of operation in SGF3. This state will be indicated by dashes
on the LCD and by “999” when the set start value is read via serial communication.
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
21
It is possible to block the tripping of an earth-fault stage by applying a digital input
signal to the relay.
Note!
Stages I
0
> and I
0
>> can be set to be blocked by the auto-reclose function.
4.1.4.4. Thermal protection for cables
The thermal protection detects long-time overloads during normal operation.
Prolonged overloading results in the thermal stress capacity of the cable being
exceeded, which degrades the insulation of the cable, which in turn may cause a
short circuit or an earth fault. The heating up of the cable follows an exponential
curve, the levelled-out value of which is determined by the squared value of the load
current. The thermal protection may equally well be used to protect dry-type
transformers, capacitor banks, busbars and overhead lines, for instance.
The thermal protection stage continuously calculates the thermal capacity used as a
percentage of the cable’s total thermal capacity. The thermal capacity is calculated
as follows:
where
θ = thermal capacity
I = phase current value
I
θ
= set full load current
t = time (in minutes)
τ = time constant (in minutes)
When one or several phase currents exceed the set full load current, I
θ
, stage θ> will
start. At the same time, the thermal capacity will start to increase at a rate depending
on the current amplitude and the prior load of the cable.
When the thermal capacity, influenced by the thermal history of the cable, exceeds
the set alarm level, θ
a
>, the stage will generate an alarm signal. The thermal alarm
can be used to avoid unnecessary tripping due to a beginning overload. The thermal
level at various constant currents are presented in the table below:
Table 4.1.4.4-1 Thermal level at constant currents
I/I
n
Thermal level (%)
1.0 90.7
0.9 73.5
0.8 58
0.7 44.4
0.5 22.7
0.3 8.2
0 0
θ
I
1.05 I
θ
×
---------------------
\ .
| |
2
1 e
t τ ⁄ –
– ( ) × 100% × =
22
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
When the thermal capacity exceeds the trip level, θ
t
>, the stage will generate a trip
signal. The operate time, i.e. the time from when the stage starts until it trips, is
determined by the time constant, τ, and depends on the cable (cable cross section
area and cable rated voltage). The time constant is provided by the cable
manufacturer. For a 22 kV cable, the typical time constant is 20 minutes. For operate
times, see Fig. 4.1.4.4.-1...Fig. 4.1.4.4.-3.
The operate time is calculated as follows:
where
I = phase current value
I
θ
= set full load current
I
p
= prior load current
t = operate time (in minutes)
τ = time constant (in minutes)
ln = natural logarithm
At power up, the thermal level will be set to 75 percent of the thermal capacity of
the cable. This will ensure that the stage will trip within a safe time span in case of
an overload. The calculated thermal level will approach the thermal level of the
cable.
Stage θ> can be set out of operation in SGF3. This state will be indicated by dashes
on the LCD and by “999” when the set full load current is read via serial
communication.
Note!
At an alarm level below 75 percent, connecting the auxiliary supply to the relay will
cause a thermal alarm due to the initialization of the thermal level to 75 percent of
the thermal capacity of the cable. The thermal level can be reset via the HMI during
power up.
Note!
The thermal level can be reset or changed via serial communication, which will
generate an event code.
t τ ln
I I
θ
⁄ ( )
2
I
p
I
θ
⁄ ( )
2

I I
θ
⁄ ( )
2
1.1025 –
--------------------------------------------
¹ )
´ `
¦ ¹
× =
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
23
Fig. 4.1.4.4.-1 Trip curves when no prior load
q
P
r
L
o
a
d
0
_
a
1000
100000
10000
t/s
100
10
1
0
1
1
10
5
10
15
25
40
60
90
t[min]
I/I
1.05
24
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
Fig. 4.1.4.4.-2 Trip curves at prior load 0.7 x I
n
q
P
r
L
o
a
d
0
.
7
_
a
1000
100000
10000
t/s
100
10
1
0
1
1
10
5
10
15
25
40
60
90
t[min]
I/I
1.05
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
25
Fig. 4.1.4.4.-3 Trip curves at prior load 1 x I
n
q
P
r
L
o
a
d
1
_
a
1000
100000
10000
t/s
100
10
1
0
1
10
5
10
15
25
40
60
90
t[min]
I/I
1.05
1
26
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
4.1.4.5. Phase discontinuity protection
The phase discontinuity protection detects phase unbalance between phases I
L1
, I
L2

and I
L3
, caused by a broken conductor, for instance. The difference between the
minimum and maximum phase currents is calculated as follows:
When the current difference exceeds the set start value of the phase discontinuity
stage, ∆I>, the stage will generate a start signal after a ~ 100 ms’ start time. When
the set operate time at definite-time characteristic elapses, the stage will generate a
trip signal. The stage will be reset in 70 ms after the current difference has fallen
below the set start value of the stage.
The phase discontinuity protection will be inhibited when all phase currents fall
below 0.1 x I
n
.
It is possible to block the tripping of the phase discontinuity stage by applying a
digital input signal to the relay.
Stage ∆I>

can be set out of operation in SGF3. This state will be indicated by dashes
on the LCD and by “999” when the set start value is read via serial communication.
4.1.4.6. Circuit-breaker failure protection
The circuit-breaker failure protection (CBFP) detects situations where the trip
remains active although the circuit breaker should have operated.
If a trip signal generated via output PO1 is still active and the current has not been
cut off on expiration of the CBFP set operate time, the CBFP will generate a trip
signal via output PO2.
Note!
The CBFP will not be triggered in case of a thermal alarm, thermal or external trip.
The CBFP can also be selected to be triggered by applying a digital input signal to
the relay. In this case, the CBFP will generate a trip signal via output PO2 if the
current has not been cut off on expiration of the set operate time.
Internal triggering is selected by activating the CBFP in SGF and external triggering
by activating the CBFP in SGB. Both triggering options can be selected at the same
time.
Normally, the CBFP controls the upstream circuit breaker. However, it can also be
used for tripping via redundant trip circuits of the same circuit breaker.
4.1.4.7. Arc protection
The arc protection detects arc situations in air insulated metal-clad switchgears,
caused by human error during maintenance or poor contact in the cable connections,
for instance. Local light detection requires the optional arc light detection hardware.
The arc protection can be realized as a stand-alone function in a single REF 610 or
as a station-wide arc protection including several REF 610 protection relays. If
realized as a station-wide arc protection, different tripping schemes can be selected
∆I
Imax Imin – ( )
Imax
----------------------------------- 100% × =
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
27
for the operation of the circuit breakers of the incoming and outgoing feeders.
Consequently, the REF 610 relays in the station can, for instance, be set to trip the
circuit breaker of either the incoming or the outgoing feeder depending on the fault
location in the switchgear. For maximum safety, the REF 610 relays can be set to
always trip both the circuit breaker of the incoming feeder and that of the outgoing
feeder.
The arc protection consists of:
• optional arc light detection hardware with automatic backlight compensation for
two lens sensors
• a light signal output for routing the locally detected light signal to another relay
• the protection stage ARC with phase- and earth-fault current measurement.
The light from an arc is detected either locally or via a remote light signal. Locally,
the light is detected by lens sensors connected to inputs Light sensor 1 and Light
sensor 2 on the serial communication module of the relay. The lens sensors can be
placed, for instance, in the busbar compartment and the cable compartment of the
metal-clad cubicle.
The light detected by the lens sensors is compared to an automatically adjusted
reference level. Inputs Light sensor 1 and Light sensor 2 have their own reference
levels. When the reference level of either or both inputs is exceeded, an arc has been
detected locally.
When light has been detected locally or remotely and one or several phase currents
exceed the set current limit ArcI>, or the earth-fault current the set current limit
ArcI
0
>, the arc protection stage (ARC) will generate a trip signal in less than 15 ms.
The stage will be reset in 30 ms after all three phase currents and the earth-fault
current have fallen below the set current limits.
The light signal output, L>, can be configured to be activated either immediately
upon detection of light in all situations, or only when the arc has not been
extinguished by the time the trip signal is generated. The selection is made in SGF4.
By routing the light signal output to an output contact connected to a digital input of
another REF 610 relay, a station-wide arc protection is realized.
Stage ARC and the light signal output can be set out of operation in SGF3.
Note!
Inputs not in use should be covered with dust caps.
Note!
The warning signal generated in case of continuous light on the light sensor inputs
can be routed to SO2 by setting switch SGF1/8 to 1.
28
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
Fig. 4.1.4.7.-1 Block diagram of the arc protection
4.1.4.8. Auto-reclose function
The vast majority of MV overhead line faults are transient and automatically cleared
by momentarily de-energizing the line. De-energizing of the fault location for a
selected time period is implemented through automatic reclosing, during which
most faults can be cleared.
At a permanent fault, auto-reclosing is followed by definite tripping. A permanent
fault must be located and cleared before the fault location can be re-energized.
The auto-reclose (AR) function of REF 610 can be used with any circuit breaker
suitable for auto-reclosing. The AR function provides three programmable
auto-reclose shots and can thus be set to perform one to three successive
auto-reclosures of desired type and duration, one high-speed and one delayed, for
instance.
The AR function can be initiated by start and trip signals from certain overcurrent
and earth-fault protection stages. Consequently, tripping of the arc protection stage,
for instance, does not initiate the AR function. Initiation is also possible from an
external device via a digital input.
The AR function can be inhibited (AR Inhibit) by trip signals from certain
protection stages or via a digital input. Inhibition is advantageous with tripping
faults as this type of fault cannot be cleared during an auto-reclose sequence.
Tripping faults are detected by the CBFP, for instance. Inhibition will also interrupt
any ongoing shot.
The initiation of one or several auto-reclose shots can be set to be blocked by trip
signals from certain protection stages. Blocking is also possible via a digital input.
Blocking can be used to limit the number of shots in an auto-reclose sequence, which
may be advantageous with certain types of faults. In case of shot initiation while a
blocking is active, the next shot will be initiated.
The AR function monitors the position and status of the circuit breaker. Information
on the circuit-breaker position is always required whereas circuit-breaker status is
optional. For safety reasons, shot initiation is not possible when the circuit breaker
is open. If the circuit breaker is not ready, due to an discharged spring, for instance,
Arc I>
Arc I
0
>
SGF3/6=1
SGF3/7=1
SGF4/6=0
A
r
c
R
E
F
6
1
0
_
a
Î
L
Î
0
25 ms
t
Arc protection
Arc Trip
L> light output
Light sensor 1
Light sensor 2
External Arc
AND
OR
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
29
reclosing can be inhibited via a digital input (CB Close Inhibit). Inhibition of
reclosing is checked only when necessary and can therefore not be used to prevent
initiation or progression of a shot.
For co-ordination of the other protection devices in the network, such as
down-stream fuses, the AR function supports optional blocking of selectable
overcurrent and earth-fault protection stages (refer to section Blocking of protection
stages). By setting a stage with a short operate time to trip and initiate only the first
auto-reclose shot, fast tripping and shot initiation will be achieved. After this, the
stage will be blocked to allow selective delayed tripping of another stage in
accordance with the time-grading plan of the system.
The typical auto-reclose sequence is as follows: the overcurrent or earth-fault
protection detects a network fault, trips the circuit breaker and initiates the first
auto-reclose shot. At the time of shot initiation, the set dead time for shot 1 will start.
When the set dead time elapses, the blocking of selected protection stages will be
activated and the AR function will issue a reclosing command (Close CB
Command) to the circuit breaker, the duration of which is settable. In addition, the
set reclaim time and set cutout time will start when the set dead time elapses. The
blocking of protection stages will be reset on expiration of the cutout time. For the
cutout time, refer to section Fast tripping and initiation of shot 1 using two protection
stages.
If the network fault is cleared, i.e. the auto-reclosure is successful, the set reclaim
time will expire and the AR function will be automatically reset to the quiescent
condition.
However, if the network fault is not cleared, i.e. the auto-reclosure is unsuccessful,
and the protection trips the circuit breaker before expiration of the set reclaim time,
the next shot will be initiated (provided that a further auto-reclosure is allowed). At
the time of shot initiation, the set dead time for shot 2 will start. When the set dead
time elapses, the blocking of selected protection stages (may differ from shot 1) will
be activated and the AR function will issue a reclosing command to the circuit
breaker. In addition, the set reclaim time and set cutout time will start when the set
dead time elapses. The blocking of protection stages will be reset on expiration of
the set cutout time.
If the network fault is cleared, the AR function will be automatically reset after the
reclaim time. However, if the fault is not cleared and the protection trips the circuit
breaker before expiration of the reclaim time, the next shot will be initiated
(provided that a further auto-reclosure is allowed). At the time of shot initiation, the
set dead time for shot 3 will start. When the set dead time elapses, the blocking of
selected protection stages (the same as for shot 2) will be activated and the AR
function will issue a reclosing command to the circuit breaker. In addition, the set
reclaim time and set cutout time will start when the set dead time elapses. The
blocking of protection stages will be reset on expiration of the set cutout time.
If the network fault has still not been cleared, i.e. all selected auto-reclose shots have
been unsuccessful, and the protection trips the circuit breaker before expiration of
the set reclaim time, the AR function will generate a definite trip alarm. The circuit
breaker will now remain open and the AR function will be locked out.
30
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
As default, the AR function is not in use (number of auto-reclose shots = 0). The AR
function can be activated either via the HMI or with SPA parameter S25 by setting
the number of auto-reclose shots to 1, 2 or 3.
Fig. 4.1.4.8.-1 Simplified shot logic diagram
Shot initiation
The AR function can be initiated by any of the following signals:
• external AR initiation signal
• start signal from stages I> and I
0
>
• trip signal from stages I>, I>>, I
0
> and I
0
>>
The start signal from stages I> and I
0
> will initiate a shot on expiration of a settable
start delay for the respective stage. At the factory default delay of 300 s, the start
signal will, in practise, not be used for shot initiation. External AR initiation by the
digital input signal is selected in SGB.
Note!
Shot initiation by a start signal applies only to shot 1 and definite tripping.
Note!
The AR function will issue an opening command to the circuit breaker at shot
initiation by a start or a trip signal.
t
t
A
R
S
h
o
t
R
E
F
6
1
0
_
a
t
t
OR
Shot 1
Shot 2
Shot 3
AND
CB Close Inhibit
OR
S
R
Shot Due
Close CB Command
Shot Initiation
AND
S
R OR
CB position closed
CB Reclosing Failed
Dead time
CB closing time
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
31
Fig. 4.1.4.8.-2 Simplified shot initiation logic diagram
Blocking of shot initiation
The initiation of one or several auto-reclose shots can be set to be blocked by any of
the following signals:
• external AR initiation signal
• trip signal from overcurrent stages I> and I>>
• trip signal from earth-fault stages I
0
> and I
0
>>
The selection is made in SG1 (see table 4.1.4.10-10).
Blocking of shot initiation can also be used to skip the entire shot sequence (by
blocking the initiation of all three shots), and go directly to definite tripping. Further,
it can be used, for instance, to allow shot initiation by the trip signal from stage I>,
but to go directly to definite tripping in case of shot initiation by the trip signal from
stage I>>.
Note!
Activation of any above-mentioned signal will always cause the AR function to
issue an opening command to the circuit breaker. If the signal used for blocking is
not simultaneously used for initiation of the next shot, the AR function will generate
a definite trip alarm and be locked out.
Note!
Shot initiation is blocked only for as long as the blocking signal is active.
Note!
In case of shot initiation while a blocking is active, the next shot (if such has been
selected and not blocked) will be initiated. This can be used to skip Shot 1, for
instance.
t
100 ms
t
SG1/
1...8
A
R
I
n
i
t
R
E
F
6
1
0
_
a
t
AND
I>> Trip
Ext AR Initiation
I> Trip

I> Start
*)


Io>> Trip
Io> Trip


Open CB Command
CB position closed
Shot Due
AND
Shot Initiation
Blocking of shot
Io> Start
*)
*)
Shot initiation by a start signal applies only to shot 1 and definite tripping.
OR
OR
OR Io> start delay
I> start delay
32
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
Inhibition of the auto-reclose function
The AR function can be inhibited (AR Inhibit) by any of the following signals:
• external AR inhibit signal
• trip signal from the arc protection stage, ARC
• trip signal from the thermal protection stage, θ>
• trip signal from the CBFP
• alarm signal from the thermal protection stage, θ>
• trip signal from overcurrent stage I>>>
• trip signal from earth-fault stage I
0
>>
• trip signal from the phase discontinuity stage, ∆I>
The trip signals from stages ARC and θ> and from the CBFP are fixed and will thus
always inhibit the AR function. External AR inhibition by the digital input signal is
selected in SGB, and the alarm signal from stage θ> and the trip signals from stages
I>>>, I
0
>> and ∆I> in SG3 (see table 4.1.4.10-12).
Note!
The AR function will remain inhibited after all inhibition signals have been reset for
a time equal in length to the set reclaim time.
Note!
Inhibition will always also interrupt any ongoing shot.
Information on the circuit-breaker position
The AR function requires information on the circuit-breaker position. Any digital
input can be selected for the information on the circuit breaker being open (CB
Position Open) and closed (CB Position Closed) in SGB. Normally, two
digital inputs is recommended although either one is enough for the AR function.
Information on the circuit-breaker position is used in the following situations:
• At manual circuit-breaker closing, the AR function will be inhibited for the
reclaim time.
• At manual circuit-breaker closing during an ongoing shot, the shot will be
interrupted and the AR function inhibited during the reclaim time.
• Shot initiation is allowed only when the circuit breaker is closed.
• Reclosing of the circuit breaker is ended immediately after the AR function has
received information that the circuit breaker has been closed.
Circuit-breaker closing
When the set dead time elapses, the AR function will issue a reclosing command to
the circuit breaker (Close CB Command). Reclosing can be inhibited via a digital
input (CB Close Inhibit). External inhibition of reclosing by the digital input
signal is selected in SGB.
When reclosing is inhibited, or the circuit breaker does not close before expiration
of the set CB closing time, the circuit breaker will remain open and the AR function
will generate a CB Reclosing Failed signal.
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
33
Reclosing is inhibited and the CB Reclosing Failed signal generated also if
an AR initiation signal is active, i.e. the fault has not been cleared, when reclosing
begins.
The duration of the reclosing command is settable (CB closing time). However,
reclosing of the circuit breaker will end immediately after the AR function has
received information that the circuit breaker has been closed, or if a protection trips
the circuit breaker again.
Blocking of protection stages
In several applications, such as fuse-saving (refer to section Fast tripping and
initiation of shot 1 using two protection stages), the aim is at fast tripping and
initiation of shot 1 and delayed tripping and initiation of shot 2 and 3. Consequently,
if two protection stages are used, one fast and the other one delayed, the fast stage
should be set to be blocked by the AR function during shot 2 and 3.
The protection stages can be set to be blocked at shot 1 and/or shot 2 and 3. The
selection is made in SG2 (see table 4.1.4.10-11).
Definite trip alarm
The AR function will generate a definite trip alarm signal after an unsuccessful
auto-reclose sequence, i.e. when no more auto-reclose shots are allowed but the
network fault has not be cleared, the circuit breaker is open and there is no ongoing
shot. The definite trip alarm signal will also be generated in case a protection trips
the circuit breaker while the AR function is inhibited.
Note!
The definite trip alarm signal is active for 1 second.
Note!
The definite trip alarm signal will not be generated if the AR function has been set
out of operation.
Lockout of the auto-reclose function
The lockout signal indicates whether the AR function is ready for shot initiation. The
AR function will be locked out in any of the following situations:
• the AR function generates a definite trip alarm
• the AR function is inhibited
• circuit-breaker closing fails
• manual circuit-breaker closing is detected
The lockout signal will be reset and the AR function ready for shot initiation on
expiration of the set reclaim time. The set reclaim time will start when the definite
trip alarm signal, the AR inhibition signal or the CB reclosing failed signal
has been reset or the circuit breaker closed, depending on the reason for the AR
function being locked.
34
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
4.1.4.9. Inverse definite minimum time characteristics
The low-set overcurrent and earth-fault stages can be given an inverse definite
minimum time (IDMT) characteristic. At IDMT characteristic, the operate time of
the stage is dependent on the current value: the higher the current value, the shorter
the operate time.
REF 610 provides eight IDMT characteristics, of which four comply with the IEC
60255-3 and three with the IEEE C37.112 standard. One is a special characteristic
according to ABB praxis and is referred to as RI.
The time/current characteristics can be selected either via the HMI or the SPA bus
as follows:
IDMT characteristics according to IEC 60255-3
REF 610 provides four time/current curve groups which comply with the IEC
60255-3 standard: normal inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse and long-time
inverse. The relationship between time and current is expressed as follows:
where
t = operate time
I = phase (or earth-fault) current value
k (or k
0
) = time multiplier
I> (or I
0
>) = set start value
Note!
The actual operate time of the relay (see Fig. 4.1.4.9.-1...Fig. 4.1.4.9.-4), includes an
additional filter and detection time, and the operate time of the trip output contact.
When the operate time of the relay is calculated as above, approximately 30 ms
should be added to the result.
Table 4.1.4.9-1 Time/current characteristic settings
Value Time/current characteristic
0 Definite time
1 IEC Extremely inverse
2 IEC Very inverse
3 IEC Normal inverse
4 IEC Long-time inverse
5 RI-type
6 IEEE Extremely inverse
7 IEEE Very inverse
8 IEEE Moderately inverse
t s ] [
β
I
I>
-----
\ .
| |
α
1 –
-----------------------
\

|
.
|
|
|
k × =
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
35
According to the standard, the normal current range is 2...20 times the set start value
at normal inverse, very inverse or extremely inverse characteristic. The relay is to
start before the current exceeds the set start value by 1.3 times. At long-time inverse
characteristic, the normal current range is specified to be 2...7 times the set start
value, and the relay is to start before the current exceeds the set start value by 1.1
times.
1)
E = accuracy in percent; - = not specified
2)
or I
0
/I
0
>
Within the normal current range the inverse-time stage fulfils the tolerance
requirements of class 5 at all degrees of inversity.
The time/current curve groups based on the IEC standard are illustrated in
Fig. 4.1.4.9.-1...Fig. 4.1.4.9.-4.
Note!
If the ratio between the current and the set start value is higher than 20, the operate
time will be the same as when the ratio is 20.
Table 4.1.4.9-2 Values of constants α and β
Time/current curve group α β
Normal inverse 0.02 0.14
Very inverse 1.0 13.5
Extremely inverse 2.0 80.0
Long-time inverse 1.0 120
Table 4.1.4.9-3 Operate time tolerances specified by the standard
1)
I/I>
2)
Normal Very Extremely Long time
2 2,22E 2,34E 2,44E 2,34E
5 1,13E 1,26E 1,48E 1,26E
7 - - - 1,00E
10 1,01E 1,01E 1,02E -
20 1,00E 1,00E 1,00E -
36
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
Fig. 4.1.4.9.-1 Normal inverse-time characteristic
k
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
20
30
40
70
60
50
t/s
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 2 20 I/I>
0.02
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.06
0.07
0.08
0.09
0.1
0.05
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
0.5
0.7
0.9
I
E
C
_
N
o
I
n
v
R
E
F
6
1
0
_
a
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
37
Fig. 4.1.4.9.-2 Very inverse-time characteristic
k
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
20
30
40
70
60
50
t/s
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 2 20 I/I>
0.02
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.06
0.07
0.08
0.09
0.1
0.05
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
0.7
0.5
0.9
I
E
C
_
V
e
I
n
v
R
E
F
6
1
0
_
a
38
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
Fig. 4.1.4.9.-3 Extremely inverse-time characteristic
k
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
20
30
40
70
60
50
t/s
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 2 20 I/I>
0.02
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.06
0.07
0.08
0.09
0.1
0.05
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
I
E
C
_
E
x
I
n
v
R
E
F
6
1
0
_
a
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
39
Fig. 4.1.4.9.-4 Long-time inverse-time characteristic
k
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
200
300
400
700
600
500
t/s
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 2 20 I/I>
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1
0.05
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.7
1.0
I
E
C
_
L
o
I
n
v
R
E
F
6
1
0
_
a
0.5
0.6
0.8
0.9
40
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
IDMT characteristics according to the IEEE C37.112
REF 610 provides three time/current curve groups which comply with the IEEE
C37.112 standard: extremely inverse, very inverse and moderately inverse. The
relationship between time and current is expressed as follows:
where
t = operate time
I = phase (or earth-fault) current value
n (or n
0
) = time dial
I> (or I
0
>) = set start value
Note!
The actual operate time of the relay (see Fig. 4.1.4.9.-5...Fig. 4.1.4.9.-7), includes an
additional filter and detection time, and the operate time of the trip output contact.
When the operate time of the relay is calculated as above, approximately 30 ms
should be added to the result.
The time/current curve groups based on the IEEE standard are illustrated in
Fig. 4.1.4.9.-5...Fig. 4.1.4.9.-7.
Table 4.1.4.9-4 Values of constants A, B and P
Time/current curve group A B P
Extremely inverse 6.407 0.025 2.0
Very inverse 2.855 0.0712 2.0
Moderately inverse 0.0086 0.0185 0.02
t s [ ]
A
I
I>
-----
\ .
| |
P
1 –
----------------------- B +
\ .
|
|
|
| |
n × =
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
41
Fig. 4.1.4.9.-5 Extremely inverse-time characteristic
n
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
20
30
40
70
60
50
t/s
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 2 20 I/I>
0.02
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.06
0.07
0.08
0.09
0.1
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
15
A
N
S
I
_
E
x
I
n
v
R
E
F
6
1
0
_
a
10
12
42
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
Fig. 4.1.4.9.-6 Very inverse-time characteristic
n
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
20
30
40
70
60
50
t/s
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 2 20 I/I>
0.02
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.06
0.07
0.08
0.09
0.1
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
15
A
N
S
I
_
V
e
I
n
v
R
E
F
6
1
0
_
a
10
12
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
43
Fig. 4.1.4.9.-7 Moderately inverse-time characteristic
n
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
20
30
40
70
60
50
t/s
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 2 20 I/I>
0.02
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.06
0.07
0.08
0.09
0.1
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
15
A
N
S
I
_
M
o
I
n
v
R
E
F
6
1
0
_
a
10
12
44
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
RI-type characteristic
The RI-type characteristic is a special characteristic which is principally used for
obtaining time grading with mechanical relays. The relationship between time and
current is expressed as follows:
where
t = operate time
I = phase (or earth-fault) current value
k (or k
0
) = time multiplier
I> (or I
0
>) = set start value
Note!
The actual operate time of the relay (see Fig. 4.1.4.9.-8), includes an additional filter
and detection time, and the operate time of the trip output contact. When the operate
time of the relay is calculated as above, approximately 30 ms should be added to the
result.
The RI-type characteristic is illustrated in Fig. 4.1.4.9.-8.
t s [ ]
k
0.339 0.236
I>
I
----- × –
--------------------------------------------- =
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
45
Fig. 4.1.4.9.-8 RI-type characteristic
k
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
20
30
40
70
60
50
t/s
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 2 20 I/I>
0.02
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.06
0.07
0.08
0.09
0.1
0.05
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
1.0
R
I
_
I
n
v
R
E
F
6
1
0
_
a
0.8
0.9
0.1
46
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
4.1.4.10. Settings
There are two alternative setting groups available, setting groups 1 and 2. Either of
these setting groups can be used as the actual settings, one at a time. Both groups
have their related registers. By switching between the setting groups, a whole group
of settings can be changed at the same time. This can be done in any of the following
ways:
• via the HMI
• entering SPA parameter V150 via serial communication
• via a digital input
Note!
Switching between setting groups via a digital input has higher priority than via the
HMI or with V150.
The setting values can be altered via the HMI or with a PC provided with the Relay
Setting Tool.
Before the relay is connected to a system it must be assured that the relay has been
given the correct settings. If there is any doubt, the setting values should be read with
the relay trip circuits disconnected or tested with current injection; refer to section
Check lists for additional information.
Table 4.1.4.10-1 Setting values
Setting Description Setting range Default setting
I>/I
n
Start value of stage I> 0.30...5.00 x I
n
0.30 x I
n
t> Operate time of stage I> 0.05...300 s 0.05 s
IDMT I> Time/current characteristic for stage
I>
0...8 0
k Time multiplier k 0.05...1.00 0.05
n Time multiplier n 1.0...15.0 1.0
t
r
> Resetting time of stage I> 0.05...2.50 s 0.05 s
I>>/I
n
Start value of stage I>> 0.50...35.0 x I
n
0.50 x I
n
t>> Operate time of stage I>> 0.04...300 s 0.04 s
I>>>/I
n
Start value of stage I>>> 0.50...35.0 x I
n
0.50 x I
n
t>>> Operate time of stage I>>> 0.04...30.0 s 0.04 s
I
0
>/I
n
Start value of stage I
0
> 1.0...100% I
n
1.0% I
n
t
0
> Operate time of stage I
0
> 0.05...300 s 0.05 s
IDMT I
0
> Time/current characteristic for stage
I
0
>
0...8 0
k
0
Time multiplier k
0
0.05...1.00 s 0.05 s
n
0
Time multiplier n
0
1.0…15.0 1.0
t
r0
> Resetting time of stage I
0
> 0.05...2.50 0.05
I
0
>>/I
n
Start value of stage I
0
>> 5.0...400% I
n
5.0% I
n
t
0
>> Operate time of stage I
0
>> 0.05...300 s 0.05 s
∆I> Start value of stage ∆I> 10...100% 100%
t

> Operate time of stage ∆I> 1...300 s 60 s
I
θ
Full load current 0.30...1.50 x I
n
0.30 x I
n
τ Time constant of stage θ> 1...200 min 1 min
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
47
θ
a
> Alarm level of stage θ> 50...100% θ
t
> 95% θ
t
>
CBFP Operate time of CBFP 0.10...60.0 s 0.10 s
0→1 Number of AR shots 0 = AR is not in use
1 = shot 1
2 = shot 1 and 2
3 = shot 1, 2 and 3
0
ArcI> Current limit ArcI> of stage ARC 0.50...35.0 x I
n
2.50 x I
n
ArcI
0
> Current limit ArcI
0
> of stage ARC 5.0...400% I
n
20.0% I
n
Table 4.1.4.10-1 Setting values
Setting Description Setting range Default setting
48
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
Switchgroups and parameter masks
The settings can be altered and the functions of the relay selected in the SG_ selector
switchgroups. The switchgroups are software based and thus not physical switches
to be found in the hardware of the relay.
A checksum is used for verifying that the switches have been properly set. The
figure below shows an example of manual checksum calculation.
Fig. 4.1.4.10.-1 An example of calculating the checksum of a SG_ selector
switchgroup
When the checksum, calculated according to the example above, equals the
checksum of the switchgroup, the switches in the switchgroup have been properly
set.
The factory default settings of the switches and the corresponding checksums are
presented in the tables below.
Switch
number
Position Weighting
factor
Value
1 1 x 1 = 1
2 0 x 2 = 0
3 1 x 4 = 4
4 0 x 8 = 0
5 1 x 16 = 16
6 0 x 32 = 0
7 1 x 64 = 64
8 0 x 128 = 0
9 1 x 256 = 256
10 0 x 512 = 0
11 1 x 1024 = 1024
12 0 x 2048 = 0
13 1 x 4096 = 4096
14 0 x 8192 = 0
15 1 x 16384 = 16384
16 0 x 32768 = 0
17 1 x 65536 = 65536
18 0 x 131072 = 0
19 1 x 262144 = 262144
20 0 x 524288 = 0
21 1 x 1048576 = 1048576
22 0 x 2097152 = 0
23 1 x 4194304 = 4194304
checksum SG_ ∑ = 5505024
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
49
SGF1...SGF5
Switchgroups SGF1...SGF5 are used for configuring the desired function as follows:
Table 4.1.4.10-2 SGF1
Switch Function
Default
setting
SGF1/1 Selection of the latching feature for PO1 0
SGF1/2 Selection of the latching feature for PO2 0
SGF1/3 Selection of the latching feature for PO3 0
• When the switch is in position 0 and the measuring signal
which caused the trip falls below the set start value, the output
contact will return to its initial state.
• When the switch is in position 1, the output contact will remain
active although the measuring signal which caused the trip
falls below the set start value.
A latched output contact can be unlatched either via the HMI, a
digital input or the serial bus.
SGF1/4 Minimum pulse length for SO1 and SO2 and optional SO3, SO4
and SO5
• 0=80 ms
• 1=40 ms
0
SGF1/5 Minimum pulse length for PO1, PO2 and PO3
• 0=80 ms
• 1=40 ms
Note!
The latching feature being selected for PO1, PO2 and PO3 will
override this function.
0
SGF1/6 CBFP
• 0 = CBFP is not in use
• 1 = the signal to PO1 will start a timer which will generate a
delayed signal to PO2, provided that the fault is not cleared
before the CBFP operate time has elapsed.
0
SGF1/7 Trip lockout function
• 0 = the trip lockout function is not in use.
• 1 = the trip lockout function is in use. PO3 is dedicated to this
function.
0
SGF1/8 External fault warning
• When the switch is in position 1, the warning signal from the
trip-circuit supervision or generated in case of continuous light
on light sensor inputs is routed to SO2.
0
ΣSGF1 0
50
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610

Table 4.1.4.10-3 SGF2
Switch Function
Default
setting
SGF2/1 Operation mode of the start indication of stage I> 0
SGF2/2 Operation mode of the start indication of stage I>> 0
SGF2/3 Operation mode of the start indication of stage I>>> 0
SGF2/4 Operation mode of the start indication of stage I
0
> 0
SGF2/5 Operation mode of the start indication of stage I
0
>> 0
SGF2/6 Operation mode of the start indication of stage ∆I> 0
SGF2/7 Operation mode of the alarm indication of stage θ> 0
• 0 = the start indication will automatically be cleared once the
fault has disappeared
• 1 = latching. The start indication will remain active although
the fault has disappeared.
ΣSGF2 0
Table 4.1.4.10-4 SGF3
Switch Function
Default
setting
SGF3/1 Inhibition of stage I>> 0
SGF3/2 Inhibition of stage I>>> 0
SGF3/3 Inhibition of stage I
0
>> 0
SGF3/4 Inhibition of stage ∆I> 1
SGF3/5 Inhibition of stage θ> 1
SGF3/6 Inhibition of stage ARC 1
• When the switch is in position 1, the stage is inhibited.
SGF3/7 Inhibition of light signal output
• When the switch is in position 1, the output is inhibited.
1
ΣSGF3 120
Table 4.1.4.10-5 SGF4
Switch Function
Default
setting
SGF4/1 Automatic doubling of the start value of stage I>>
• When the switch is in position 1, the set start value of the
stage will be automatically doubled at high inrush situations.
0
SGF4/2 Inverse-time operation of stage I> inhibited by the start of stage
I>>
0
SGF4/3 Inverse-time operation of stage I> inhibited by the start of stage
I>>>
• When the switch is in position 1, inverse-time operation is
inhibited.
0
SGF4/4 Automatic doubling of the start value of stage I
0
>>
• When the switch is in position 1, the set start value of the
stage will be automatically doubled at high inrush situations.
0
SGF4/5 Inverse-time operation of stage I
0
> inhibited by the start of
stage I
0
>>
• When the switch is in position 1, inverse-time operation is
inhibited.
0
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
51
SGB1...SGB5
The DI1 signal is routed to the functions below with the switches of switchgroup
SGB1, the DI2 signal with those of SGB2, and so forth.
SGF4/6 Operation mode of light signal output
• When the switch is in position 1, the light signal output will be
blocked by the trip signal from stage ARC.
0
ΣSGF4 0
Table 4.1.4.10-6 SGF5
Switch Function
Default
setting
SGF5/1 Selection of the latching feature for programmable LED1 0
SGF5/2 Selection of the latching feature for programmable LED2 0
SGF5/3 Selection of the latching feature for programmable LED3 0
SGF5/4 Selection of the latching feature for programmable LED4 0
SGF5/5 Selection of the latching feature for programmable LED5 0
SGF5/6 Selection of the latching feature for programmable LED6 0
SGF5/7 Selection of the latching feature for programmable LED7 0
SGF5/8 Selection of the latching feature for programmable LED8 0
• When the switch is in position 0 and the signal routed to the
LED is reset, the programmable LED will be cleared.
• When the switch is in position 1, the programmable LED will
remain lit although the signal routed to the LED is reset.
A latched programmable LED can be cleared either via the
HMI, a digital input or the serial bus.
ΣSGF5 0
Table 4.1.4.10-7 SGB1...SGB5
Switch Function
Default
setting
SGB1...5/1 • 0 = indications are not cleared by the digital input signal
• 1 = indications are cleared by the digital input signal
0
SGB1...5/2 • 0 = indications are not cleared and latched output contacts are
not unlatched by the digital input signal
• 1 = indications are cleared and latched output contacts are
unlatched by the digital input signal
0
SGB1...5/3 • 0 = indications and memorized values are not cleared and
latched output contacts are not unlatched by the digital input
signal
• 1 = indications and memorized values are cleared and latched
output contacts are unlatched by the digital input signal
0
Table 4.1.4.10-5 SGF4
Switch Function
Default
setting
52
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
SGR1...SGR8
The start, trip and alarm signals from the protection stages, the signals from the
auto-reclose function, and the external trip signal are routed to the output contacts
with the switches of switchgroups SGR1...SGR8. The signals are routed to
PO1...PO3 with the switches of switchgroup SGR1...SGR3 and to SO1...SO5 with
those of SGR4...SGR8.
The matrix below can be of help when making the desired selections. The start, trip
and alarm signals from the protection stages, the signals from the auto-reclose
function and the external trip signal are combined with the output contacts by
encircling the desired intersection point. Each intersection point is marked with a
switch number, and the corresponding weighting factor of the switch is shown to the
right in the matrix. The switchgroup checksum is obtained by vertically adding the
weighting factors of all the selected switches of the switchgroup.
Note!
The trip lockout signal is always routed to PO3.
Note!
The trip signal from CBFP is always routed to PO2.
SGB1...5/4 Switching between setting groups 1 and 2 using the digital input
• 0 = the setting group cannot be changed using the digital input
• 1 = the setting group is changed by using the digital input.
When the digital input is energized, setting group 2 will be
activated, if not, setting group 1 will be activated.
Note!
When SGB1...5/4 is set to 1, it is important that the switch has
the same setting in both setting groups.
0
SGB1...5/5 Time synchronization by the digital input signal 0
SGB1...5/6 External tripping by the digital input signal 0
SGB1...5/7 External triggering of the CBFP by the digital input signal 0
SGB1...5/8 External triggering of the trip lockout by the digital input signal 0
SGB1...5/9 External arc signalling by the digital input signal 0
SGB1...5/10 Resetting of the trip lockout by the digital input signal 0
SGB1...5/11 Blocking of tripping of stage I> by the digital input signal 0
SGB1...5/12 Blocking of tripping of stage I>> by the digital input signal 0
SGB1...5/13 Blocking of tripping of stage I
0
> by the digital input signal 0
SGB1...5/14 Blocking of tripping of stage I
0
>> by the digital input signal 0
SGB1...5/15 Blocking of tripping of stage ∆I> by the digital input signal 0
SGB1...5/16 External AR inhibition by the digital input signal 0
SGB1...5/17 External inhibition of CB reclosing by the digital input signal 0
SGB1...5/18 CB position open 0
SGB1...5/19 CB position closed 0
SGB1...5/20 External AR initiation by the digital input signal 0
ΣSGB1...5 0
Table 4.1.4.10-7 SGB1...SGB5
Switch Function
Default
setting
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
53
Note!
The external fault warning is always routed to SO2.
Fig. 4.1.4.10.-2 Output signal matrix
PO1 PO2 PO3 SO1 SO2 SO3
SO4
Optional I/O card
I>
t>
I>>
t>>
I>>>
t>>>
I
0
>
t
0
>
I
0
>>
t
0
>>
∆I>
∆t>
θ>
Alarm
θ>
Trip
Ext.
Trip
ARC
Trip
Open
CB
Command
Close
CB
Command
Definite
Trip
Alarm
CB
Reclosing
Failed
Shot
Due
AR
Lockout
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
256
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
16384
32768
65536
131072
262144
524288
1048576
2097152
Weighting
factor
Checksum
Σ
S
G
R
1
Σ
S
G
R
2
Σ
S
G
R
3
Σ
S
G
R
4
Σ
S
G
R
5
Σ
S
G
R
6
Σ
S
G
R
7
SGR1...8/1
SGR1...8/2
SGR1...8/3
SGR1...8/4
SGR1...8/5
SGR1...8/6
SGR1...8/7
SGR1...8/8
SGR1...8/9
SGR1...8/10
SGR1...8/11
SGR1...8/12
SGR1...8/13
SGR1...8/14
SGR1...8/15
SGR1...8/16
SGR1...8/17
SGR1...8/18
SGR1...8/19
SGR1...8/20
SGR1...8/21
SGR1...8/22
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12 12 12
13 13 13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16 16 16
17 17 17 17 17 17 17
18 18 18 18 18 18 18
19 19 19 19 19 19 19
20 20 20 20 20 20 20
21 21 21 21 21 21 21
22 22 22 22 22 22 22
PS_I/O card
SO5
Σ
S
G
R
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
L> 4194304 SGR1...8/23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23
OutpSignREF610_a
54
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610

1)
If the optional I/O module has not been installed, dashes will be shown on the LCD and “9999999”
when the parameter is read via the SPA bus.
SGL1...SGL8
The signals are routed to LED1 with the switches of switchgroup SGL1, to LED2
with those of SGL2, and so forth.
Table 4.1.4.10-8 SGR1...SGR3
Switch Function
Default setting
SGR1...SGR3 SGR4...SGR5
SGR6...SGR8
1)
SGR1...8/1 Start signal from stage I> 0 1 0
SGR1...8/2 Trip signal from stage I> 1 0 0
SGR1...8/3 Start signal from stage I>> 0 1 0
SGR1...8/4 Trip signal from stage I>> 1 0 0
SGR1...8/5 Start signal from stage I>>> 0 1 0
SGR1...8/6 Trip signal from stage I>>> 1 0 0
SGR1...8/7 Start signal from stage I
0
> 0 1 0
SGR1...8/8 Trip signal from stage I
0
> 1 0 0
SGR1...8/9 Start signal from stage I
0
>> 0 1 0
SGR1...8/10 Trip signal from stage I
0
>> 1 0 0
SGR1...8/11 Start signal from stage ∆I> 0 1 0
SGR1...8/12 Trip signal from stage ∆I> 1 0 0
SGR1...8/13 Alarm signal from stage θ> 0 1 0
SGR1...8/14 Trip signal from stage θ> 1 0 0
SGR1...8/15 External trip signal 0 0 0
SGR1...8/16 Open CB command from
AR
0 0 0
SGR1...8/17 Close CB command from
AR
0 0 0
SGR1...8/18 Definite trip alarm signal
from AR
0 0 0
SGR1...8/19 CB reclosing failed signal
from AR
0 0 0
SGR1...8/20 Shot due signal from AR 0 0 0
SGR1...8/21 Lockout signal from AR 0 0 0
SGR1...8/22 Trip signal from stage ARC 1 0 0
SGR1...8/23 Light signal output 0 0 0
ΣSGR1...8 2108074 5461 0
Table 4.1.4.10-9 SGL1...SGL8
Switch Function Default setting
SGL1...8/1 Trip signal from stage I> 0
SGL1...8/2 Trip signal from stage I>> 0
SGL1...8/3 Trip signal from stage I>>> 0
SGL1...8/4 Trip signal from stage I
0
> 0
SGL1...8/5 Trip signal from stage I
0
>> 0
SGL1...8/6 Trip signal from stage ∆I> 0
SGL1...8/7 Alarm signal from stage θ> 0
SGL1...8/8 Trip signal from stage θ> 0
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
55
Auto-reclose SG1...SG3
Switchgroup SG1 is used for blocking the initiation of one or several auto-reclose
shots, SG2 for blocking of protection stages at one or several auto-reclose shots, and
SG3 for inhibiting the AR function as follows:
SGL1...8/9 Trip lockout signal 0
SGL1...8/10 Definite trip alarm signal from AR 0
SGL1...8/11 Shot due signal from AR 0
SGL1...8/12 Lockout signal from AR 0
SGL1...8/13 CB position open 0
SGL1...8/14 CB position closed 0
SGL1...8/15 DI1 signal 0
SGL1...8/16 DI2 signal 0
SGL1...8/17 DI3 signal 0
SGL1...8/18 DI4 signal 0
SGL1...8/19 DI5 signal 0
SGL1...8/20 Trip signal from stage ARC 0
SGL1...8/21 Light signal output 0
ΣSGL1...SGL8 0
Table 4.1.4.10-10SG1
Switch Function Default setting
SG1/1 Blocking of initiation of shot 1 by the trip signal from stage
I>>
0
SG1/2 Blocking of initiation of shot 1 by the external AR initiation
signal
0
SG1/3 Blocking of initiation of shot 1 by the trip or delayed start
signal from stage I>
0
SG1/4 Blocking of initiation of shot 1 by the trip or delayed start
signal from stage I
0
> or the trip signal from stage I
0
>>
0
SG1/5 Blocking of initiation of shot 2 and 3 by the trip signal from
stage I>>
0
SG1/6 Blocking of initiation of shot 2 and 3 by the external AR
initiation signal
0
SG1/7 Blocking of initiation of shot 2 and 3 by the trip or delayed
start signal from stage I>
0
SG1/8 Blocking of initiation of shot 2 and 3 by the trip or delayed
start signal from stage I
0
> or the trip signal from stage
I
0
>>
0
• When the switch is in position 1, shot initiation is blocked.
ΣSG1 0
Table 4.1.4.10-9 SGL1...SGL8
Switch Function Default setting
56
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610

1)
The blocking is active until the set cutout time or the set reclaim time elapses or the AR function is
locked out.
New trip indication timer
The new trip indication timer can be configured to allow a second trip indication on
the LCD. When several protection stages trip, the first trip indication will be
displayed until the time, as specified by the NEW TRIP IND. setting value, has
expired. After this, a new trip indication can displace the old one. The basic
protection functions are not affected by the NEW TRIP IND. setting.
Table 4.1.4.10-11SG2
1)
Switch Function Default setting
SG2/1 Blocking of tripping of stage I> at shot 1 0
SG2/2 Blocking of tripping of stage I>> at shot 1 0
SG2/3 Blocking of tripping of stage I>>> at shot 1 0
SG2/4 Blocking of tripping of stage I
0
> at shot 1 0
SG2/5 Blocking of tripping of stage I
0
>> at shot 1 0
SG2/6 Blocking of tripping of stage I> at shots 2 and 3 0
SG2/7 Blocking of tripping of stage I>> at shots 2 and 3 0
SG2/8 Blocking of tripping of stage I>>> at shots 2 and 3 0
SG2/9 Blocking of tripping of stage I
0
> at shots 2 and 3 0
SG2/10 Blocking of tripping of stage I
0
>> at shots 2 and 3 0
• When the switch is in position 1, the stage is blocked. 0
ΣSG2 0
Table 4.1.4.10-12SG3
Switch Function Default setting
SG3/1 Inhibition of the AR function by the trip signal from stage
I>>>
1
SG3/2 Inhibition of the AR function by the trip signal from stage
I
0
>>
1
SG3/3 Inhibition of the AR function by the alarm signal from stage
θ>
1
SG3/4 Inhibition of the AR function by the trip signal from stage
∆I>
1
• When the switch is in position 1, the AR function is
inhibited.
SG3/5 Resetting indications at CB reclosing 0
• When the switch is in position 1, indications are reset
when the AR function issues a reclosing command to the
circuit breaker.
ΣSG3 15
Table 4.1.4.10-13 New trip indication timer
Setting Description
Setting
range
Default
setting
New trip indication New trip indication timer in minutes 0...998 60
No new trip indication allowed until the
previous one has been manually cleared.
999
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
57
Non-volatile memory settings
The table below presents data which can be configured to be stored in the battery
backed-up non-volatile memory. All of the functions mentioned below can be
selected separately with switches 1...5 either via the HMI or the SPA bus.
1)
The prerequisite is that the battery has been inserted and is charged.
Note!
When all switches have been set to zero, the battery supervision will be disabled.
Table 4.1.4.10-14 Memory settings
Setting Switch Function
Default
setting
Non-volatile memory
settings
1 • 0 = operation indication messages and LEDs
will be cleared
• 1 = operation indication messages and LEDs
will be retained
1)
1
2 • 1 = disturbance recorder data will be
retained
1)
1
3
• 1 = event codes will be retained
1)
1
4 • 1 = recorded data and information on the
number of starts of the protection stages will
be retained
1)
1
5 • 1 = the real-time clock will be running also
during loss of auxiliary voltage
1)
1
Checksum 31
58
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
4.1.4.11. Technical data on protection functions
1)
At IDMT characteristic, the relay allows settings above 2.5 x I
n
for stage I>, but regards any setting
>2.5 x I
n
as equal to 2.5 x I
n
.
2)
Resetting time of the trip signal.
Table 4.1.4.11-1 Stages I>, I>> and I>>>
Feature Stage I> Stage I>> Stage I>>>
Set start value, I>, I>> and I>>>
• at definite-time characteristic 0.30...5.00 x I
n
0.50...35.0 x I
n
0.50...35.0 x I
n
• at IDMT characteristic
0.30...2.50 x I
n
1)
Start time, typical 55 ms 30 ms 30 ms
Time/current characteristic
• definite-time
operate time, t>, t>> and t>>> 0.05...300 s 0.04...300 s 0.04...300 s
• IDMT according to IEC 60255-3
time multiplier, k
Extremely inverse
Very inverse
Normal inverse
Long-time inverse
0.05...1.00
• Special type of IDMT
characteristic
time multiplier, k
RI-type inverse
0.05...1.00
• IDMT according to
IEEE C37.112
time dial, n
Extremely inverse
Very inverse
Moderately
inverse
1...15
Resetting time, maximum
50 ms
2)
50 ms 50 ms
Retardation time, typical 30 ms 30 ms 30 ms
Set resetting time, t
r
0.05...2.50 s
Drop-off/pick-up ratio, typical 0.96 0.96 0.96
Operate time accuracy
• at definite-time characteristic ±2% of the set
operate time or
±25 ms
±2% of the set
operate time or
±25 ms
±2% of the set
operate time or
±25 ms
• at IDMT characteristic
according to IEC 60255-3:
accuracy class index E
5
• at IDMT characteristic
according to IEEE C37.112
±7% of the
calculated operate
time
• at RI-type characteristic ±7% of the
calculated operate
time
Operation accuracy
• 0.3...0.5 x I
n
±5% of the set
start value or
0.05% I
n
• 0.5...5.0 x I
n
±3% of the set
start value
±3% of the set
start value
±3% of the set
start value
• 5.0...35.0 x I
n
±3% of the set
start value
±3% of the set
start value
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
59

1)
At IDMT characteristic, the relay allows settings above 0.4 x I
n
for stage I
0
>, but regards any setting
>0.4 x I
n
as equal to 0.4 x I
n
.
2)
Resetting time of the trip signal.
Table 4.1.4.11-2 Stages I
0
> and I
0
>>
Feature
Stage I
0
> Stage I
0
>>
Set start value, I
0
> and I
0
>>
• at definite-time characteristic 1.0...100% I
n
5.0...400% I
n
• at IDMT characteristic
1.0...40% I
n
1)
Start time, typical 60 ms 40 ms
Time/current characteristic
• definite time
operate time, t
0
> and t
0
>> 0.05...300 s 0.04...300 s
• IDMT according to IEC 60255-3
time multiplier, k
0
Extremely inverse
Very inverse
Normal inverse
Long-time inverse
0.05...1.00
• Special type of IDMT
characteristic
time multiplier, k
0
RI-type inverse
0.05...1.00
• IDMT according to
IEEE C37.112
time dial, n
0
Extremely inverse
Very inverse
Moderately
inverse
1...15
Resetting time, maximum
50 ms
2)
50 ms
Retardation time, typical 30 ms 30 ms
Set resetting time, t
r0
0.05...2.50 s
Drop-off/pick-up ratio, typical 0.96 0.96
Operate time accuracy
• at definite-time characteristic ±2% of the set
operate time or
±25 ms
±2% of the set
operate time or
±25 ms
• at IDMT characteristic
according to IEC 60255-3:
accuracy class index E
5
• at IDMT characteristic
according to IEEE C37.112
±7% of the
calculated operate
time
• at RI-type characteristic ±7% of the
calculated operate
time
Operation accuracy
• 1.0...10.0% I
n
±5% of the set
start value or
0.05% I
n
±5% of the set
start value or
0.05% I
n
• 10.0...100% I
n
±3% of the set
start value
±3% of the set
start value
• 100...400% I
n
±3% of the set
start value
60
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610

1)
Applies only if a signal output contact (SO1...5) is used. If a power output contact (PO1...3) is used,
2...3 ms will be added.
Table 4.1.4.11-3 Stage θ>
Feature Value
Set full load current, I
θ
0.30...1.50 x I
n
Set alarm level, θ
a
> 50...100%
Trip level, θ
t
> 100%
Time constant, τ 1...200 min
Operate time accuracy
• I/I
θ
>1.2 ±2% of the set
operate time or
±1 s
Table 4.1.4.11-4 Stage ∆I>
Feature Value
Set start value, ∆I>
• at definite-time characteristic 10...100%
Start time, typical 100 ms
Time/current characteristics
• definite time
operate time, t

> 1...300 s
Resetting time, maximum 70 ms
Drop-off/pick-up ratio, typical 0.90
Operate time accuracy
• at definite-time characteristic ±2% of the set
operate time or
±25 ms
Operation accuracy
• 10...100% ±3% of the set
start value and ±1
unit
Table 4.1.4.11-5 Stage ARC and L>
Feature Value
Stage ARC
Set current limit
• ArcI> 0.5...35.0 x I
n
• ArcI
0
> 5.0...400% I
n
Operate time
< 15 ms
1)
Resetting time 30 ms
Operation accuracy ±7% of the set
start value
L>
Activation time of L> < 15 ms
Resetting time 20 ms
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
61
ArcSensitREF610_a
Fig. 4.1.4.11.-1 Relative sensitivity of lens sensors
Table 4.1.4.11-6 Auto-reclose function
Feature Value
Number of shots 0...3
CB Closing time 0.1...10 s
Start delay of stage I> 0...300 s
Start delay of stage I
0
> 0...300 s
Reclaim time 3...300 s
Cutout time 0.1...300 s
Dead time of shot 1 0.1...300 s
Dead time of shot 2 0.1...300 s
Dead time of shot 3 0.1...300 s
Operate time accuracy ±2% of the set
time and ±25 ms
Table 4.1.4.11-7 CBFP
Feature Value
Set operate time 0.10...60.0 s
Phase-current threshold for
external triggering of the CBFP
• pick-up/drop-off 0.08/0.04 x I
n
62
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
4.1.5. Trip-circuit supervision
The trip-circuit supervision (TCS) detects open circuits, both when the circuit
breaker is open and closed, and trip-circuit supply failure.
The trip-circuit supervision is based on the constant current injection principle: by
applying an external voltage, a constant current is forced to flow through the
external trip circuit. If the resistance of the trip circuit exceeds a certain limit, due to
oxidation or a bad contact, for instance, the trip-circuit supervision will be activated
and a warning will appear on the LCD together with a fault code. The warning signal
from the trip-circuit supervision can also be routed to SO2 by setting switch SGF1/
8 to 1.
Under normal operating conditions, the applied external voltage is divided between
the relay’s internal circuit and the external trip circuit so that at least 20 V remains
over the relay’s internal circuit. If the external trip circuit’s resistance is too high or
the internal circuit’s too low, due to welded relay contacts, for instance, the voltage
over the relay’s internal circuit will fall below 20 V (15...20 V), which will activate
the trip-circuit supervision.
The operation condition is:
where
• U
c
= operating voltage over the supervised trip circuit
• I
c
= current flowing through the trip circuit, ~1.5 mA
• R
ext
= external shunt resistor
• R
int
= internal shunt resistor, 1 kΩ
• R
s
= trip coil resistance
The external shunt resistor is used to enable trip-circuit supervision also when the
circuit breaker is open.
The resistance of the external shunt resistor is to be calculated so that it does not
cause malfunction of the trip-circuit supervision or affect the operation of the trip
coil. Too high a resistance will cause too high a voltage drop, which in turn will
result in the operation conditions not being fulfilled, whereas too low a resistance
may cause faulty operation of the trip coil.
The following values are recommended for the external resistor, R
ext
:
The circuit breaker is to be provided with two external contacts, one opening and one
closing contact. The closing contact is to be connected in parallel with the external
shunt resistor, which will enable trip-circuit supervision when the circuit breaker is
Table 4.1.5-1 Recommended values for R
ext
Operating voltage, U
c
Shunt resistor R
ext
48 V dc
1.2 kΩ, 5 W
60 V dc
5.6 kΩ, 5 W
110 V dc
22 kΩ, 5 W
220 V dc
33 kΩ, 5 W
U
c
R
ext
R
int
R
s
+ + ( ) I
c
20Vac dc ⁄ ≥ × –
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
63
closed. The opening contact, on the contrary, is to be connected in series with the
external shunt resistor, which will enable trip-circuit supervision when the circuit
breaker is open; see Fig. 4.1.5.-1.
Trip-circuit supervision can be selected either via the HMI or with SPA parameter
V113.
Fig. 4.1.5.-1 Connecting the trip-circuit supervision using two external contacts
and the external resistor in the trip circuit
4.1.6. Trip lockout function
The trip lockout function is used to prevent accidental closing of the circuit breaker
after a trip. The trip lockout function must be locally reset with a separate reset
command before the circuit breaker can be closed again. This function is useful
when the trip output contact of the relay is latched or the open circuit of the circuit
breaker remains activated.
The trip lockout function is selected in SGF1. When selected, PO3 will be dedicated
to this function. As long as no trip occurs, PO3 will be closed.
Every signal which has been routed to PO3 via the output signal matrix will activate
the trip lockout function and open the contacts of PO3. When the contacts have
opened, they will be locked into the open state. The trip lockout function can also be
activated externally, via a digital input.
The trip lockout function can be reset via a digital input, the HMI or SPA parameter
V103, but not before the signal which activated the function has been reset.
+
-
T
C
S
o
p
e
n
R
E
F
6
1
0
_
a
R
ext
R
i
n
t
TCS
HW
SW
X4.1
R
s
18
19
16
17
SO2
7
8
6
HMI
PO1
SGF1/8
TRIP-CIRCUIT
SUPERVISION
TCS STATE WARNING
64
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
In case of loss of auxiliary power when the trip lockout function is in use, the
contacts of PO3 will return to the same state as before the loss, provided that the
battery has been inserted and is charged. If no battery has been inserted, the trip
lockout function will be activated and the contacts of PO3 will remain open when
the auxiliary power is switched on again.
4.1.7. Trip counters for circuit-breaker condition monitoring
The trip counters for circuit-breaker condition monitoring provide history data,
which can be used for circuit-breaker service scheduling. With this information, the
service cycle can be estimated for the future.
The monitoring function consists of four counters, which count the number of trip
signals generated to the circuit breaker by REF 610. Every time a stage generates a
trip signal, the corresponding counter value will be increased by one. The number of
trips is stored in the non-volatile EEPROM memory.
There are separate counters for the different protection stages because breaking the
current in different fault situations wears the circuit breaker differently. Each
overcurrent stage (I>, I>> and I>>>) has its own trip counter, whereas there is a
common trip counter for stages I
0
>, I
0
>>, ∆I>, θ> and ARC, the AR function (Open
CB Command) and the external trip.
The counters can be read via the HMI or SPA parameters V9...V12 and cleared via
SPA parameter V166. When a counter reaches its maximum value, it will roll over.
Note!
In case several stages trip during the same fault sequence, only the counter of the
stage which tripped first will be incremented.
4.1.8. Indicator LEDs and operation indication messages
The operation of REF 610 can be monitored via the HMI by means of LED
indications and text messages on the LCD. On the front panel of the relay there are
three indicator LEDs with fixed functionality: a green indicator LED (ready), a
yellow indicator LED (start/alarm) and a red indicator LED (trip). In addition, there
are eight programmable LEDs and an indicator LED for front communication. Refer
to the Operator’s Manual for a more thorough presentation.
The messages on the LCD have a certain priority order. If different types of
indications are activated simultaneously, the message with the highest priority will
appear on the LCD.
The priority order of the messages:
1. CBFP
2. Trip
3. Start/Alarm
4.1.9. Demand values
REF 610 provides three different kinds of demand values. The first value shows the
average current of all three phases measured during one minute. The value is
updated once a minute. The second value shows the average current during an
adjustable time range, ranging from 0 to 999 minutes, with an accuracy of one
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
65
minute. This value is updated at the expiration of each time range. The third value
shows the highest one-minute average current value measured during the previous
time range. However, if the time range is set to zero, only the one-minute and the
maximum demand value will be shown. The maximum value is the highest
one-minute mean value since the last reset.
The demand values can be set to zero through serial communication using SPA
parameter V102. The demand values will also be reset if SPA parameter V105 is
changed or the relay is reset.
4.1.10. Commissioning tests
The following two product functions can be used during the commissioning of the
relay: function test and digital input test.
The function test is used for testing the configuration as well as the connections from
the relay. By selecting this test, the internal signals from the protection stages, the
external trip signal and the IRF function can be activated one by one. Provided that
the signals have been set to be routed to the output contacts (PO1...PO3 and
SO1...SO5) with the switches of SGR1...8, the output contacts will be activated and
their corresponding event codes generated when the test is run. However, activation
of the internal signals from the protection stages, the signals from the auto-reclose
function, the external trip signal and the IRF function will not generate an event
code.
The digital input test is used for testing the connections to the relay. The state of the
digital inputs can be monitored via the HMI.
Refer to the Operator’s Manual for instructions on how to perform the tests.
4.1.11. Disturbance recorder
4.1.11.1. Function
REF 610 features an integrated disturbance recorder for recording monitored
quantities. The recorder continuously captures the curve forms of the currents as
well as the status of both internal and digital input signals and stores these in the
memory.
Triggering of the recorder will generate an event code. After the recorder has been
triggered, it will continue to record data for a pre-defined post-triggering time. An
asterisk will be shown on the LCD on completion of the recording. The status of the
recording can also be viewed using SPA parameter V246.
As soon as the recorder has been triggered and the recording has finished, the
recording can be uploaded and analysed by means of a PC provided with a special
program.
4.1.11.2. Disturbance recorder data
One recording contains data from the four analogue channels and up to eight digital
channels. The analogue channels, whose data is stored either as RMS curves or as
momentary measured values, are the currents measured by the relay. The digital
66
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
channels, referred to as digital signals, are start and trip signals from the protection
stages, the alarm signal from stage θ>, the signals from the auto-reclose function and
the digital input signals linked to the relay.
The user can select up to eight digital signals to be recorded. If more than eight
signals are selected, the first eight signals will be stored, starting with the internal
signals followed by the digital input signals. The digital signals to be stored are
selected with parameters V238 and V243; see tables 4.1.17-6 and 4.1.17-7.
The recording length varies according to the selected sampling frequency. The RMS
curve is recorded by selecting the sampling frequency to be the same as the nominal
frequency of the relay. The sampling frequency is selected with SPA parameter
M15; see the table below for details.
1)
RMS curve.
Recording length:
Changing the setting values of parameters M15, V238 and V243 is allowed only
when the recorder is not triggered.
The post-triggering recording length defines the time during which the recorder
continues to store data after it has been triggered. The length can be changed with
SPA parameter V240. If the post-triggering recording length has been defined to be
the same as the total recording length, no data stored prior to the triggering will be
retained in the memory. By the time the post-triggering recording finishes, a
complete recording will have been created.
Triggering of the recorder immediately after it has been cleared or the auxiliary
voltage connected may result in a shortened total recording length. Disconnection of
the auxiliary voltage after the recorder has been triggered, but before the recording
has finished, on the other hand, may result in a shortened post-triggering recording
length. This, however, will not affect the total recording length.
At a power reset, triggered recorder data will be retained in the memory provided
that it has been defined non-volatile.
4.1.11.3. Control and indication of disturbance recorder status
It is possible to control and monitor the recording status of the disturbance recorder
by writing to and reading SPA parameters M1, M2 and V246. Reading SPA
parameter V246 will return either the value 0 or 1, indicating whether the recorder
Table 4.1.11.2-1 Sampling frequency
Nominal frequency
Hz
Sampling frequency
Hz
Cycles
50 800 250
400 500
50
1)
4000
60 960 250
480 500
60
1)
4000
s [ ]
Cycles
Nominal frequency Hz [ ]
----------------------------------------------------------------- =
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
67
has not been triggered or triggered and ready to be uploaded. Event code E31 will
be generated the moment the disturbance recorder is triggered. If the recorder is
ready to be uploaded, this will also be indicated by an asterisk shown in the lower
right-hand corner of the LCD when it is in the idle mode.
Writing the value 1 to SPA parameter M2 will clear the recorder memory, restart the
recording of new data and enable the triggering of the recorder. Recorder data can
be cleared by performing a master reset, i.e. clearing indications and memorized
values and unlatching output contacts. Writing the value 2 to SPA parameter V246
will restart the unloading process by setting the time stamp and the first data ready
to be read.
4.1.11.4. Triggering
The user can select one or several internal or digital input signals to trigger the
disturbance recorder, either on the rising or falling edge of the signal(s). Triggering
on the rising edge means that the post-triggering recording sequence will start when
the signal is activated. Correspondingly, triggering on the falling edge means that
the post-triggering recording sequence will start when the active signal is reset. The
trigger signal(s) and the edge are selected with SPA parameters V236...V237 and
V241...V242; see tables 4.1.17-6 and 4.1.17-7. The recorder can also be triggered
manually with SPA parameter M1.
Triggering of the disturbance recorder is only possible if the recorder has not already
been triggered.
4.1.11.5. Settings and unloading
The setting parameters for the disturbance recorder are V parameters V236...V238,
V240...V243 and V246, and M parameters M15, M18, M20 and M80...M83.
Unloading correct information from the recorder requires that M80 and M83 have
been set. Unloading is done using a PC application. The uploaded recorder data is
stored in separate files defined by the comtrade
©
format.
4.1.11.6. Event code of the disturbance recorder
The disturbance recorder generates an event code on triggering (E31) and clearing
(E32) the recorder. The event mask is determined using SPA parameter V155.
4.1.12. Recorded data of the last events
REF 610 records up to five events. This enables the user to analyze the last five fault
conditions in the electrical power network. Each event includes the measured
currents, start durations and time stamp, for instance. Additionally, information on
the number of starts, trips and auto-reclose shots is provided.
Recorded data is non-volatile by default, provided that the battery has been inserted
and is charged. A master reset, i.e. clearing of indications and memorized values and
unlatching of output contacts, will erase the contents of the stored events and the
number of starts.
68
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
Note!
The number of trips and auto-reclose shots is stored in the non-volatile EEPROM
memory and will thus not be cleared when performing a master reset. The number
of trips can be erased by entering the value 1 and the number of auto-reclose shots
by entering the value 2 into parameter V166.
REF 610 collects data during fault conditions. When all start or thermal alarm
signals have been reset or a stage trips, the collected data and time stamp will be
stored as “EVENT1” and the previously stored events will move one step forward.
When a sixth event is stored, the oldest event will be cleared.
Table 4.1.12-1 Recorded data
REGISTER Data description
EVENT1 • Phase current L1, measured as a multiple of the rated current, I
n
, is
displayed in two registers: the main register and the sub register. When a
stage starts but does not trip, the maximum fault current during the pick-up
period will be stored in both the main register and the sub register. When a
stage trips, the fault current at the time of the trip will be stored in the main
register and the maximum fault current during the pick-up period in the sub
register. The same applies to phase currents L2, L3 and I
0
.
• The phase unbalance, ∆I, as a percentage of the maximum phase current
value. When the stage starts but does not trip, the maximum phase
unbalance value during the pick-up period will be stored. When the stage
trips, the fault unbalance at the time of the trip will be stored.
• Thermal level, as a percentage of the maximum thermal level of the cable, at
activation of a start or alarm signal. If the thermal protection stage has been
set out of operation, dashes will be shown on the LCD and “999” when read
via serial communication.
• The maximum thermal level during the time the start or alarm signal was
active, as a percentage of the maximum thermal level of the cable, or in case
of a trip, the thermal level, as a percentage of the maximum thermal level of
the cable, at activation of a trip signal. If the thermal protection stage has
been set out of operation, dashes will be shown on the LCD and “999” when
read via serial communication.
• Duration of the starts of stages I>, I>>, I>>>, ∆I, I
0
> and I
0
>>, the trip of
stage ARC (local), the trip of stage ARC (remote), and of the external trip. A
value other than zero indicates that the corresponding stage has started
whereas the value 100% indicates that the operate time of the stage has
elapsed, i.e. the stage has tripped. If the operate time of a stage has elapsed
but the stage is blocked, the value will be 99% of the set or calculated
operate time.
• Trip number in the auto-reclose sequence. The number 1...20 indicates the
order of the trip in the AR sequence. The value 1 indicates the first trip in the
AR sequence, the value 2 the second trip, and so forth. On expiration of the
set reclaim time, the value will start from 1 again. If the AR function has been
set out of operation, the value will always be 1.
• Time stamp for the event. The time when the collected data was stored. The
time stamp is displayed in two registers, one including the date expressed as
yy-mm-dd, and the other including the time expressed as HH.MM; SS.sss.
EVENT 2 Same as EVENT 1.
EVENT 3 Same as EVENT 1.
EVENT 4 Same as EVENT 1.
EVENT 5 Same as EVENT 1.
Number of
starts
• The number of times each protection stage, I>, I>>, I>>>, ∆I, I
0
> and I
0
>>,
has started, counting up to 999.
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
69
4.1.13. Communication ports
REF 610 is provided with an optical communication port (infrared) on the front
panel. Rear communication is optional and requires a communication module,
which can be provided with either a plastic fibre-optic, combined fibre-optic (plastic
and glass) or RS-485 connection. The relay is connected to an automation system
via the rear connection. The optional rear communication module allows the use of
either the SPA bus, IEC 60870-5-103 or Modbus communication protocol.
For connection to the DNP 3.0 communication system, REF 610 can be provided
with an optional DNP 3.0 rear communication module with RS-485 connection.
For further information on optional rear communication module connections, refer
to section Serial communication connections.
Number of
trips
• The number of times each protection stage, I>, I>> and I>>>, has tripped.
When the counters reach their maximum values (65535), it will roll over.
• The number of times protection stages I
0
>, I
0
>>, θ> and ARC has tripped,
external trips, and the number of times the AR function has issued an
opening command to the circuit breaker. When the counter reaches its
maximum value (65535), it will roll over.
Number of
AR shots
• Number of AR shots (shot 1) initiated by the trip signal from stage I>>,
counting up to 255
• Number of AR shots (shot 1) initiated by the digital input signal, counting up
to 255
• Number of AR shots (shot 1) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage I>,
counting up to 255
• Number of AR shots (shot 1) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage
I
0
>, counting up to 255
• Number of AR shots (shot 2) initiated by the trip signal from stage I>>,
counting up to 255
• Number of AR shots (shot 2) initiated by the digital input signal, counting up
to 255
• Number of AR shots (shot 2) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage I>,
counting up to 255
• Number of AR shots (shot 2) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage
I
0
>, counting up to 255
• Number of AR shots (shot 3) initiated by the trip signal from stage I>>,
counting up to 255
• Number of AR shots (shot 3) initiated by the digital input signal, counting up
to 255
• Number of AR shots (shot 3) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage I>,
counting up to 255
• Number of AR shots (shot 3) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage
I
0
>, counting up to 255
Table 4.1.12-1 Recorded data
REGISTER Data description
70
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610

FrConREF 610_a
Fig. 4.1.13.-1 Front connection (1) for local communication
The relay is connected to a PC used for local parameterization via the infrared port
on the front panel. The front connection allows the use of the SPA bus protocol only.
The optical front connection galvanically isolates the PC from the relay. The front
connection can be used in two different ways: wirelessly using a PC compatible to
the IrDA
©
Standard specifications or using a specific front communication cable
(ABB art. no 1MRS050698). The cable is connected to the serial RS-232 port of the
PC. The optical stage of the cable is powered by RS-232 control signals. The cable
has a fixed baud rate of 9.6 kbps.
The following serial communication parameters are to be set for RS-232:
Relay data such as events, setting values and all input data and memorized values
can be read via the front communication port.
When setting values are altered via the front communication port, the relay will
check that the entered parameter values are within the permitted setting range. If an
entered value is too high or too low, the setting value will remain unchanged.
REF 610 has a counter which can be accessed via COMMUNICATION under
CONFIGURATION in the HMI menu. The counter value is set to zero when the relay
receives a valid message.
4.1.14. IEC 60870-5-103 remote communication protocol
REF 610 supports the IEC 60870-5-103 remote communication protocol
(henceforward referred to as the IEC_103) in the unbalanced transmission mode.
The IEC_103 protocol is used to transfer measurand and status data from the slave
to the master. However, the IEC_103 protocol cannot be used to transfer disturbance
recorder data.
The IEC_103 protocol can be used only through the rear connection of the relay on
the optional communication module. Connecting REF 610 to a fibre-optic
communication bus requires a fibre-optic communication module. The line-idle
state of the fibre-optic communication module can be selected either via the HMI or
the SPA bus. According to the IEC_103 standard, however, the line-idle state is
• Number of data bits 7
• Number of stop bits 1
• Parity even
• Baud rate 9.6 kbps
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
71
“light on”. To ensure communication, the line-idle state should be the same for both
the master and the slave device. The connection topology can be selected to be either
loop or star, the default being loop, and either via the HMI or the SPA bus. The
selected line-idle state and connection topology apply irrespective of which rear
communication protocol is active.
REF 610 will use the SPA bus protocol as default when the optional communication
module is in use. The protocol selection is memorized and will therefore always be
activated when the rear connection is in use. The baud rate can be selected either via
the HMI or the SPA bus. According to the IEC_103 standard, however, the baud rate
is 9.6 kbps. When the IEC_103 protocol is active, event masks are not in use.
Consequently, all events in the selected configuration set will be included in the
event reporting.
REF 610 is provided with two different selectable configuration sets, of which
configuration set 1 is used by default. Configuration set 1 is intended to be used
when the optional I/O module has not been installed. Configuration set 2 includes
additional information, e.g. output contact events 6...8 (SO3...SO5) and digital input
events 3...5 (DI3...DI5), provided that the optional I/O module has been installed.
Function type and information number have been mapped into configuration sets
according to the IEC_103 standard to the extent that these have been defined by the
standard. If not defined by the standard, the type of function and/or the information
number have/has been mapped into a private range.
The tables below indicate the information mapping of the corresponding
configuration sets. The column GI indicates whether the status of the specified
information object is transmitted within the general interrogation cycle. The relative
time in messages with the type identification 2 is calculated as a time difference
between the occurred event and the event specified in the column Relative time. The
measurand multiplied by the normalize factor is proportional to the rated value.
Therefore, the maximum value of each measurand is the normalize factor multiplied
by the rated value.
72
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610

Table 4.1.14-1 Information mapping of configuration set 1 and 2
Event reason
E
v
e
n
t

c
o
d
e
C
o
n
f
i
g
u
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
e
t

1
C
o
n
f
i
g
u
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
e
t

2
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n

t
y
p
e
I
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

n
u
m
b
e
r
G
I
R
e
l
a
t
i
v
e

t
i
m
e
T
y
p
e

i
d
e
n
t
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
Disturbance recorder
Triggered/Cleared
E31/
E32
X X 178 100 - - 1
HMI Password
Opened/Closed
E33/
E34
X X 178 101 - - 1
I> Start/Reset 1E1/
1E2
X X 160 84 X 1E1 2
I> Trip/Reset 1E3/
1E4
X X 160 90 - 1E1 2
I>> Start/Reset 1E5/
1E6
X X 162 94 X 1E5 2
I>> Trip/Reset 1E7/
1E8
X X 160 91 - 1E5 2
I>>> Start/Reset 1E9/
1E10
X X 162 96 X 1E9 2
I>>> Trip/Reset 1E11/
1E12
X X 162 98 - 1E9 2
I
0
> Start/Reset 1E13/
1E14
X X 160 67 X 1E13 2
I
0
> Trip/Reset 1E15/
1E16
X X 160 92 - 1E13 2
I
0
>> Start/Reset 1E17/
1E18
X X 162 95 X 1E17 2
I
0
>> Trip/Reset 1E19/
1E20
X X 160 93 - 1E17 2
∆I> Start/Reset 1E21/
1E22
X X 173 84 X 1E21 2
∆I> Trip/Reset 1E23/
1E24
X X 173 90 - 1E21 2
θ> Start/Reset 1E25/
1E26
X X 184 84 X 1E25 2
θ> Alarm/Reset 1E27/
1E28
X X 184 11 X - 1
θ> Trip/Reset 1E29/
1E30
X X 184 90 - 1E25 2
ARC (light and
current) Trip/Reset
1E31/
1E32
X X 100 90 - 1E31 2
ARC (DI and current)
Trip/Reset
1E33/
1E34
X X 100 50 - 1E33 2
Arc light signal output
Activated/Reset
1E35/
1E36
X X 100 20 - - 1
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
73
Trip Lockout/Reset 1E37/
1E38
X X 10 223 X - 1
External Trip/Reset 1E39/
1E40
X X 10 222 - - 1
CBFP Activated/
Reset
1E41/
1E42
X X 160 85 - - 1
PO1 Activated/Reset 2E1/
2E2
X X 251 27 X - 1
PO2 Activated/Reset 2E3/
2E4
X X 251 28 X - 1
PO3 Activated/Reset 2E5/
2E6
X X 251 29 X - 1
SO1 Activated/Reset 2E7/
2E8
X X 251 30 X - 1
SO2 Activated/Reset 2E9/
2E10
X X 251 31 X - 1
SO3 Activated/Reset 2E11/
2E12
- X 251 32 X - 1
SO4 Activated/Reset 2E13/
2E14
- X 251 33 X - 1
SO5 Activated/Reset 2E15/
2E16
- X 251 34 X - 1
DI1 Activated/
Deactivated
2E17/
2E18
X X 249 231 X - 1
DI2 Activated/
Deactivated
2E19/
2E20
X X 249 232 X - 1
DI3 Activated/
Deactivated
2E21/
2E22
- X 249 233 X - 1
DI4 Activated/
Deactivated
2E23/
2E24
- X 249 234 X - 1
DI5 Activated/
Deactivated
2E25/
2E26
- X 249 235 X - 1
Shot 1 Initiated/
Ended
3E1/
3E2
X X 169 101 - - 1
Shot 2 Initiated/
Ended
3E3/
3E4
X X 169 102 - - 1
Shot 3 Initiated/
Ended
3E5/
3E6
X X 169 103 - - 1
CB Position
Open/Closed
3E7/
3E8
X X 240 160 - - 1
Table 4.1.14-1 Information mapping of configuration set 1 and 2
Event reason
E
v
e
n
t

c
o
d
e
C
o
n
f
i
g
u
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
e
t

1
C
o
n
f
i
g
u
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
e
t

2
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n

t
y
p
e
I
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

n
u
m
b
e
r
G
I
R
e
l
a
t
i
v
e

t
i
m
e
T
y
p
e

i
d
e
n
t
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
74
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610

4.1.15. Modbus remote communication protocol
4.1.15.1. Protocol overview
The master/slave protocol Modbus was first introduced by Modicon Inc. and is
widely accepted as a communication standard for industrial device controllers and
PLCs. For the protocol definition, refer to “Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference
Guide PI-MBUS-300 Rev. E”.
The implementation of the Modbus protocol in REF 610 supports both the RTU and
the ASCII link mode. Both the link mode and the line setting parameters are
user-configurable.
Definite Trip Alarm/
Reset
3E9/
3E10
X X 169 150 - - 1
AR Lockout/Reset 3E11/
3E12
X X 169 164 - - 1
Open CB Command/
Reset
3E13/
3E14
X X 169 127 - - 1
Close CB Command/
Reset
3E15/
3E16
X X 169 128 - - 1
CB Reclosing Failed/
Reset
3E17/
3E18
X X 169 163 - - 1
CB Reclosing
Inhibited/Reset
3E19/
3E20
X X 169 162 - - 1
AR Cancelled/Reset 3E21/
3E22
X X 169 130 - - 1
Table 4.1.14-2 Information mapping of configuration set 1 and 2
Measurand
N
o
r
m
a
l
i
z
e

f
a
c
t
o
r
R
a
t
e
d

v
a
l
u
e
C
o
n
f
i
g
u
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
e
t

1
C
o
n
f
i
g
u
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
e
t

2
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n

t
y
p
e
I
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

n
u
m
b
e
r
T
y
p
e

i
d
e
n
t
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
Current I
L1
2.40 I
n
X X 135 140 9
Current I
L2
2.40 I
n
X X
Current I
L3
2.40 I
n
X X
Current I
0
2.40 I
n
X X
Table 4.1.14-1 Information mapping of configuration set 1 and 2
Event reason
E
v
e
n
t

c
o
d
e
C
o
n
f
i
g
u
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
e
t

1
C
o
n
f
i
g
u
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
e
t

2
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n

t
y
p
e
I
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

n
u
m
b
e
r
G
I
R
e
l
a
t
i
v
e

t
i
m
e
T
y
p
e

i
d
e
n
t
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
75
The character codings of the link modes follow the protocol definition. The RTU
character format is presented in table 4.1.15.1-1 and the ASCII character format in
table 4.1.15.1-2:
Note!
The turnaround time (response time) of REF 610 depends on the amount of data
requested in a query. Therefore, the turnaround time can vary between
approximately 20 and 100 milliseconds. However, a turnaround timeout no lower
than 150 ms is recommended for the Modbus master.
Note!
The data address range in the Modbus network follows the protocol definition and
starts from 0. Consequently, the data addresses in table 4.1.15.2-5 will be decreased
by one when transferred over the network.
Note!
The Modbus data type digital input (DI) is commonly also referred to as 1X, coils
as 0X, input register (IR) as 3X and holding register (HR) as 4X, of which the former
will be used here. Thus, HR 123, for instance, can also be referred to as register
400123.
4.1.15.2. Profile of Modbus REF 610
The Modbus protocol (ASCII or RTU) is selected via the HMI and can be used only
through the rear connection of the relay on the optional communication module.
Modbus line settings, i.e. parity, CRC byte order and baud rate, can be adjusted
either via the HMI or the SPA bus.
Table 4.1.15.1-1 RTU character format
Coding system 8-bit binary
Bits per character 1 start bit
8 data bits, the least significant bit is sent first
1 bit for even/odd parity; no bit if parity is not used
1 stop bit if parity is used; 2 stop bits if parity is not used
Table 4.1.15.1-2 ASCII character format
Coding system Two ASCII characters representing a hexadecimal
number
Bits per character 1 start bit
7 data bits, the least significant bit is sent first
1 bit for even/odd parity; no bit if parity is not used
1 stop bit if parity is used; 2 stop bits if parity is not used
76
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
The implementation of the Modbus protocol in REF 610 supports the following
functions:
Table 4.1.15.2-1 Supported application functions
Function code Function description
01 Read coil status
Reads the status of discrete outputs.
02 Read digital input status
Reads the status of discrete inputs.
03 Read holding registers
Reads the contents of output registers.
04 Read input registers
Reads the contents of input registers.
05 Force single coil
Sets the status of a discrete output.
06 Preset single register
Sets the value of a holding register.
08 Diagnostics
Checks the communication system between the master and
the slave.
15 Force multiple coils
Sets the status of multiple discrete outputs.
16 Preset multiple registers
Sets the value of multiple holding registers.
23 Read/write holding registers
Exchanges holding registers in one query.
Table 4.1.15.2-2 Supported diagnostic subfunctions
Code Name Description
00 Return query data The data in the query data field is returned (looped back) in
the response. The entire response is to be identical to the
query.
01 Restart
communication
option
The slave’s peripheral port is initialized and restarted and the
communication event counters are cleared. Before this, a
normal response will be sent provided that the port is not in the
listen only mode. However, if the port is in the listen only
mode, no response will be sent.
04 Force listen only
mode
The slave is forced to enter the listen only mode for Modbus
communication.
10 Clear counters and
diagnostic register
All counters and the diagnostic register are cleared.
11 Return bus
message count
The number of messages in the communications system
detected by the slave since its last restart, clear counters
operation or power up is returned in the response.
12 Return bus
communication
error count
The number of CRC errors encountered by the slave since its
last restart, clear counters operation or power up is returned in
the response.
13 Return bus
exception error
count
The number of Modbus exception responses sent by the slave
since its last restart, clear counters operation or power up is
returned in the response.
14 Return slave
message count
The number of messages addressed to the slave or broadcast
which the slave has processed since its last restart, clear
counters operation or power up is returned in the response.
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
77
Note!
Sending other subfunction codes than those listed above will cause an “Illegal data
value” response.
The Modbus protocol provides the following diagnostic counters:
The following exception codes may be generated by the Modbus protocol:
15 Return slave no
response count
The number of messages addressed to the slave for which a
response (neither a normal response nor an exception
response) has not been sent since its last restart, clear
counters operation or power up is returned in the response.
16 Return slave
NACK response
count
The number of messages addressed to the slave for which a
NACK response has been sent is returned in the response.
18 Return bus
character overrun
count
The number of messages addressed to the slave for which it
has not been able to send a response due to a character
overrun since its last restart, clear counters operation or power
up is returned in the response.
Table 4.1.15.2-3 Diagnostic counters
Name Description
Bus message count The number of messages in the communications system
detected by the slave since its last restart, clear counters
operation or power up.
Bus communication error
count
The number of CRC or LRC errors encountered by the slave
since its last restart, clear counters operation or power up.
Bus exception error count The number of Modbus exception responses sent by the slave
since its last restart, clear counters operation or power up.
Slave message count The number of messages addressed to the slave or broadcast
which the slave has processed since its last restart, clear
counters operation or power up.
Slave no response count The number of messages addressed to the slave for which a
response (neither a normal response nor an exception
response) has not been sent since its last restart, clear
counters operation or power up.
Slave NACK response
count
The number of messages addressed to the slave for which a
NACK response has been sent.
Bus character overrun count The number of messages addressed to the slave for which it
has not been able to send a response due to a character
overrun since its last restart, clear counters operation or power
up.
Table 4.1.15.2-4 Possible exception codes
Code Name Description
01 Illegal function The slave does not support the requested function.
02 Illegal data
address
The slave does not support the data address or the number of
items in the query is incorrect.
03 Illegal data value A value contained in the query data field is out of range.
04 Slave device
failure
An unrecoverable error has occurred while the slave was
attempting to perform the requested task.
Table 4.1.15.2-2 Supported diagnostic subfunctions
Code Name Description
78
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
Note!
If an “Illegal data value” exception response is generated when attempting to preset
multiple registers, the contents of the register to which an illegal value has been
imposed and of the following registers will not be changed. Registers which have
already been preset will not be restored.
User-defined registers
Reading of unwanted data in a data block wastes bandwidth and complicates data
interpretation. For optimum efficiency in Modbus communication, data has
therefore been organized into consecutive blocks. In addition, a set of programmable
user-defined registers (UDR) has been defined in the holding register area.
The first sixteen holding registers, i.e. HR1...16, are user-defined registers. The
UDRs can be linked to any holding register, except for HR721...727, using SPA
parameters 504V1...504V16. However, one UDR cannot be linked to another, i.e.
linking cannot be nested. Each parameter contains the address of the holding register
to which the UDR is linked.
If a UDR is linked to a non-existent holding register, reading from the register will
fail and an “Illegal address exception” response will be sent. Giving the link address
the value 0 will disable the UDR. If the master reads from a disabled UDR, the value
0 will be returned.
The UDRs are mirrored in HR385…400.
Fault records
The data recorded during a fault sequence is called a fault record (FR). The slave
stores the five latest fault records. When a sixth record is stored, the oldest record
will be deleted. To read a fault record:
1. Write a preset single register command (function 06) to HR601 using a selection
code as data value.
2. Read the selected fault record (function 04) from HR601, register count 28.
Alternatively, a fault record can be read using one command (function 23) only.
Selection code 1: The master reads the oldest unread record
Status register 3 (HR403) informs whether there are unread fault records (see Fig.
4.1.15.2.-2). If there is one or several unread fault records, the master can read the
contents using selection code 1.
The fault record contains a sequence number which makes it possible for the master
to determine whether one or several unread fault records have been deleted due to
overflow. The master compares the sequence number to that of the previously read
fault record.
The slave keeps track of which fault record is currently the oldest unread. The master
can continue reading fault records for as long as Status register 3 indicates that there
are unread records.
Special case 1: If there are no unread fault records, the contents of the last read
record will be returned. If the buffer is empty, however, the registers will contain
only zeros. This is the only time when sequence number zero will appear.
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
79
Special case 2: If the master tries to read the next unread fault record without
entering selection code 1 again, the contents of the last read record will be returned.
Selection code 2: The master reads the oldest stored record
By resetting the read pointer using selection code 2, the master can read the oldest
stored fault record. After this, the master can continue reading the following records
using selection code 1, irrespective of whether they have been read before.
Note!
Resetting the read pointer will not affect the sequence number of the fault record.
Note!
A master reset, i.e. clearing of indications and memorized values and unlatching of
output contacts, will clear the fault records, after which the sequence number will
start from 1 again.
Event records
Modbus events are derived from SPA events. With a few exceptions, SPA events
update binary points in the DI and the packed HR area. Simultaneously, a
corresponding Modbus event record will be generated. The event record contains the
Modbus DI/CO data point address and the value to which the point has changed
(0 or 1). SPA events lacking a corresponding DI/CO data point are shown as SPA
channel and event code (informative event) in the event record. The maximum
capacity of the Modbus event buffer is 99 events. The time stamp of Modbus events
is extended to contain complete information, from date to millisecond. To read an
event record:
1. Write a preset single register command (function 06) to HR671 using a selection
code as data value.
2. Read the selected fault record (function 04) from HR672, register count 8.
Alternatively, a fault record can be read using one command (function 23) only.
Selection code 1: reading the oldest unread record
Status register 3 (HR403) informs whether there are unread event records (see Fig.
4.1.15.2.-2). If there is one or several unread event records, the master can read the
contents using selection code 1.
The event record contains a sequence number which makes it possible for the master
to determine whether one or several unread event records have been deleted due to
overflow by comparing it to the sequence number of the previously read event
record.
The slave keeps track of which event record is currently the oldest unread. The
master can continue reading event records for as long as Status register 3 indicates
that there are unread records.
Special case 1: If there are no unread event records, the contents of the last read
record will be returned. If the buffer is empty, however, the registers will contain
only zeros. This is the only time when sequence number zero will appear.
Special case 2: If the master tries to read the next unread event record without
entering selection code 1 again, the contents of the last read record will be returned.
80
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
Selection code 2: reading the oldest stored record
By resetting the read pointer using selection code 2, the master can read the oldest
stored event record. After this, the master can continue reading the following records
using selection code 1, irrespective of whether they have been read before.
Note!
Resetting the read pointer will not affect the sequence number of the event record.
Selection code -1...-99
With selection code -1...-99, the master can move backwards from the newest event
as many events as defined by the selection code and read that specific event record.
After this, the master can continue reading the following records using selection
code 1, irrespective of whether they have been read before.
Special case: If there is not as many events in the buffer as specified by the selection
code, the oldest stored event will be read.
Selection code 3
The Modbus event buffer is cleared with selection code 3. Clearing the buffer does
not require any read operation to follow.
Digital Inputs
As the master may not detect the state changes of all digital signals when scanning,
an additional change detect (CD) indication bit will be created for every momentary
indication point; see the example below.
Fig. 4.1.15.2.-1 Change detection bit
If the momentary value of an indication bit has changed two or more times since the
master last read it, the CD bit will be set to one. When the CD bit has been read, it
will be set to zero.
The momentary and the CD bit of a certain indication point always occur as a pair
in the Modbus memory map.
Modbus data mapping
There are two types of monitoring data: digital indications and measurands. For
convenience and efficiency, the same data can be read from different data areas.
Measurands and other 16-bit values can be read either from the IR or HR
C
h
D
e
t_
a
Momentary
M
a
s
t
e
r

r
e
a
d
s
M
a
s
t
e
r

r
e
a
d
s
M
a
s
t
e
r

r
e
a
d
s
M
a
s
t
e
r

r
e
a
d
s
Change detect
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
81
(read-only) area and digital indication values from either the DI or coil (read-only)
area. It is also possible to read the status of the DIs as packed 16-bit registers from
both the IR and the HR area.
Consequently, all monitoring data can be read as consecutive blocks of data from the
IR or HR area.
The register and bit addresses are presented in table 4.1.15.2-5. Some register
structures are presented in separate sections below.
Note!
The HR and IR values are unsigned 16-bit integers unless otherwise specified.
Table 4.1.15.2-5 Mapping of Modbus data
Description
HR/IR
address (.bit)
DI/Coil bit
address
Writeable
Value
range
Comment
User-defined registers
UDR 1 1 or 385
UDR 2 2 or 386
UDR 3 3 or 387
UDR 4 4 or 388
UDR 5 5 or 389
UDR 6 6 or 390
UDR 7 7 or 391
UDR 8 8 or 392
UDR 9 9 or 393
UDR 10 10 or 394
UDR 11 11 or 395
UDR 12 12 or 396
UDR 13 13 or 397
UDR 14 14 or 398
UDR 15 15 or 399
UDR 16 16 or 400
Status registers
Status register 1 401 IRF code See Structure 1
Status register 2 402 Warning
codes
See Structure 1
Status register 3 403 See Structure 1
Analogue data
Phase current I
L1
x I
n
404 0...5000 0...50 x I
n
Phase current I
L2
x I
n
405 0...5000 0...50 x I
n
Phase current I
L3
x I
n
406 0...5000 0...50 x I
n
Earth-fault current x I
n
407 0...800 0...800% I
n
Phase discontinuity x I
n
408 0...100 0...100% I
n
Digital data
Start signal from stage I> 409.00 1 0/1 1 = activated
Start signal from stage I> CD 409.01 2
Trip signal from stage I> 409.02 3 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage I> CD 409.03 4
Start signal from stage I>> 409.04 5 0/1 1 = activated
Start signal from stage I>>
CD
409.05 6
82
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
Trip signal from stage I>> 409.06 7 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage I>>
CD
409.07 8
Start signal from stage I>>> 409.08 9 0/1 1 = activated
Start signal from stage I>>>
CD
409.09 10
Trip signal from stage I>>> 409.10 11 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage I>>>
CD
409.11 12
Start signal from stage I
0
> 409.12 13 0/1 1 = activated
Start signal from stage I
0
>
CD
409.13 14
Trip signal from stage I
0
> 409.14 15 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage I
0
> CD 409.15 16
Start signal from stage I
0
>> 410.00 17 0/1 1 = activated
Start signal from stage I
0
>>
CD
410.01 18
Trip signal from stage I
0
>> 410.02 19 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage I
0
>>
CD
410.03 20
Start signal from stage ∆I> 410.04 21 0/1 1 = activated
Start signal from stage ∆I>
CD
410.05 22
Trip signal from stage ∆I> 410.06 23 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage ∆I>
CD
410.07 24
Start signal from stage θ> 410.08 25 0/1 1 = activated
Start signal from stage θ>
CD
410.09 26
Alarm signal from stage θ> 410.10 27 0/1 1 = activated
Alarm signal from stage θ>
CD
410.11 28
Trip signal from stage θ> 410.12 29 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage θ> CD 410.13 30
Trip signal from stage ARC
(light and current)
410.14 31 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage ARC
(light and current) CD
410.15 32
Trip signal from stage ARC
(light and DI)
411.00 33 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage ARC
(light and DI) CD
411.01 34
Light signal output 411.02 35 0/1 1 = activated
Light signal output CD 411.03 36
Trip lockout signal 411.04 37 0/1 1 = activated
Trip lockout signal CD 411.05 38
External trip signal 411.06 39 0/1 1 = activated
External trip signal CD 411.07 40
CBFP 411.08 41 0/1 1 = failure
CBFP CD 411.09 42
Shot 1 411.10 43 0/1 1 = initiated
Shot 1 CD 411.11 44
Table 4.1.15.2-5 Mapping of Modbus data
Description
HR/IR
address (.bit)
DI/Coil bit
address
Writeable
Value
range
Comment
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
83
Shot 2 411.12 45 0/1 1 = initiated
Shot 2 CD 411.13 46
Shot 3 411.14 47 0/1 1 = initiated
Shot 3 CD 411.15 48
CB position 412.00 49 0/1 1 = closed
0 = open
CB position CD 412.01 50
Definite trip alarm signal 412.02 51 0/1 1 = activated
Definite trip alarm signal CD 412.03 52
AR lockout signal 412.04 53 0/1 1 = activated
AR lockout signal CD 412.05 54
Open CB command 412.06 55 0/1 1 = activated
Open CB command CD 412.07 56
Close CB command 412.08 57 0/1 1 = activated
Close CB command CD 412.09 58
CB reclosing failed signal 412.10 59 0/1 1 = activated
CB reclosing failed signal
CD
412.11 60
CB reclosing inhibited 412.12 61 0/1 1 = activated
CB reclosing inhibited CD 412.13 62
AR cancelled 412.14 63 0/1 1 = activated
AR cancelled CD 412.15 64
PO1 413.00 65 0/1 1 = activated
PO1 CD 413.01 66
PO2 413.02 67 0/1 1 = activated
PO2 CD 413.03 68
PO3 413.04 69 0/1 1 = activated
PO3 CD 413.05 70
SO1 413.06 71 0/1 1 = activated
SO1 CD 413.07 72
SO2 413.08 73 0/1 1 = activated
SO2 CD 413.09 74
SO3 413.10 75 0/1 1 = activated
SO3 CD 413.11 76
SO4 413.12 77 0/1 1 = activated
SO4 CD 413.13 78
SO5 413.14 79 0/1 1 = activated
SO5 CD 413.15 80
DI1 414.00 81 0/1 1 = activated
DI1 CD 414.01 82
DI2 414.02 83 0/1 1 = activated
DI2 CD 414.03 84
DI3 414.04 85 0/1 1 = activated
DI3 CD 414.05 86
DI4 414.06 87 0/1 1 = activated
DI4 CD 414.07 88
DI5 414.08 89 0/1 1 = activated
DI5 CD 414.09 90
Disturbance recorder 414.10 91 0/1 1 = triggered
0 = cleared
Disturbance recorder CD 414.11 92
Table 4.1.15.2-5 Mapping of Modbus data
Description
HR/IR
address (.bit)
DI/Coil bit
address
Writeable
Value
range
Comment
84
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
HMI password 414.12 93 0/1 1 = opened
0 = closed
HMI password CD 414.13 94
IRF 414.14 95 0/1 1 = activated
IRF CD 414.15 96
Warning 415.00 97 0/1 1 = activated
Warning CD 415.01 98
SPA event overflow 415.02 99
SPA event overflow CD 415.03 100 Only the CD bit
will be activated
in case of
overflow.
Recorded data
Fault record 601...628 See Structure 2
Event record 671...679 See Structure 3
Relay identification
Type designation of the relay 701...708 ASCII chars,
2 chars/register
Real-time clock
Time reading and setting 721...727 W See Structure 4
Additional analogue
data
Thermal level 801 0...106 %
One-minute demand value 802 0...5000 0...50 x I
n
Demand value during the
specified time range
803 0...5000 0...50 x I
n
Maximum one-minute
demand value during the
specified time range
804 0...5000 0...50 x I
n
Stage/phase which caused
the trip
805 HI word 0...131071 See table
4.1.17-3
806 LO word
Trip indication code 807 0...21 See table
4.1.17-3
Number of starts of stage I> 808 0...999 Counter
Number of starts of stage I>> 809 0...999 Counter
Number of starts of stage
I>>>
810 0...999 Counter
Number of starts of stage I
0
> 811 0...999 Counter
Number of starts of stage
I
0
>>
812 0...999 Counter
Number of starts of stage ∆I> 813 0...999 Counter
Number of trips of stage I> 814 0...65535 Counter
Number of trips of stage I>> 815 0...65535 Counter
Number of trips of stage I>>> 816 0...65535 Counter
Number of trips of other
stages
817 0...65535 Counter
Number of AR shots (shot 1)
initiated by the trip signal
from stage I>>
818 0...255 Counter
Table 4.1.15.2-5 Mapping of Modbus data
Description
HR/IR
address (.bit)
DI/Coil bit
address
Writeable
Value
range
Comment
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
85
1)
Coil area, only writeable.
Structure 1
The status registers contain information on unread fault and event records, and relay
status. The registers are arranged as in the figure below.
Fig. 4.1.15.2.-2 Status registers
When the value of the FR/ER bit is 1, there is one or several unread fault/event
records. If time synchronization is realized via a digital input, either the SP
(second-pulse) or MP (minute-pulse) bit will be activated. Refer to table 4.1.18-1
for IRF codes and table 4.1.18-2 for warning codes.
Number of AR shots (shot 1)
initiated by the digital input
signal
819 0...255 Counter
Number of AR shots (shot 1)
initiated by the start or trip
signal from stage I>
820 0...255 Counter
Number of AR shots (shot 1)
initiated by the start or trip
signal from stage I
0
>
821 0...255 Counter
Number of AR shots (shot 2)
initiated by the trip signal
from stage I>>
822 0...255 Counter
Number of AR shots (shot 2)
initiated by the digital input
signal
823 0...255 Counter
Number of AR shots (shot 2)
initiated by the start or trip
signal from stage I>
824 0...255 Counter
Number of AR shots (shot 2)
initiated by the start or trip
signal from stage I
0
>
825 0...255 Counter
Number of AR shots (shot 3)
initiated by the trip signal
from stage I>>
826 0...255 Counter
Number of AR shots (shot 3)
initiated by the digital input
signal
827 0...255 Counter
Number of AR shots (shot 3)
initiated by the start or trip
signal from stage I>
828 0...255 Counter
Number of AR shots (shot 3)
initiated by the start or trip
signal from stage I
0
>
829 0...255 Counter
Control points
LED reset 501 W 1
1 = LED reset
1)
Table 4.1.15.2-5 Mapping of Modbus data
Description
HR/IR
address (.bit)
DI/Coil bit
address
Writeable
Value
range
Comment
401
402
403
15 8 7 0
StatRegREF610_a
Reserved
Warning code
IRF code
Reserved
FR ER SP MP
86
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
Structure 2
This structure contains data recorded during a fault sequence. Refer to section Fault
records for the reading method.
1)
Readable and writeable register.
Table 4.1.15.2-6 Fault record
Address Signal name Range Comment
601
Latest selection code
1) 1...2 1 = read oldest
unread record
2 = read oldest
stored record
602 Sequence number 1...255
603 Unread records left 0...6
604 Time stamp of the recorded data, date 2 bytes: YY.MM
605 Time stamp of the recorded data, date and
time
2 bytes: DD.HH
606 Time stamp of the recorded data, time 2 bytes: MM.SS
607 Time stamp of the recorded data, time 0...999 0...999 ms
608 Phase current I
L1
0...5000 0...50 x I
n
609 Phase current I
L2
0...5000 0...50 x I
n
610 Phase current I
L3
0...5000 0...50 x I
n
611 Earth-fault current 0...800 0...800% I
n
612 Phase discontinuity 0...100 0...100% I
n
613 Thermal level at start 0...106 0...106%
614 Thermal level at trip 0...106 0...106%
615 Maximum pick-up phase current I
L1
0...5000 0...50 x I
n
616 Maximum pick-up phase current I
L2
0...5000 0...50 x I
n
617 Maximum pick-up phase current I
L3
0...5000 0...50 x I
n
618 Maximum pick-up earth-fault current 0...800 0...800% I
n
619 Start duration of stage I> 0...100 0...100%
620 Start duration of stage I>> 0...100 0...100%
621 Start duration of stage I>>> 0...100 0...100%
622 Start duration of stage I
0
> 0...100 0...100%
623 Start duration of stage I
0
>> 0...100 0...100%
624 Start duration of stage ∆I> 0...100 0...100%
625 Start duration of external trip 0...100 0...100%
626 Trip number of AR sequence 0...255
627 Start duration of stage ARC (local) 0/100 0/100%
628 Start duration of stage ARC (remote) 0/100 0/100%
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
87
Structure 3
This structure contains Modbus event records. Refer to section Event records for the
reading method.
1)
Readable and writeable register.
Table 4.1.15.2-7 Event record
Address Signal name Range Comment
671
Latest selection code
1) 1...3 1 = read oldest
unread record
2 = read oldest
stored record
3 = clear Modbus
event buffer
-1...-99 -1...-99 = move to
the nth newest
record
672 Sequence number 1...255
673 Unread records left 0...99
674 Time stamp of the event, date 2 bytes: YY.MM
675 Time stamp of the event, date and time 2 bytes: DD.HH
676 Time stamp of the event, time 2 bytes: MM.SS
677 Time stamp of the event, time 0...999 0...999 ms
678 Modbus DI point or informative event (SPA
channel)
0/1
• DI event 0 When MSB = 0,
bits 14...0
indicate the DI
point.
• Informative event 1 When MSB = 1,
bits 14...0
indicate the SPA
channel.
679 DI value or SPA event code
• DI event 0/1 In case of a DI
event, the
register will
contain the DI
value.
• Informative event 0...63 In case of an
informative event,
the register will
contain the SPA
event code.
88
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
Structure 4
The relay's real-time clock is stored in this structure. It can be updated by presetting
the whole register structure in one Modbus transaction.
4.1.16. DNP 3.0 remote communication protocol
4.1.16.1. Protocol overview
The DNP 3.0 protocol was developed by Harris Control based on the early versions
of the IEC 60870-5 standard telecontrol protocol specifications. Today, the DNP
protocol specifications are controlled by the DNP Users Group.
The DNP protocol supports the ISO OSI (Open System Interconnection) based
model, which only specifies physical, data link and application layers. This reduced
protocol stack is referred to as Enhanced Performance Architecture (EPA). To
support advanced RTU functions and messages larger than the maximum frame
length as defined in the IEC 60870-1, the DNP 3.0 Data Link is to be used with a
transport pseudo-layer. As a minimum, the transport pseudo-layer implements
message assembly and disassembly services.
4.1.16.2. Protocol parameters of REF 610
The DNP parameters can all be adjusted using the Relay Setting Tool. For the DNP
parameters, refer to table 4.1.17-14.
Storing DNP 3.0 parameters
All DNP parameters are stored on the external DNP 3.0 module. After
parameterization with the Relay Setting Tool, REF 610 must be switched to the rear
communication mode for at least 10 seconds in order for the DNP parameters to be
replicated and stored onto the DNP module. However, this is necessary only if the
DNP parameters have been altered.
4.1.16.3. DNP 3.0 point list of REF 610
The DNP data points (binary, analogue and counters) of REF 610, presented in
tables 4.1.16.3-1... 4.1.16.3-3 below, are all in use as default.
Table 4.1.15.2-8 Real-time clock structure
Address Description Range
721 Year 0...99
722 Month 1...12
723 Day 1...31
724 Hour 0...23
725 Minute 0...59
726 Second 0...59
727 Hundredth of a
second
0...99
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
89
The default class settings of the DNP points within the different event object groups
are:
• binary inputs change events: class 1
• analogue inputs change events: class 2
• counter change events: class 3
All static data points belong to class 0.
Unsolicited reporting is enabled for all event objects as default. However, the
point-specific enable/disable parameters are meaningless unless unsolicited
reporting has been enabled with SPA parameter 503V24.
The pointers to the scaling factors for analogue objects are all 0 as default.
Consequently, the DNP and Modbus analogue values of REF 610 are identical as
default.
All DNP process points can be edited using the Relay Setting Tool. Editing features
include:
• re-organizing, adding and removing DNP points
• assigning event classes to specific DNP points
• DNP point-specific enabling/disabling of unsolicited reporting
• defining deadbands for event reporting
• defining scaling factors for analogue values
Table 4.1.16.3-1 Binary data
Description
DNP point
address
Event
class
UR
enable
Value
range
Comment
Start signal from stage I> 0 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage I> 1 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Start signal from stage I>> 2 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage I>> 3 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Start signal from stage I>>> 4 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage I>>> 5 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Start signal from stage I
0
> 6 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage I
0
> 7 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Start signal from stage I
0
>> 8 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage I
0
>> 9 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Start signal from stage ∆I> 10 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage ∆I> 11 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Start signal from stage θ> 12 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Alarm signal from stage θ> 13 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage θ> 14 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage ARC
(light and current)
15 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage ARC
(DI and current)
16 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Light signal output 17 1 1 0/1 1 = detected
Trip lockout signal 18 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
External trip signal 19 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
CBFP 20 1 1 0/1 1 = failure
Shot 1 21 1 1 0/1 1 = initiated
Shot 2 22 1 1 0/1 1 = initiated
90
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
Shot 3 23 1 1 0/1 1 = initiated
CB position 24 1 1 0/1 1 = closed
Definite trip alarm signal 25 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
AR lockout signal 26 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Open CB command 27 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Close CB command 28 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
CB reclosing failed signal 29 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
CB reclosing inhibited 30 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
AR cancelled 31 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
PO1 32 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
PO2 33 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
PO3 34 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
SO1 35 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
SO2 36 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
SO3 37 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
SO4 38 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
SO5 39 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
DI1 40 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
DI2 41 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
DI3 42 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
DI4 43 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
DI5 44 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Disturbance recorder 45 1 1 0/1 1 = triggered
0 = cleared
HMI password 46 1 1 0/1 1 = opened
0 = closed
IRF 47 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Warning 48 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
SPA event overflow 49 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Table 4.1.16.3-2 Analogue data
Description
DNP
point
address
Event
class
UR
enable
Deadband
Value
range
Internal
scaling
factor (ix=0)
Phase current I
L1
x I
n
0 2 1 1 0...5000 100
Phase current I
L2
x I
n
1 2 1 1 0...5000 100
Phase current I
L3
x I
n
2 2 1 1 0...5000 100
Earth-fault current x I
n
3 2 1 1 0...800 10
Phase discontinuity x I
n
4 2 1 1 0...100 10
Thermal level 5 2 1 1 0...106 1
One-minute demand value 6 2 1 1 0...5000 100
Demand value during the
specified time range
7 2 1 1 0...5000 100
Maximum one-minute
demand value during the
specified time range
8 2 1 1 0...5000 100
Table 4.1.16.3-1 Binary data
Description
DNP point
address
Event
class
UR
enable
Value
range
Comment
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
91
Table 4.1.16.3-3 Counters
Description
DNP point
address
Event
class
UR
enable
Deadband Value range
Number of starts of stage I> 0 3 1 1 0...999
Number of starts of stage I>> 1 3 1 1 0...999
Number of starts of stage
I>>>
2 3 1 1 0...999
Number of starts of stage I
0
> 3 3 1 1 0...999
Number of starts of stage
I
0
>>
4 3 1 1 0...999
Number of starts of stage ∆I> 5 3 1 1 0...999
Number of trips of stage I> 6 3 1 1 0...65535
Number of trips of stage I>> 7 3 1 1 0...65535
Number of trips of stage I>>> 8 3 1 1 0...65535
Number of trips of other
stages
9 3 1 1 0...65535
Number of AR shots (shot 1)
initiated by the trip signal
from stage I>>
10 3 1 1 0...255
Number of AR shots (shot 1)
initiated by the digital input
signal
11 3 1 1 0...255
Number of AR shots (shot 1)
initiated by the start or trip
signal from stage I>
12 3 1 1 0...255
Number of AR shots (shot 1)
initiated by the start or trip
signal from stage I
0
>
13 3 1 1 0...255
Number of AR shots (shot 2)
initiated by the trip signal
from stage I>>
14 3 1 1 0...255
Number of AR shots (shot 2)
initiated by the digital input
signal
15 3 1 1 0...255
Number of AR shots (shot 2)
initiated by the start or trip
signal from stage I>
16 3 1 1 0...255
Number of AR shots (shot 2)
initiated by the start or trip
signal from stage I
0
>
17 3 1 1 0...255
Number of AR shots (shot 3)
initiated by the trip signal
from stage I>>
18 3 1 1 0...255
Number of AR shots (shot 3)
initiated by the digital input
signal
19 3 1 1 0...255
Number of AR shots (shot 3)
initiated by the start or trip
signal from stage I>
20 3 1 1 0...255
Number of AR shots (shot 3)
initiated by the start or trip
signal from stage I
0
>
21 3 1 1 0...255
92
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
4.1.16.4. DNP 3.0 device profile of REF 610
DNP V3.00
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
Vendor Name: ABB Oy, Distribution Automation
Device Name: REF 610
Highest DNP Level Supported Device Function
For Requests L2
Slave
For Responses L2
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels
Supported (the complete list is described in the attached table):
Additions to level 2 are marked as shaded in the implementation table.
Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets) Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets)
Transmitted 292 Transmitted 2048
Received 292 Received 2048
Maximum Data Link Re-tries: Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:
Configurable, range from 0 to 255 with
primary data link layer retransmission count
Configurable, range from 0 to 255 with
application layer retransmission count
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:
Configurable, with confirmation type selector, default NO ACK
Requires Application Layer Confirmation
Configurable with confirmation type selector when reporting Event Data
(Slave devices only)
Always after response to reset request
Always when sending multi-fragment responses (Slave devices only)
Configurable, with confirmation type selector
Timeouts while waiting for
Data Link Confirm Configurable with primary data link layer
timeout, not relevant when NO ACK
Complete Appl. Fragment No, multi-fragment application frames not
supported
Application Confirm Configurable with application layer timeout
Complete Appl. Response No, not relevant in slave
Sends/Executes Control Operations
WRITE Binary Outputs
Never
SELECT/OPERATE
Never
DIRECT OPERATE
Never
DIRECT OPERATE - NO ACK
Never
Count
Never
Code
Never
Trip/Close
Never
Pulse On
Never
Queue
Never
Clear Queue
Never
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
93
FILL OUT THE FOLLOWING ITEMS FOR SLAVE DEVICES ONLY
Reports Digital Input Change Events when
no specific variation requested
Reports time-tagged Digital Input Change
Events when no specific variation requested
Never Never
Only time-tagged Binary Input Change With
Time
Only non-time-tagged Binary Input Change With
Relative Time
Configurable to send both, one or the
other (depends on default variation)
Configurable, depends on
objects basic variation
(variation used at
initialization)
Sends Unsolicited Responses Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses
Never Never
Configurable When Device Restarts
Only certain objects When Status Flags Change
Sometimes (attach explanation)
ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED
Function codes supported
No other options are permitted.
Default Counter Object/Variation Counters Roll Over at
No Counters Reported No Counters Reported
Configurable, default object and variation Configurable (attach explanation)
Default Object 20
Default Variation 2
16 Bits (Counters 6...9)
Point-by-point list attached 32 Bits, but roll-over bits not used
Other value: 999 (Counters 0...5) and
255 (Counters 10...21)
Point-by-point list attached
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses
Yes No
Table 4.1.16.4-1 Supported function codes
Code Function Description Supported
Transfer Function Codes
0 Confirm Message fragment confirmation
No response
Yes
1 Read Request objects from outstation
Respond with requested objects
Yes
2 Write Store specified objects to outstation
Respond with status of operation
Yes
Control Function Codes
3 Select Select output point of outstation
Respond with status of control point
No
94
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
4 Operate Set previously selected output
Respond with status of control point
No
5 Direct operate Set output directly
Respond with status of control point
No
6 Direct operate NO ACK Set output directly
No response
No
Freeze Function Codes
7 Immediate Freeze Copy specified objects to freeze buffer
Respond with status of operation
Yes
8 Immediate Freeze NO ACK Copy specified objects to freeze buffer
No response
Yes
9 Freeze and Clear Copy specified objects to freeze buffer
and clear objects
Respond with status of operation
Yes
1)
10 Freeze and Clear NO ACK Copy specified objects to freeze buffer
and clear objects
No response
Yes
1)
11 Freeze with time Copy specified objects to freeze buffer
at specified time
Respond with status of operation
No
12 Freeze with time NO ACK Copy specified objects to freeze buffer
at specified time
No response
No
Application Control Function Codes
13 Cold Restart Perform desired reset sequence
Respond with a time object
Yes
14 Warm Restart Perform desired partial reset operation
Respond with a time object
Yes
15 Initialize Data to Defaults Initialize the specified data to default
Respond with status of operation
No
16 Initialize Application Set the specified application ready to
be run
Respond with status of operation
No
17 Start Application Start the specified application to run
Respond with status of operation
Yes
18 Stop Application Stop the specified application to run
Respond with status of operation
Yes
Configuration Function Codes
19 Save configuration Save configuration
Respond with status of operation
No
20 Enable Unsolicited Messages Enable Unsolicited Messages
Respond with status of operation
Yes
21 Disable Unsolicited
Messages
Disable Unsolicited Messages
Respond with status of operation
Yes
22 Assign Class Assign specified objects to a class
Respond with status of operation
Yes
Time Synchronization Function Codes
23 Delay Measurement Perform propagation delay
measurement
Yes
Table 4.1.16.4-1 Supported function codes
Code Function Description Supported
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
95
1)
Counters of REF 610 can not be cleared using the DNP 3.0 protocol.
Response Function Codes
0 Confirm Message fragment confirmation Yes
129 Response Response to request message Yes
130 Unsolicited Message Spontaneous message without
request
Yes
Table 4.1.16.4-2 Supported objects
OBJECT
REQUEST
(slave must parse)
RESPONSE
(master must parse)
Object
group
Variation Description
Function
Codes
(dec)
Qualifier
Codes
(hex)
Function
Codes
(dec)
Qualifier
Codes
(hex)
1 0 Binary Input, all variations 1, 20,
21, 22
00, 01,
06, 07,
08,
17,28
129 00, 01,
17, 28
1 1 Binary Input 1, 20,
21, 22
00, 01,
06, 07,
08,
17,28
129 00, 01,
17, 28
1 2 Binary Input with Status 1, 20,
21, 22
00, 01,
06, 07,
08,
17,28
129 00, 01,
17, 28
2 0 Binary Input Change, all
variations
1 06, 07,
08
2 1 Binary Input Change without
Time
1 06, 07,
08
129,
130
17, 28
2 2 Binary Input Change with Time 1 06, 07,
08
129,
130
17, 28
2 3 Binary Input Change with
Relative Time
10 0 Binary Output, all variations
10 1 Binary Output
10 2 Binary Output with Status
12 0 Control Block, all variations
12 1 Control Relay Output Block
12 2 Pattern Control Block
12 3 Pattern Mask
20 0 Binary Counter, all variations 1, 7, 8,
20, 21,
22
00, 01,
06, 07,
08,
17,28
129 00, 01,
17, 28
20 1 32-Bit Binary Counter 1, 7, 8,
20, 21,
22
00, 01,
06, 07,
08,
17,28
129 00, 01,
17, 28
20 2 16-Bit Binary Counter 1, 7, 8,
20, 21,
22
00, 01,
06, 07,
08,
17,28
129 00, 01,
17, 28
20 3 32-Bit Delta Counter
20 4 16-Bit Delta Counter
Table 4.1.16.4-1 Supported function codes
Code Function Description Supported
96
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
20 5 32-Bit Binary Counter without
Flag
20 6 16-Bit Binary Counter without
Flag
20 7 32-Bit Delta Counter without
Flag
20 8 16-Bit Delta Counter without
Flag
21 0 Frozen Counter, all variations 1 00, 01,
06, 07,
08,
17,28
129 00, 01,
17, 28
21 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter 1 00, 01,
06, 07,
08,
17,28
129 00, 01,
17, 28
21 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter 1 00, 01,
06, 07,
08,
17,28
129 00, 01,
17, 28
21 3 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter
21 4 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter
21 5 32-Bit Frozen Counter with Time
of Freeze
1 00, 01,
06, 07,
08,
17,28
129 00, 01,
17, 28
21 6 16-Bit Frozen Counter with Time
of Freeze
1 00, 01,
06, 07,
08,
17,28
129 00, 01,
17, 28
21 7 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter with
Time of Freeze
21 8 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter with
Time of Freeze
21 9 32-Bit Frozen Counter without
Flag
21 10 16-Bit Frozen Counter without
Flag
21 11 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter
without Flag
21 12 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter
without Flag
22 0 Counter Change Event, all
variations
1 06, 07,
08
129,
130
17, 28
22 1 32-Bit Counter Change Event
without Time
1 06, 07,
08
129,
130
17, 28
22 2 16-Bit Counter Change Event
without Time
1 06, 07,
08
129,
130
17, 28
22 3 32-Bit Delta Counter Change
Event without Time
22 4 16-Bit Delta Counter Change
Event without Time
Table 4.1.16.4-2 Supported objects
OBJECT
REQUEST
(slave must parse)
RESPONSE
(master must parse)
Object
group
Variation Description
Function
Codes
(dec)
Qualifier
Codes
(hex)
Function
Codes
(dec)
Qualifier
Codes
(hex)
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
97
22 5 32-Bit Counter Change Event
with Time
1 06, 07,
08
129,
130
17, 28
22 6 16-Bit Counter Change Event
with Time
1 06, 07,
08
129,
130
17,28
22 7 32-Bit Delta Counter Change
Event with Time
22 8 16-Bit Delta Counter Change
Event with Time
23 0 Frozen Counter Event, all
variations
23 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event
without Time
23 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event
without Time
23 3 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter
Event without Time
23 4 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter
Event without Time
23 5 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event
with Time
23 6 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event
with Time
23 7 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter
Event with Time
23 8 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter
Event with Time
30 0 Analogue Input, all variations 1, 20,
21, 22
00, 01,
06, 07,
08,
17,28
129 00, 01,
17, 28
30 1 32-Bit Analogue Input 1, 20,
21, 22
00, 01,
06, 07,
08,
17,28
129 00, 01,
17, 28
30 2 16-Bit Analogue Input 1, 20,
21, 22
00, 01,
06, 07,
08,
17,28
129 00, 01,
17, 28
30 3 32-Bit Analogue Input without
Flag
1, 20,
21, 22
00, 01,
06, 07,
08,
17,28
129 00, 01,
17, 28
30 4 16-Bit Analogue Input without
Flag
1, 20,
21, 22
00, 01,
06, 07,
08,
17,28
129 00, 01,
17, 28
31 0 Frozen Analogue Input, all
variations
31 1 32-Bit Frozen Analogue Input
31 2 16-Bit Frozen Analogue Input
31 3 32-Bit Frozen Analogue Input
with Time of Freeze
Table 4.1.16.4-2 Supported objects
OBJECT
REQUEST
(slave must parse)
RESPONSE
(master must parse)
Object
group
Variation Description
Function
Codes
(dec)
Qualifier
Codes
(hex)
Function
Codes
(dec)
Qualifier
Codes
(hex)
98
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
31 4 16-Bit Frozen Analogue Input
with Time of Freeze
31 5 32-Bit Frozen Analogue Input
without Flag
31 6 16-Bit Frozen Analogue Input
without Flag
32 0 Analogue Change Event, all
variations
1 06, 07,
08
129,
130
17, 28
32 1 32-Bit Analogue Change Event
without Time
1 06, 07,
08
129,
130
17, 28
32 2 16-Bit Analogue Change Event
without Time
1 06, 07,
08
129,
130
17, 28
32 3 32-Bit Analogue Change Event
with Time
1 06, 07,
08
129,
130
17, 28
32 4 16-Bit Analogue Change Event
with Time
1 06, 07,
08
129,
130
17, 28
33 0 Frozen Analogue Event, all
variations
33 1 32-Bit Frozen Analogue Event
without Time
33 2 16-Bit Frozen Analogue Event
without Time
33 3 32-Bit Frozen Analogue Event
with Time
33 4 16-Bit Frozen Analogue Event
with Time
40 0 Analogue Output Status, all
variations
40 1 32-Bit Analogue Output Status
40 2 16-Bit Analogue Output Status
41 0 Analogue Output Block, all
variations
41 1 32-Bit Analogue Output Block
41 2 16-Bit Analogue Output Block
50 0 Time and Date, all variations 1 06, 07,
08
129 17, 28
50 1
(def)
Time and Date 1 06, 07,
08
129 17, 28
50 1
(def)
Time and Date 2 07, 08 129
50 2 Time and Date with Interval
51 0 Time and Date CTO, all
variations
51 1 Time and Date CTO
51 2 Unsynchronized Time and Date
CTO
52 0 Time Delay, all variations
52 1 Time Delay Coarse
52 2 Time Delay Fine 23 07 129 07
60 0 All classes 1 06 129 28
Table 4.1.16.4-2 Supported objects
OBJECT
REQUEST
(slave must parse)
RESPONSE
(master must parse)
Object
group
Variation Description
Function
Codes
(dec)
Qualifier
Codes
(hex)
Function
Codes
(dec)
Qualifier
Codes
(hex)
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
99
4.1.16.5. REF 610-specific DNP features
Time synchronization
If time synchronization (minute-pulse or second-pulse) of the relay’s real-time clock
is realized via a digital input, the following applies to the DNP interface of REF 610:
• Depending on the pulse type, either the date-to-minute or the date-to-second
information of the DNP time synchronization message will be used.
• REF 610 will send only one request for time synchronization to the DNP master,
which is at power up.
60 1 Class 0 Data 1 06, 07,
08
129 17, 28
60 2 Class 1 Data 1 06, 07,
08
129 17, 28
60 3 Class 2 Data 1 06, 07,
08
129 17, 28
60 4 Class 3 Data 1 06, 07,
08
129 17, 28
70 1 File Identifier
80 1 Internal Indications 2 00 129
81 1 Storage Object
82 1 Device Profile
83 1 Private Registration Object
83 2 Private Registration Object
Descriptor
90 1 Application Identifier
100 1 Short Floating Point
100 2 Long Floating Point
100 3 Extended Floating Point
101 1 Small Packed Binary-Coded
Decimal
101 2 Medium Packed Binary-Coded
Decimal
101 3 Large Packed Binary-Coded
Decimal
No Object 13, 14
Table 4.1.16.4-2 Supported objects
OBJECT
REQUEST
(slave must parse)
RESPONSE
(master must parse)
Object
group
Variation Description
Function
Codes
(dec)
Qualifier
Codes
(hex)
Function
Codes
(dec)
Qualifier
Codes
(hex)
100
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
Unsolicited reporting start up
Due to implementation differences in DNP master devices, the following alternative
unsolicited reporting (SPA parameter 503V24) start ups are available in REF 610:
• 1 = Unsolicited reporting starts immediately, without permission from the master.
• 2 = REF 610 will send an empty unsolicited response message when
communication begins, which the master will confirm. After this, REF 610 will
start to send unsolicited responses.
• 3 = REF 610 will send an empty unsolicited response message when
communication begins, which the master will confirm. After this, the master will
enable unsolicited reporting for certain or all classes using function 20. Classes
which are not enabled remain disabled.
Note!
Only the last alternative is compliant with the DNP 3.0 standard.
Event handling
The maximum capacity of the DNP event buffer is 100 events. When unsolicited
reporting has been enabled (SPA parameter 503V24), the event reporting will use
the following SPA parameters, called send throttle parameters:
Example (class 1)
The events will be reported when the event delay (SPA parameter 503V18) has
elapsed or the defined amount of events (SPA parameter 503V19) have been
generated for class 1.
If send throttles are not desired, the event delay should be set to 0 and the event count
to 1. In this case, the class events will be sent to the host immediately as they occur.
Event buffer overflow
DNP 3.0 event buffer overflow is indicated with the internal indication IIN2.3, as
defined by the standard. IIN2.3 can also indicate event buffer overflow in the
internal communication between the DNP3.0 module and the main CPU module of
REF 610. In this case, REF 610 will automatically activate and reset the IIN2.3 bit.
As events have been lost in both cases, the DNP 3.0 master should perform an
integrity scan after the IIN2.3 bit has been reset.
DNP counters and frozen counters
DNP counters in use have a corresponding frozen counter. The frozen counters in
object group 21 have the same DNP point index as the ordinary DNP counters.
Further, frozen counters can only be read as static objects, and frozen counter events
(object group 23) are not supported.
503V18 Class 1 Event delay
503V19 Class 1 Event count
503V20 Class 2 Event delay
503V21 Class 2 Event count
503V22 Class 3 Event delay
503V23 Class 3 Event count
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
101
Collision avoidance and detection
REF 610 supports both collision avoidance and detection. Collision detection can be
enabled or disabled with SPA parameter 503V235.
Collision avoidance occurs before message transmission. When preparing to
transmit and the link is busy, REF 610 will first wait until the link becomes idle.
After this, a backoff time will start. When the backoff time elapses, REF 610 will
check the link again. If not busy, REF 610 will start the transmission. The backoff
time is calculated as follows:
backoff time = silent interval + random delay
The silent interval is set with SPA parameter 503V232 and the maximum random
delay with SPA parameters 503V233 (the width of a single time slot in milliseconds)
and 503V234 (the maximum number of time slots). By setting the time-slot width to
10 milliseconds and the maximum number of time slots to 10, for instance, the
maximum random delay will be 100 milliseconds.
Note!
In a network consisting of several slaves, the priority between the devices are
defined with SPA parameters 503V233 and 503V234. A device with shorter silent
interval and maximum random delay has higher sending priority than a device with
longer silent interval and maximum random delay.
Collision detection is always active during transmission (provided that it has been
enabled). While sending a message, REF 610 supervises collisions on the link. If a
collision is detected, the transmission will be immediately cancelled. After this, REF
610 will try to transmit the message again, using collision avoidance before sending
the message.
Scaling DNP analogue values
The DNP analogue values can be scaled using either an internal (fixed) or a
user-defined scaling factor. If the scaling factor index for a certain analogue value is
set to 0, the internal scaling factor will be used. If set to 1...5, the user-defined scaling
factor of the corresponding scaling factor parameter, SPA parameter
503V(100+index), will be used:
Example
503V101 Scaling factor 1
503V102 Scaling factor 2
503V103 Scaling factor 3
503V104 Scaling factor 4
503V105 Scaling factor 5
Phase current I
L1
0.00...50.0 x I
n
Internal scaling factor 100
Default DNP range 0...5000
102
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
To show the analogue value in primary units, and if I
n
= 300 A and the accuracy of
the analogue value = 1 A:
1. Take any unused scaling factor and set it to 300.
2. Set the scaling index pointer of the analogue value to point at the scaling factor.
3. The value range will now be 0.00 x 300....50.0 x 300 = 0...15000 A.
DNP analogue values deadband
The deadband is always defined in units of the original value when scaled using the
internal (fixed) scaling factor, irrespective of whether the internal scaling factor is
used for value presentation or not.
Example
For a deadband of 2% I
n
when the internal scaling factor is 100, the deadband value
is set as follows: 0.02 x 100 = 2. If the scaling factor is set to 300 A, the scaled
deadband is 300 A x 0.02 = 6 A.
4.1.17. SPA bus communication protocol parameters
Altering parameter values via serial communication requires the use of the SPA
password in some cases. The password is a user-defined number within the range
1...999, the default value being 1. SPA parameters are found on channels 0...5,
503...504, 507 and 601...603.
To enter the setting mode, enter the password into parameter V160. To exit the
setting mode, enter the same password into parameter V161. The password
protection is also reactivated in case of loss of auxiliary voltage.
The HMI password can be changed with parameter V162, but it is not possible to
read the password via this parameter.
Abbreviations used in the following tables:
• R = readable data
• W = writeable data
• P = password protected writeable data
Settings
Table 4.1.17-1 Settings
Variable
Actual
settings (R),
channel 0
Group/
Channel 1
(R, W, P)
Group/
Channel 2
(R, W, P)
Setting range
Start value of stage I> S1 1S1 2S1 0.30...5.00 x I
n
Operate time of stage I> S2 1S2 2S2 0.05...300 s
Time/current characteristic
for stage I>
S3 1S3 2S3 0...8
Time multiplier k S4 1S4 2S4 0.05...1.00
Time multiplier n S5 1S5 2S5 1.0...15.0
Resetting time of stage I> S6 1S6 2S6 0.05...2.50 s
Start value of stage I>>
S7
1)
1S7 2S7 0.50...35.0 x I
n
Operate time of stage I>> S8 1S8 2S8 0.04...300 s
Start value of stage I>>>
S9
1)
1S9 2S9 0.50...35.0 x I
n
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
103
Operate time of stage I>>> S10 1S10 2S10 0.04...30.0 s
Start value of stage I
0
> S11 1S11 2S11 1.0...100% I
n
Operate time of stage I
0
> S12 1S12 2S12 0.05...300 s
Time/current characteristic
for stage I
0
>
S13 1S13 2S13 0...8
Time multiplier k
0
S14 1S14 2S14 0.05...1.00 s
Time multiplier n
0
S15 1S15 2S15 1.0…15.0
Resetting time of stage I
0
> S16 1S16 2S16 0.05...2.50
Start value of stage I
0
>>
S17
1)
1S17 2S17 5.0...400% I
n
Operate time of stage I
0
>> S18 1S18 2S18 0.05...300 s
Start value of stage ∆I>
S19
1)
1S19 2S19 10...100%
Operate time of stage ∆I> S20 1S20 2S20 1...300 s
Full load current
S21
1)
1S21 2S21 0.30...1.50 x I
n
Time constant of stage θ> S22 1S22 2S22 1...200 min
Alarm level of stage θ>
S23
1)
1S23 2S23 50...100% θ
t
>
Operate time of CBFP S24 1S24 2S24 0.10...60.0 s
Number of AR shots S25 1S25 2S25 0 = AR is not in use
1 = shot 1
2 = shot 1 and 2
3 = shot 1, 2 and 3
Current limit ArcI> of stage
ARC
S26
1) 2)
1S26 2S26 0.50...35.0 x I
n
Current limit ArcI
0
> of stage
ARC
S27
1) 2)
1S27 2S27 5.0...400% I
n
Checksum, SGF 1 S61 1S61 2S61 0...255
Checksum, SGF 2 S62 1S62 2S62 0...127
Checksum, SGF 3 S63 1S63 2S63 0...127
Checksum, SGF 4 S64 1S64 2S64 0...63
Checksum, SGF 5 S65 1S65 2S65 0...255
Checksum, SGB 1 S71 1S71 2S71 0...1048575
Checksum, SGB 2 S72 1S72 2S72 0...1048575
Checksum, SGB 3
S73
3)
1S73 2S73 0...1048575
Checksum, SGB 4
S74
3)
1S74 2S74 0...1048575
Checksum, SGB 5
S75
3)
1S75 2S75 0...1048575
Checksum, SGR 1 S81 1S81 2S81 0...8388607
Checksum, SGR 2 S82 1S82 2S82 0...8388607
Checksum, SGR 3 S83 1S83 2S83 0...8388607
Checksum, SGR 4 S84 1S84 2S84 0...8388607
Checksum, SGR 5 S85 1S85 2S85 0...8388607
Checksum, SGR 6
S86
3)
1S86 2S86 0...8388607
Checksum, SGR 7
S87
3)
1S87 2S87 0...8388607
Checksum, SGR 8
S88
3)
1S88 2S88 0...8388607
Checksum, SGL 1 S91 1S91 2S91 0...2097151
Checksum, SGL 2 S92 1S92 2S92 0...2097151
Table 4.1.17-1 Settings
Variable
Actual
settings (R),
channel 0
Group/
Channel 1
(R, W, P)
Group/
Channel 2
(R, W, P)
Setting range
104
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
1)
If the protection stage is out of operation, the number indicating the currently used value will be
displaced by “999” when the parameter is read via the SPA bus and by dashes on the LCD.
2)
If the optional/O module has not been installed, a dash will be shown on the LCD and “999” when the
parameter is read via the SPA bus.
3)
If the optional/O module has not been installed, a dash will be shown on the LCD and “9999999” when
the parameter is read via the SPA bus.
Auto-reclose parameters
The AR function can be activated either via the HMI or with SPA parameter S25 by
setting the number of auto-reclose shots to 1, 2 or 3.
Checksum, SGL 3 S93 1S93 2S93 0...2097151
Checksum, SGL 4 S94 1S94 2S94 0...2097151
Checksum, SGL 5 S95 1S95 2S95 0...2097151
Checksum, SGL 6 S96 1S96 2S96 0...2097151
Checksum, SGL 7 S97 1S97 2S97 0...2097151
Checksum, SGL 8 S98 1S98 2S98 0...2097151
Table 4.1.17-2 Settings
Description
Parameter
(R, W, P),
channel 0
Value
CB Closing time V121 0.1...10 s
Start delay of stage I> V122 0...300 s
Start delay of stage I
0
> V123 0...300 s
Reclaim time V124 3...300 s
Cutout time V125 0.1...300 s
Dead time of shot 1 V126 0.1...300 s
Dead time of shot 2 V127 0.1...300 s
Dead time of shot 3 V128 0.1...300 s
SG1 V129 0...255
SG2 V130 0...1023
SG3 V131 0...31
Table 4.1.17-1 Settings
Variable
Actual
settings (R),
channel 0
Group/
Channel 1
(R, W, P)
Group/
Channel 2
(R, W, P)
Setting range
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
105
Recorded data
Parameter V1 shows the stage which has caused the trip, parameter V2 the trip
indication code, parameters V3...V8 show the number of starts of the protection
stages, parameters V9...V12 the number of trips of the protection stages, and
parameters V13...V24 the number of initiated auto-reclose shots.
Table 4.1.17-3 Recorded data: Channel 0
Recorded data Parameter (R) Value
Stage/phase which caused the
trip
V1 1=I
L3
>
2=I
L2
>
4=I
L1
>
8=I
0
>
16=I
L3
>>
32=I
L2
>>
64=I
L1
>>
128=I
0
>>
256=I
L3
>>>
512=I
L2
>>>
1024=I
L1
>>>
2048=∆I>
4096=θ>
8192=external trip
16384=AR
32768=trip of stage ARC (local)
65536=trip of stage ARC (remote)
Trip indication code V2 0 = ---
1=start of stage I>
2=trip of stage I>
3=start of stage I>>
4=trip of stage I>>
5=start of stage I>>>
6=trip of stage I>>>
7=start of stage I
0
>
8=trip of stage I
0
>
9=start of stage I
0
>>
10=trip of stage I
0
>>
11=start of stage ∆I>
12=trip of stage ∆I>
13=alarm of stage θ>
14=trip of stage θ>
15=external trip
16=definite trip alarm
17=CB reclosing failed
18=AR shot due
19=AR lockout
20=trip of stage ARC
21=CBFP
Number of starts of stage I> V3 0...999
Number of starts of stage I>> V4 0...999
Number of starts of stage I>>> V5 0...999
Number of starts of stage I
0
> V6 0...999
Number of starts of stage I
0
>> V7 0...999
Number of starts of stage ∆I> V8 0...999
106
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
The last five recorded values can be read with parameters V1...V23 on channels
1...5. Event n denotes the last recorded value, n-1 the next one, and so forth.
Number of trips of stage I> V9 0...65535
Number of trips of stage I>> V10 0...65535
Number of trips of stage I>>> V11 0...65535
Number of trips of other stages V12 0...65535
Number of AR shots (shot 1)
initiated by the trip signal from
stage I>>
V13 0...255
Number of AR shots (shot 1)
initiated by the digital input
signal
V14 0...255
Number of AR shots (shot 1)
initiated by the start or trip signal
from stage I>
V15 0...255
Number of AR shots (shot 1)
initiated by the start or trip signal
from stage I
0
>
V16 0...255
Number of AR shots (shot 2)
initiated by the trip signal from
stage I>>
V17 0...255
Number of AR shots (shot 2)
initiated by the digital input
signal
V18 0...255
Number of AR shots (shot 2)
initiated by the start or trip signal
from stage I>
V19 0...255
Number of AR shots (shot 2)
initiated by the start or trip signal
from stage I
0
>
V20 0...255
Number of AR shots (shot 3)
initiated by the trip signal from
stage I>>
V21 0...255
Number of AR shots (shot 3)
initiated by the digital input
signal
V22 0...255
Number of AR shots (shot 3)
initiated by the start or trip signal
from stage I>
V23 0...255
Number of AR shots (shot 3)
initiated by the start or trip signal
from stage I
0
>
V24 0...255
Table 4.1.17-4 Recorded data: Channels 1...5
Recorded data
Event (R)
Value
n
Channel 1
n-1
Channel 2
n-2
Channel 3
n-3
Channel 4
n-4
Channel 5
Phase current I
L1
1V1 2V1 3V1 4V1 5V1 0...50 x I
n
Phase current I
L2
1V2 2V2 3V2 4V2 5V2 0...50 x I
n
Phase current I
L3
1V3 2V3 3V3 4V3 5V3 0...50 x I
n
Table 4.1.17-3 Recorded data: Channel 0
Recorded data Parameter (R) Value
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
107
1)
If the thermal protection has been set out of operation (SGF3/5), dashes will be shown on the LCD
and “999” when the parameter is read via the SPA bus.
Earth-fault current 1V4 2V4 3V4 4V4 5V4 0...800% I
n
Phase discontinuity 1V5 2V5 3V5 4V5 5V5 0...100%
Thermal level at
start
1V6 2V6 3V6 4V6 5V6
0...106%
1)
Thermal level at trip 1V7 2V7 3V7 4V7 5V7
0...106%
1)
Maximum pick-up
phase current I
L1
1V8 2V8 3V8 4V8 5V8 0...50 x I
n
Maximum pick-up
phase current I
L2
1V9 2V9 3V9 4V9 5V9 0...50 x I
n
Maximum pick-up
phase current I
L3
1V10 2V10 3V10 4V10 5V10 0...50 x I
n
Maximum pick-up
earth-fault current
1V11 2V11 3V11 4V11 5V11 0...800%
Start duration of
stage I>
1V12 2V12 3V12 4V12 5V12 0...100%
Start duration of
stage I>>
1V13 2V13 3V13 4V13 5V13 0...100%
Start duration of
stage I>>>
1V14 2V14 3V14 4V14 5V14 0...100%
Start duration of
stage I
0
>
1V15 2V15 3V15 4V15 5V15 0...100%
Start duration of
stage I
0
>>
1V16 2V16 3V16 4V16 5V16 0...100%
Start duration of
stage ∆I>
1V17 2V17 3V17 4V17 5V17 0...100%
Start duration of
external trip
1V18 2V18 3V18 4V18 5V18 0/100%
Trip number of AR
sequence
1V19 2V19 3V19 4V19 5V19 0...255
Start duration of
stage ARC (local)
1V20 2V20 3V20 4V20 5V20 0/100%
Start duration of
stage ARC (remote)
1V21 2V21 3V21 4V21 5V21 0/100%
Time stamp of the
recorded data, date
1V27 2V27 3V27 4V27 5V27 YY-MM-DD
Time stamp of the
recorded data, time
1V28 2V28 3V28 4V28 5V28 HH.MM;
SS.sss
Table 4.1.17-4 Recorded data: Channels 1...5
Recorded data
Event (R)
Value
n
Channel 1
n-1
Channel 2
n-2
Channel 3
n-3
Channel 4
n-4
Channel 5
108
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
Disturbance recorder
1)
The disturbance recorder requires this parameter to be set. The conversion factor is the
transformation ratio multiplied by the rated current of the relay. If this parameter has been given the
value 0, dashes will be shown on the LCD instead of the primary values and the recorded data will be
redundant.
2)
M1 can be used for broadcast triggering by using the unit address “900”.
3)
Parameters can be written if the recorder has not been triggered.
4)
This value is copied to parameters M81 and M82.
Table 4.1.17-5 Parameters for the disturbance recorder
Description
Parameter
(channel 0)
R, W Value
Remote triggering
M1
2)
W 1
Clear recorder memory M2 W 1
Sampling rate
M15
3)
R, W 800/960 Hz
400/480 Hz
50/60 Hz
Station identification/unit number M18 R, W 0...9999
Rated frequency M19 R 50 or 60 Hz
Name of the feeder M20 R, W Max 16 characters
Digital channel texts M40...M47 R
Analogue channel texts M60...M63 R
Analogue channel conversion factor and
unit for I
L1
, I
L2
and I
L3
M80
1) 4)

M81 and
M82
R, W
R
Factor 0...65535, unit
(A, kA), e.g. 10,kA
Analogue channel conversion factor and
unit for the earth-fault current
M83
1)
R, W Factor 0...65535, unit
(A, kA), e.g. 10,kA
Internal trigger signals' checksum V236 R, W 0...16383
Internal trigger signal's edge V237 R, W 0...16383
Checksum of internal signal storing mask
V238
3)
R, W 0...16383
Post-triggering recording length V240 R, W 0...100%
External trigger signal's checksum V241 R, W 0...31
External trigger signal's edge V242 R, W 0...31
Checksum of external signal storing mask
V243
3)
R, W 0...31
Triggering state, clearing and restart V246 R, W R:
0 = recorder not
triggered
1 = recorder triggered
and recording stored
in the memory
W:
0 = clear recorder
memory
2 = download restart;
sets the first
information and the
time stamp for
triggering ready to be
read
4 = manual triggering
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
109

1)
0 = rising edge, 1 = falling edge.
1)
0 = rising edge, 1 = falling edge.
Control parameters
Table 4.1.17-6 Disturbance recorder internal triggering and storing
Event
Weighting
factor
Default value of
triggering
mask, V236
Default value of
triggering edge,
V237
1)
Default value of
storing mask,
V238
Start of stage I> 1 0 0 1
Trip of stage I> 2 1 0 1
Start of stage I>> 4 0 0 1
Trip of stage I>> 8 1 0 1
Start of stage I>>> 16 0 0 0
Trip of stage I>>> 32 1 0 1
Start of stage I
0
> 64 0 0 1
Trip of stage I
0
> 128 1 0 1
Start of stage I
0
>> 256 0 0 0
Trip of stage I
0
>> 512 1 0 1
Start of stage ∆I> 1024 0 0 0
Trip of stage ∆I> 2048 0 0 0
Alarm of stage θ> 4096 0 0 0
Trip of stage θ> 8192 0 0 0
Checksum 682 0 751
Table 4.1.17-7 Disturbance recorder external triggering and storing
Event
Weighting
factor
Default value of
triggering
mask, V241
Default value of
triggering edge,
V242
1)
Default value of
storing mask,
V243
DI1 1 0 0 0
DI2 2 0 0 0
DI3 4 0 0 0
DI4 8 0 0 0
DI5 16 0 0 0
Checksum 0 0 0
Table 4.1.17-8 Control parameters
Description Parameter R, W, P Value
Reading of the event buffer L R Time, channel number and
event code
Re-reading of the event buffer B R Time, channel number and
event code
Reading of relay state data C R 0 = normal state
1 = the relay has been
subject to an automatic
reset
2 = overflow of the event
buffer
3 = both 1 and 2
110
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
Resetting of relay state data C W 0 = reset E50 and E51
1 = reset only E50
2 = reset only E51
4 = reset all events
including E51 except for
E50
Time reading and setting T R, W SS.sss
Date and time reading and setting D R, W YY-MM-DD HH.MM;SS.sss
Type designation of the relay F R REF 610
Unlatching output contacts V101 W 1 = unlatch
Clearing indications and memorized
values and unlatching contacts
(master reset)
V102 W 1 = clear and unlatch
Resetting of trip lockout V103 W 1 = reset
Rated frequency V104 R, W (P) 50 or 60 Hz
Time setting range for demand values
in minutes
V105 R, W 0...999 min
Non-volatile memory settings V106 R, W 0...31
Time setting for disabling new trip
indications on the LCD
V108 R, W (P) 0...999 min
Testing the self-supervision V109 W (P) 1 = the self-supervision
output contact is activated
and the READY indicator
LED starts to blink
0 = normal operation
LED test for start and trip indicators V110 W (P) 0 = start and trip LEDs off
1 = trip LED on, start LED
off
2 = start LED on, trip LED
off
3 = start and trip LEDs on
LED test for programmable LEDs V111 W (P) 0...255
Operation indications on the LCD V112 R, W 0 = IEC
1 = ANSI
Trip-circuit supervision V113 R, W 0 = not in use
1 = in use
Remote control of setting group V150 R, W 0 = setting group 1
1 = setting group 2
Entering the SPA password for
settings
V160 W 1...999
Changing the SPA password or
reinstating the password protection
V161 W (P) 1...999
Changing the HMI password V162 W 1...999
Clearing trip counters or AR counter V166 W (P) 1= clear trip counters
2= clear AR counters
Restoring factory settings V167 W (P) 2 = restore factory settings
for CPU
3 = restore factory settings
for DNP
Warning code V168 R
0...65535
1)
IRF code V169 R
0...255
1)
Unit address of the relay V200 R, W 1...254
Table 4.1.17-8 Control parameters
Description Parameter R, W, P Value
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
111
1)
In case of a warning, the value 255 will be stored in V169. This will enable the master to continuously
read only V169.
2)
If the optional communication module has not been installed, a warning of a faulty communication
module will appear on the LCD together with the fault code.
3)
If the optional DNP 3.0 module has been installed, the DNP 3.0 communication protocol will be
automatically selected.
The measured currents can be read with parameters I1...I4, the calculated phase
discontinuity value with parameter I5, the status of light detection with parameter I6,
the CB position with parameter I7 and the status of the digital inputs with parameters
I8...I12.
Data transfer rate (SPA), kbps V201 R, W 9.6/4.8
Rear communication V202 W 1 = rear connector
activated
Rear communication protocol
V203
3)
R, W 0 = SPA
1 = IEC_103
2 = Modbus RTU
3 = Modbus ASCII
4 = DNP 3.0 (read-only)
Connection type V204 R, W 0 = loop
1 = star
Line-idle state V205 R, W 0 = light off
1 = light on
Optional communication module V206 R, W (P) 0 = not in use
1 = in use
2)
CPU software number V227 R 1MRS118512
CPU software revision V228 R A...Z
CPU build number V229 R XXX
DNP protocol name 2V226 R DNP 3.0
DNP software number 2V227 R 1MRS118531
DNP software revision 2V228 R A...Z
DNP build number 2V229 R XXX
Relay serial number V230 R BAxxxxxx
CPU serial number V231 R ACxxxxxx
DNP serial number V232 R AKxxxxxx
Test date V235 R YYMMDD
Date reading and setting
(RED 500 format)
V250 R, W YY-MM-DD
Time reading and setting
(RED 500 format)
V251 R, W HH.MM;SS.sss
Table 4.1.17-9 Inputs
Description
Parameter (R),
channel 0
Value
Current measured on phase I
L1
I1 0...50 x I
n
Current measured on phase I
L2
I2 0...50 x I
n
Current measured on phase I
L3
I3 0...50 x I
n
Measured earth-fault current I4 0...800% I
n
Calculated phase discontinuity value I5 0...100%
Light detected (arc) I6 0/1
Table 4.1.17-8 Control parameters
Description Parameter R, W, P Value
112
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
1)
When the value is 1, the digital input is energized.
2)
If the optional I/O module has not been installed, a dash will be shown on the LCD and “9” when the
parameter is read via the SPA bus.
Each protection stage has its internal output signal. These signals can be read with
parameters O1...O26 and the recorded functions with parameters O61...86. The state
of the output contacts can be read or changed with parameters O41...O49 and the
recorded functions read with parameters O101...O109.
CB position I7 0 = undefined
1 = closed
2 = open
3 = undefined
DI1 status I8
0/1
1)
DI2 status I9
0/1
1)
DI3 status I10
0/1
1) 2)
DI4 status I11
0/1
1) 2)
DI5 status I12
0/1
1) 2)
Table 4.1.17-10Output signals
Status of the protection
stages
State of stage (R),
channel 0
Recorded
functions (R),
channel 0
Value
Start of stage I> O1 O61 0/1
Trip of stage I> O2 O62 0/1
Start of stage I>> O3 O63 0/1
Trip of stage I>> O4 O64 0/1
Start of stage I>>> O5 O65 0/1
Trip of stage I>>> O6 O66 0/1
Start of stage I
0
> O7 O67 0/1
Trip of stage I
0
> O8 O68 0/1
Start of stage I
0
>> O9 O69 0/1
Trip of stage I
0
>> O10 O70 0/1
Start of stage ∆I> O11 O71 0/1
Trip of stage ∆I> O12 O72 0/1
Start of stage θ> O13 O73 0/1
Alarm of stage θ> O14 O74 0/1
Trip of stage θ> O15 O75 0/1
External trip O16 O76 0/1
Trip lockout O17 O77 0/1
CBFP Trip O18 O78 0/1
Trip of stage ARC O19 O79 0/1
Light signal output O20 O80 0/1
Open CB command O21 O81 0/1
Close CB command O22 O82 0/1
Definite trip alarm O23 O83 0/1
Table 4.1.17-9 Inputs
Description
Parameter (R),
channel 0
Value
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
113
1)
State of output when the trip lockout function is not in use.
2)
Either O43/O103 or O46 is to be used at a time.
3)
State of output when the trip lockout function is in use.
4)
If the optional I/O module has not been installed, a dash will be shown on the LCD and “9” when the
parameter is read via the SPA bus.
Note!
Parameters O41...O49 and O51 control the physical output contacts which can be
connected to circuit breakers, for instance.
Parameters for the IEC 60870-5-103 remote communication
protocol
CB reclosing failed O24 O84 0/1
Shot due O25 O85 0/1
AR Lockout O26 O86 0/1
Table 4.1.17-11 Outputs
Operation of output
contact
State of output
(R, W, P),
channel 0
Recorded
functions (R),
channel 0
Value
Output PO1 O41 O101 0/1
Output PO2 O42 O102 0/1
Output PO3
1)
O43 O103
0/1
2)
Output SO1 O44 O104 0/1
Output SO2 O45 O105 0/1
Output PO3
(trip lockout)
3)
O46
0/1
2)
Output SO3 O47 O107
0/1
4)
Output SO4 O48 O108
0/1
4)
Output SO5 O49 O109
0/1
4)
Enabling activation of
output contacts PO1,
PO2, PO3, SO1, SO2,
SO3, SO4 and SO5 via
the SPA bus
O51 - 0/1
Table 4.1.17-12Settings
Description
Parameter
(channel 507)
R, W, P Value
Unit address of the relay 507V200 R, W 1...254
Data transfer rate (IEC_103), kbps 507V201 R, W 9.6/4.8
Table 4.1.17-10Output signals
Status of the protection
stages
State of stage (R),
channel 0
Recorded
functions (R),
channel 0
Value
114
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
Parameters for the Modbus remote communication protocol
1)
The default value is 0.
Parameters for the DNP 3.0 remote communication protocol
Table 4.1.17-13Settings
Description
Parameter
(channel 504)
R, W, P Value
User-defined register 1 504V1 R, W
0...65535
1)
User-defined register 2 504V2 R, W
0...65535
1)
User-defined register 3 504V3 R, W
0...65535
1)
User-defined register 4 504V4 R, W
0...65535
1)
User-defined register 5 504V5 R, W
0...65535
1)
User-defined register 6 504V6 R, W
0...65535
1)
User-defined register 7 504V7 R, W
0...65535
1)
User-defined register 8 504V8 R, W
0...65535
1)
User-defined register 9 504V9 R, W
0...65535
1)
User-defined register 10 504V10 R, W
0...65535
1)
User-defined register 11 504V11 R, W
0...65535
1)
User-defined register 12 504V12 R, W
0...65535
1)
User-defined register 13 504V13 R, W
0...65535
1)
User-defined register 14 504V14 R, W
0...65535
1)
User-defined register 15 504V15 R, W
0...65535
1)
User-defined register 16 504V16 R, W
0...65535
1)
Unit address of the relay 504V200 R, W 1...254
Data transfer rate (Modbus), kbps 504V201 R, W 9.6/4.8/2.4/
1.2/0.3
Modbus link parity 504V220 R, W 0 = even
1 = odd
2 = no parity
CRC order of Modbus RTU link 504V221 R, W 0 = low/high
1 = high/low
Table 4.1.17-14Settings
Description
SPA
parameter
(channel
503)
R, W Value range Default Explanation
Unit address 503V1 R, W 0...65532 1 Address of REF 610 in the
DNP 3.0 network
Master address 503V2 R, W 0...65532 2 Address of the master
station (destination
address for unsolicited
responses)
Primary data link
timeout
503V3 R, W 0 = no data link
timeout used
1...65535 ms
0 Used when REF 610
sends data using service 3
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
115
Primary data link
layer
retransmission
count
503V4 R, W 0...255 0 Number of
retransmissions on data
link layer
Application layer
confirmation
timeout
503V6 R, W 0...65535 ms 5000 Used when REF 610
sends messages with
confirmation request
Application layer
retransmission
count
503V7 R, W 0...255 0 Number of
retransmissions on the
application layer when
REF 610 sends messages
with confirmation request
Confirmation on
application layer
503V9 R, W 0 = enabled only
for event
messages
1 = enabled for
all messages
0 Used to enforce inclusion
of confirmation request in
all application messages
(DNP 3.0 standard
requires inclusion of
confirmation request in
event messages only)
Default variation
of binary input
objects
503V10 R, W 1...2 2
Default variation
of binary input
change event
objects
503V11 R, W 1...2 2
Default variation
of analogue input
objects
503V15 R, W 1...4 2
Default variation
of analogue input
change event
objects
503V16 R, W 1...4 2
Default variation
of counter objects
503V13 R, W 1...2 2
Default variation
of counter change
event objects
503V14 R, W 1, 2, 5, 6 2
Default variation
of frozen counter
objects
503V30 R, W 1, 2, 5, 6 2
Class 1 event
delay
503V18 R, W 0...255 s 0
Class 1 event
count
503V19 R, W 0...255 1
Class 2 event
delay
503V20 R, W 0...255 s 0
Class 2 event
count
503V21 R, W 0...255 1
Class 3 event
delay
503V22 R, W 0...255 s 0
Table 4.1.17-14Settings
Description
SPA
parameter
(channel
503)
R, W Value range Default Explanation
116
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
Measurements
1)
Changing the thermal level via serial communication will generate an event code.
2)
If the demand value is reset and the specified time has not elapsed, dashes will be shown on the LCD
and “999” when the parameter is read via the SPA bus.
3) If the thermal protection has been set out of operation, the parameter cannot be written to, and
dashes will be shown on the LCD and “999” when the thermal level is read via the SPA bus.
Class 3 event
count
503V23 R, W 0...255 1
Unsolicited
reporting mode
503V24 R, W 0 = UR disabled
1 = immediate
2 = empty UR
3 = empty UR
and enable UR
0 Refer to section
Unsolicited reporting start
up under section Protocol
parameters of REF 610.
Scaling factor 1 503V101 R, W 0...4294967296 1
Scaling factor 2 503V102 R, W 0...4294967296 1
Scaling factor 3 503V103 R, W 0...4294967296 1
Scaling factor 4 503V104 R, W 0...4294967296 1
Scaling factor 5 503V105 R, W 0...4294967296 1
Baud rate 503V211 R, W 4.8/9.6/19.2/38.4 9.6
Number of stop
bits
503V212 R, W 1...2 1
Parity 503V230 R, W 0 = no parity
1 = odd
2 = even
0
Silent interval 503V232 R, W 0...65535 ms 20
Time slot width 503V233 R, W 0...255 ms 10
Number of time
slots
503V234 R, W 0...255 8
Collision
detection enabled
503V235 R, W 0 = disabled
1 = enabled
0
DNP module
warning register
503V168 R Bit coded
0 = OK
DNP module
status register
503V169 R Bit coded
0 = OK
Table 4.1.17-15 Measured values
Description
Parameter
(channel 0)
R, W, P Value
Thermal level V60 R, W (P)
0...106%
1) 3)
One-minute demand value V61 R
0...50 x I
n
2)
Demand value during the specified time range V62 R
0...50 x I
n
2)
Maximum one-minute demand value during
the specified time range
V63 R
0...50 x I
n
2)
Table 4.1.17-14Settings
Description
SPA
parameter
(channel
503)
R, W Value range Default Explanation
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
117
4.1.17.1. Event codes
Special codes have been determined to represent certain events, such as start and
tripping of protection stages and different states of output signals.
The events are stored in the event buffer of the relay. The maximum capacity of the
buffer is 100 events. Under normal conditions the buffer is empty.
The contents of the buffer can be read using the L command, five events at a time.
Using the L command erases the previously read events from the buffer, with the
exception of events E50 and E51 which have to be reset using the C command.
Should a fault occur and reading fails, for example in data communication, the
events can be re-read using the B command. If needed, the B command can also be
repeated.
Events to be included in the event reporting are marked with the multiplier 1. The
event mask is formed by the sum of the weighting factors of all those events which
are to be included in event reporting.
Channel 0
Events always included in the event reporting:
Table 4.1.17.1-1 Event masks
Event mask Code Setting range Default setting
V155 E31...E34 0...15 1
1V155 1E1...1E12 0...4095 1365
1V156 1E13...1E24 0...4095 1365
1V157 1E25...1E42 0...262143 4180
2V155 2E1...2E16 0...65535 3
2V156 2E17...2E26 0...1023 0
3V155 3E1...3E12 0...4095 1023
3V156 3E13...3E22 0...1023 1008
Table 4.1.17.1-2 Event codes E1...E4 and E7
Channel Event Description
0 E1 IRF
0 E2 IRF disappeared
0 E3 Warning
0 E4 Warning disappeared
0 E7 The thermal level has been changed via serial
communication
Table 4.1.17.1-3 Event codes E50...E51
Channel Event Description
0 E50 Restart of relay
0 E51 Overflow of event buffer
118
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
Events possible to mask out:
Channel 1
Table 4.1.17.1-4 Event codes E31...E34
Channel Event Description
Weighting
factor
Default value
0 E31 Disturbance recorder triggered 1 1
0 E32 Disturbance recorder memory cleared 2 0
0 E33 HMI password opened 4 0
0 E34 HMI password closed 8 0
Default value of event mask V155 1
Table 4.1.17.1-5 Event codes E1...E12
Channel Event Description
Weighting
factor
Default value
1 E1 Start signal from stage I> activated 1 1
1 E2 Start signal from stage I> reset 2 0
1 E3 Trip signal from stage I> activated 4 1
1 E4 Trip signal from stage I> reset 8 0
1 E5 Start signal from stage I>> activated 16 1
1 E6 Start signal from stage I>> reset 32 0
1 E7 Trip signal from stage I>> activated 64 1
1 E8 Trip signal from stage I>> reset 128 0
1 E9 Start signal from stage I>>> activated 256 1
1 E10 Start signal from stage I>>> reset 512 0
1 E11 Trip signal from stage I>>> activated 1024 1
1 E12 Trip signal from stage I>>> reset 2048 0
Default value of event mask 1V155 1365
Table 4.1.17.1-6 Event codes E13...E24
Channel Event Description
Weighting
factor
Default value
1 E13 Start signal from stage I
0
> activated 1 1
1 E14 Start signal from stage I
0
> reset 2 0
1 E15 Trip signal from stage I
0
> activated 4 1
1 E16 Trip signal from stage I
0
> reset 8 0
1 E17 Start signal from stage I
0
>> activated 16 1
1 E18 Start signal from stage I
0
>> reset 32 0
1 E19 Trip signal from stage I
0
>> activated 64 1
1 E20 Trip signal from stage I
0
>> reset 128 0
1 E21 Start signal from stage ∆I> activated 256 1
1 E22 Start signal from stage ∆I> reset 512 0
1 E23 Trip signal from stage ∆I> activated 1024 1
1 E24 Trip signal from stage ∆I> reset 2048 0
Default value of event mask 1V156 1365
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
119
Channel 2
Table 4.1.17.1-7 Event codes E25...E42
Channel Event Description
Weighting
factor
Default value
1 E25 Start signal from stage θ> activated 1 0
1 E26 Start signal from stage θ> reset 2 0
1 E27 Alarm signal from stage θ> activated 4 1
1 E28 Alarm signal from stage θ> reset 8 0
1 E29 Trip signal from stage θ> activated 16 1
1 E30 Trip signal from stage θ> reset 32 0
1 E31 Trip signal from stage ARC (light and current)
activated
64 1
1 E32 Trip signal from stage ARC (light and current)
reset
128 0
1 E33 Trip signal from stage ARC (DI and current)
activated
256 0
1 E34 Trip signal from stage ARC (DI and current)
reset
512 0
1 E35 Light signal output activated 1024 0
1 E36 Light signal output reset 2048 0
1 E37 Trip lockout signal activated 4096 1
1 E38 Trip lockout signal reset 8192 0
1 E39 External trip signal activated 16384 0
1 E40 External trip signal reset 32768 0
1 E41 CBFP activated 65536 0
1 E42 CBFP reset 131072 0
Default value of event mask 1V157 4180
Table 4.1.17.1-8 Event codes E1...E16
Channel Event Description
Weighting
factor
Default value
2 E1 PO1 activated 1 1
2 E2 PO1 reset 2 1
2 E3 PO2 activated 4 0
2 E4 PO2 reset 8 0
2 E5 PO3 activated 16 0
2 E6 PO3 reset 32 0
2 E7 SO1 activated 64 0
2 E8 SO1 reset 128 0
2 E9 SO2 activated 256 0
2 E10 SO2 reset 512 0
2 E11 SO3 activated 1024 0
2 E12 SO3 reset 2048 0
2 E13 SO4 activated 4096 0
2 E14 SO4 reset 8192 0
2 E15 SO5 activated 16384 0
2 E16 SO5 reset 32768 0
Default value of event mask 2V155 3
120
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
Channel 3
Table 4.1.17.1-9 Event codes E17...E26
Channel Event Description
Weighting
factor
Default value
2 E17 DI1 activated 1 0
2 E18 DI1 deactivated 2 0
2 E19 DI2 activated 4 0
2 E20 DI2 deactivated 8 0
2 E21 DI3 activated 16 0
2 E22 DI3 deactivated 32 0
2 E23 DI4 activated 64 0
2 E24 DI4 deactivated 128 0
2 E25 DI5 activated 256 0
2 E26 DI5 deactivated 512 0
Default value of event mask 2V156 0
Table 4.1.17.1-10Event codes E1...E12
Channel Event Description
Weighting
factor
Default value
3 E1 Shot 1 initiated 1 1
3 E2 Shot 1 ended 2 1
3 E3 Shot 2 Initiated 4 1
3 E4 Shot 2 ended 8 1
3 E5 Shot 3 initiated 16 1
3 E6 Shot 3 ended 32 1
3 E7 CB position open 64 1
3 E8 CB position closed 128 1
3 E9 Definite trip alarm signal activated 256 1
3 E10 Definite trip alarm signal reset 512 1
3 E11 AR lockout signal activated 1024 0
3 E12 AR lockout signal reset 2048 0
Default value of event mask 3V155 1023
Table 4.1.17.1-11Event codes E13...E22
Channel Event Description
Weighting
factor
Default value
3 E13 Open CB command activated 1 0
3 E14 Open CB command reset 2 0
3 E15 Close CB command activated 4 0
3 E16 Close CB command reset 8 0
3 E17 CB reclosing failed signal activated 16 1
3 E18 CB reclosing failed signal reset 32 1
3 E19 CB reclosing inhibited 64 1
3 E20 CB reclosing inhibited reset 128 1
3 E21 AR cancelled 256 1
3 E22 AR cancelled reset 512 1
Default value of event mask 3V156 1008
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
121
4.1.18. Self-supervision (IRF) system
REF 610 is provided with an extensive self-supervision system which continuously
supervises the software and the electronics of the relay. It handles
run-time fault situations and informs the user about an existing fault via a LED on
the HMI and a text message on the LCD. There are two types of fault indications:
IRF indications and warnings.
Internal relay fault
When an internal relay fault is detected, which will prevent relay operation, the relay
will first try to eliminate it by restarting. Only after the fault has been found to be
permanent, the green indicator LED (ready) will start to blink and the
self-supervision output contact will be activated. All other output contacts will be
returned to the initial state and locked for the internal relay fault. Further, a fault
indication message will appear on the LCD, including a fault code.
IRF indications have the highest priority on the HMI. None of the other HMI
indications can override the IRF indication. As long as the green indicator LED
(ready) is blinking, the fault indication cannot be cleared. In case an internal fault
disappears, the green indicator LED (ready) will stop blinking and the relay will be
returned to the normal service state, but the fault indication message will remain on
the LCD until manually cleared.
The IRF code indicates the type of internal relay fault. When a fault appears, the
code is to be recorded and stated when ordering service. The fault codes are listed in
the following table:
Table 4.1.18-1 IRF codes
Fault code Type of fault
4 Error in output relay PO1
5 Error in output relay PO2
6 Error in output relay PO3
7 Error in output relay SO1
8 Error in output relay SO2
9 Error in the enable signal for output relay PO1, PO2, SO1
or SO2
10, 11, 12 Error in the feedback, enable signal or output relay PO1,
PO2, SO1 or SO2
13 Error in optional output relay SO3
14 Error in optional output relay SO4
15 Error in optional output relay SO5
16 Error in the enable signal for optional output relay SO3,
SO4 or SO5
17, 18, 19 Error in the feedback, enable signal or optional output
relay SO3, SO4 or SO5
20, 21 Auxiliary voltage dip
30 Faulty program memory
50, 59 Faulty work memory
51, 52, 53, 54, 56
Faulty parameter memory
1) 2)
55 Faulty parameter memory, calibration parameters
80 Optional I/O module missing
81 Optional I/O module unknown
122
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
1)
May be corrected by formatting to the factory setting.
2)
The user-defined values will be set to zero during the internal fault state.
For further information on internal relay faults, refer to the Operator’s Manual.
Warnings
In case of a warning, the relay will continue to operate except for those protection
functions possibly affected by the fault, and the green indicator LED (ready) will
remain lit as during normal operation. Further, a fault indication message, which
depending on the type of fault includes a fault code, will appear on the LCD. If more
than one type of fault occur at the same time, one single numeric code which
indicates all the faults will be displayed. The fault indication message cannot be
manually cleared but will disappear with the fault.
When a fault appears, the fault indication message is to be recorded and stated when
ordering service. The fault codes are listed in the following table:
1)
The external fault warning can be routed to SO2 with SGF1/8.
For further information on warnings, refer to the Operator’s Manual.
82 Optional I/O module configuration error
85 Power supply module faulty
86 Power supply module unknown
90 Hardware configuration error
95 Communication module unknown
104 Faulty configuration set (for IEC 60870-5-103)
131, 139, 195, 203, 222, 223 Internal reference voltage error
240 Faulty input, Light sensor 2
241 Faulty input, Light sensor 1
253 Error in the measuring unit
Table 4.1.18-2 Warning codes
Fault Weight value
Battery low 1
Trip-circuit supervision
1)
2
Power supply module temperature high 4
Communication module faulty or missing 8
DNP 3.0 configuration error 16
DNP 3.0 module faulty 32
Continuous light detected by Light
sensor 1 or 2
1)
64
Σ 127
Table 4.1.18-1 IRF codes
Fault code Type of fault
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
123
4.1.19. Relay parameterization
Local parameterization
The parameters of the relay can be set either locally via the HMI or externally via
serial communication with the Relay Setting Tool. When the parameters are set
locally, the setting parameters can be chosen via the hierarchical menu structure.
The desired language can be selected for parameter descriptions. Refer to the
Operator’s Manual for further information.
External parameterization
The Relay Setting Tool is used for parameterizing the relay units. Adjusting the
parameter values using the Relay Setting Tool is done off-line, after which the
parameters can be downloaded to the relay via a communication port.
4.2. Design description
4.2.1. Input/output connections
All external circuits are connected to the terminals on the rear panel of the relay.
Terminals X2.1-_ are dimensioned for one 0.5...6.0 mm
2
wire or two max 2.5 mm
2

wires and terminals X3.1-_ and X4.1-_ for one 0.2...2.5 mm
2
wire or two
0.2...1.0 mm
2
wires.
The energizing phase currents of REF 610 are connected to terminals X2.1/1-2,
X2.1/3-4 and X2.1/5-6 (see table 4.2.1-1). The relay can also be used in single or
two-phase applications by leaving one or two energizing inputs unoccupied.
However, at least terminals X2.1/1-2 should be connected.
The energizing earth-fault current of REF 610 is connected to terminals X2.1/7-8
(see table 4.2.1-1).
The input terminals of the optional I/O module are located on connection socket
X3.1 (see tables 4.2.1-4 and 4.2.1-5).
Note!
REF 610 is provided with connection socket X3.1 only if the optional I/O module
has been installed.
Terminals X4.1/21-24 and X3.1/1-6 (optional) are digital input terminals (see table
4.2.1-5). The digital inputs can be used to generate a blocking signal, to unlatch
output contacts or for remote control of relay settings, for instance. The requested
functions are selected separately for each input in switchgroups SGB1...5. The
digital inputs can also be used to trigger the disturbance recorder; this function is
selected with SPA parameter V243.
The auxiliary voltage of the relay is connected to terminals X4.1/1-2 (see table
4.2.1-2). At dc supply, the positive lead is connected to terminal X4.1/1. The
permitted auxiliary voltage range of the relay is marked on the front panel of the
relay under the handle of the plug-in unit.
124
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
Output contacts PO1, PO2 and PO3 are heavy-duty trip contacts capable of
controlling most circuit breakers (see table 4.2.1-4). The signals to be routed to
PO1...PO3 are selected with the switches of switchgroups SGR1...SGR3. On
delivery from the factory, the trip signals from all the protection stages are routed to
PO1, PO2 and PO3.
Output contacts SO1...SO5 can be used for signalling on start and tripping of the
relay (see table 4.2.1-4). Output contacts SO3...SO5 are optional and available only
if the optional I/O module has been installed. The signals to be routed to SO1...SO5
are selected with the switches of switchgroups SGR4...SGR8. On delivery from the
factory, the start and alarm signals from all the protection stages are routed to SO1
and SO2.
The IRF contact functions as an output contact for the self-supervision system of the
protection relay (see table 4.2.1-3). Under normal operating conditions the relay is
energized and the contact closed (X4.1/3-5). When a fault is detected by the
self-supervision system or the auxiliary voltage is disconnected, the output contact
will drop off and the contact close (X4.1/3-4).
Fig. 4.2.1.-1...Fig. 4.2.1.-3 present a rear view of REF 610, showing four connecting
sockets: one for measuring transformers, one for the optional I/O module, one for
power supply and one for optional serial communication.
Fig. 4.2.1.-1 Rear view of REF 610 with the fibre-optic communication module
for plastic and glass fibre with light sensor inputs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
1






2







3






4







5






6







7






8







9





1
0





1
1



1
2
X3.1
X4.1
X2.1
D
A
N
G
E
R

-

R
I
S
K

O
F

E
L
E
C
T
R
I
C

S
H
O
C
K
N
E
A
R

I
N
S
T
R
U
M
E
N
T

T
E
R
M
I
N
A
L
S
!
R
e
a
r
A
r
c
G
l
a
s
s
_
a
X5.1
TX
RX
X5.2
X5.3
X5.4
TX
RX
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
125
Fig. 4.2.1.-2 Rear view of REF 610 with the RS-485 communication module
D
A
N
G
E
R

-

R
I
S
K

O
F

E
L
E
C
T
R
I
C

S
H
O
C
K
N
E
A
R

I
N
S
T
R
U
M
E
N
T

T
E
R
M
I
N
A
L
S
!
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
1






2







3






4







5






6







7






8







9





1
0





1
1



1
2
X3.1
X4.1
X2.1
X5.5
6
5
4
3
2
1
R
e
a
r
R
S
_
R
E
_
6
1
_
a
126
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
Fig. 4.2.1.-3 Rear view of REF 610 with the DNP 3.0 communication module
for RS-485
1)
The value denotes the rated current for each input.
Table 4.2.1-1 Inputs for phase and earth-fault currents
1)
Terminal
Function
R
E
F
6
1
0
A
1
1
x
x
x
x
R
E
F
6
1
0
A
1
2
x
x
x
x
R
E
F
6
1
0
A
1
5
x
x
x
x
R
E
F
6
1
0
A
5
1
x
x
x
x
R
E
F
6
1
0
A
5
2
x
x
x
x
R
E
F
6
1
0
A
5
5
x
x
x
x
X2.1-1 I
L1
1 A I
L1
1 A I
L1
1 A I
L1
5 A I
L1
5 A I
L1
5 A
X2.1-2
X2.1-3 I
L2
1 A I
L2
1 A I
L2
1 A I
L2
5 A I
L2
5 A I
L2
5 A
X2.1-4
X2.1-5 I
L3
1 A I
L3
1 A I
L3
1 A I
L3
5 A I
L3
5 A I
L3
5 A
X2.1-6
X2.1-7 I
0
1 A I
0
0.2 A I
0
5 A I
0
1 A I
0
0.2 A I
0
5 A
X2.1-8
X2.1-9 - - - -
X2.1-10 - - - -
X2.1-11 - - - -
X2.1-12 - - - -
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
1






2







3






4







5






6







7






8







9





1
0





1
1



1
2
X3.1
X4.1
X2.1
D
A
N
G
E
R

-

R
I
S
K

O
F

E
L
E
C
T
R
I
C

S
H
O
C
K
N
E
A
R

I
N
S
T
R
U
M
E
N
T

T
E
R
M
I
N
A
L
S
!
R
e
a
r
D
N
P
_
a
X5.8
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
127

1)
Optional
Table 4.2.1-2 Auxiliary supply voltage
Terminal Function
X4.1-1 Input, +
X4.1-2 Input, -
Table 4.2.1-3 IRF contact
Terminal Function
X4.1-3 IRF, common
X4.1-4 Closed; IRF, or U
aux
disconnected
X4.1-5 Closed; no IRF, and U
aux
connected
Table 4.2.1-4 Output contacts
Terminal Function
X3.1-16
SO5, common
1)
X3.1-17
SO5, NC
1)
X3.1-18
SO5, NO
1)
X3.1-19
SO4, common
1)
X3.1-20
SO4, NC
1)
X3.1-21
SO4, NO
1)
X3.1-22
SO3, common
1)
X3.1-23
SO3, NC
1)
X3.1-24
SO3, NO
1)
X4.1-6 SO2, common
X4.1-7 SO2, NC
X4.1-8 SO2, NO
X4.1-9 SO1, common
X4.1-10 SO1, NC
X4.1-11 SO1, NO
X4.1-12 PO3 (trip lockout relay), NO
X4.1-13
X4.1-14 PO2, NO
X4.1-15
X4.1-16 PO1, NO
X4.1-17
X4.1-18 PO1 (TCS), NO
X4.1-19
X4.1-20 -
128
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610

1)
Optional
4.2.2. Light sensor input connections
If REF 610 is provided with the optional communication module with light sensor
inputs, the pre-manufactured lens-sensor fibres are connected to inputs X5.1 and
X5.2 (see table 4.2.2-1 and Fig. 4.2.1.-1). For further information on the arc
protection, refer to section Arc protection.
Note!
REF 610 is provided with connection sockets X5.1 and X5.2 only if the optional
communication module with light sensor inputs has been installed (refer to section
Ordering information).
4.2.3. Serial communication connections
The optical front connection of the relay is used to connect the relay to the SPA bus
via the front communication cable 1MRS050698. If a PC compatible to the IrDA
©

Standard specifications is used, wireless communication is possible as well. The
maximum wireless operating distance depends on the transceiver of the PC.
Rear communication of REF 610 is optional and the physical connection varies with
the communication option.
Table 4.2.1-5 Digital inputs
Terminal Function
X4.1-23 DI1
X4.1-24
X4.1-21 DI2
X4.1-22
X3.1-1
DI3
1)
X3.1-2
X3.1-3
DI4
1)
X3.1-4
X3.1-5
DI5
1)
X3.1-6
Table 4.2.2-1 Light sensor input connectors
Terminal Function
X5.1 Input Light sensor 1
X5.2 Input Light sensor 2
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
129
Plastic fibre-optic connection
If REF 610 is provided with the optional fibre-optic communication module for
plastic fibre, the fibre-optic cables are connected to terminals X5.3-RX (Receiver)
and X5.3-TX (Transmitter).
RS-485 connection
If REF 610 is provided with the optional RS-485 communication module, the cable
is connected to terminals X5.5/1-2 and X5.5/4-6. The connection socket is a 6-pin
header-type socket and the terminals are of screw compression type.
The RS-485 communication module follows the TIA/EIA-485 standard and is
intended to be used in a Daisy-chain bus wiring scheme with 2-wire, half-duplex,
multi-point communication. The maximum number of devices (nodes) connected to
the bus where REF 610 is being used is 32, and the maximum length of the bus is
1200 meters.
When connecting REF 610 to the bus, a quality twisted pair shielded cable is to be
used. The conductors of the pair are connected to A and B. If signal ground is being
used for balancing potential differences between devices/nodes, a quality dual
twisted pair shielded cable is to be used. In this case, one pair is connected to A and
B, and one of the conductors of the other pair to signal ground. When connecting
one device to another, A is connected to A and B to B.
The cable shield is to be connected directly to earth (shield GND) in one point/
device of the bus. Other devices connected to the bus should have the cable shield
connected to earth via a capacitor (shield GND via capacitor).
Note!
Signal ground can only be used for balancing potential differences between devices/
nodes if all devices connected to the bus have isolated RS-485 interfaces.
The RS-485 communication module is provided with jumpers for setting bus
termination and fail-safe biasing. The bus is to be terminated at both ends, which can
be done by using the internal termination resistor on the communication module.
The termination resistor is selected by setting jumper X5 to the ON position. If the
internal termination resistor of 120 Ω is used, the impedance of the cable should be
the same.
The bus is to be biased at one end to ensure fail-safe operation, which can be done
using the pull-up and pull-down resistors on the communication module. The
pull-up and pull-down resistors are selected by setting jumpers X3 and X4 to the ON
position.
The jumpers have been set to no termination (X5 in the OFF position) and no biasing
(X3 and X4 in the OFF position) as default.
Table 4.2.3-1 Plastic fibre-optic rear connector
Terminal Function
X5.3-TX Transmitter
X5.3-RX Receiver
130
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
Fig. 4.2.3.-1 Jumper location on the RS-485 communication module
Combined fibre-optic connection (plastic and glass)
If REF 610 is provided with the optional fibre-optic communication module for
plastic and glass fibre, the plastic fibre-optic cables are connected to terminals
X5.3-RX (Receiver) and X5.3-TX (Transmitter) and the glass fibre-optic cables to
terminals X5.4-RX (Receiver) and X5.4-TX (Transmitter).
The fibre-optic interface is selected with jumpers X6 and X2 located on the PCB of
the communication module (see Fig. 4.2.3.-2).
Table 4.2.3-2 RS-485 rear connector
Terminal Function
X5.5-6 Data A (+)
X5.5-5 Data B (-)
X5.5-4 Signal GND (for potential balancing)
X5.5-3 -
X5.5-2 Shield GND (via capacitor)
X5.5-1 Shield GND
Table 4.2.3-3 Transmitter selection
Transmitter Position of jumper X6
Plastic X5.3-TX
Glass X5.4-TX
X3
X4
X5
off
on
off
on
off
on
RS_JumpersREF610_a
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
131
Fig. 4.2.3.-2 Jumper location on the communication module for plastic and
glass fibre
RS-485 connection for the DNP 3.0 communication module
If REF 610 is provided with the optional DNP 3.0 communication module, the cable
is connected to terminals X5.8/1-2 and X5.8/4-8. The connection socket is a 8-pin
header-type socket and the terminals are of screw compression type.
The DNP communication module follows the DNP standard and is intended to be
used in a Daisy-chain bus wiring scheme with 2- or 4-wire, half-duplex, multi-point
communication. The maximum number of devices (nodes) connected to the bus
where REF 610 is being used is 32, and the maximum length of the bus is 1200
meters in optimum conditions and with slow communication speed.
Table 4.2.3-4 Receiver selection
Transmitter Position of jumper X2
Plastic X5.3-RX
Glass X5.4-RX
Table 4.2.3-5 Fibre-optic rear connectors (plastic and glass)
Terminal Function
X5.3-TX Transmitter for plastic fibre
X5.3-RX Receiver for plastic fibre
X5.4-TX Transmitter for glass fibre
X5.4-RX Receiver for plastic fibre
X6
X2
X5.3
X5.4
TX
TX
X6
X2
X5.3
X5.4
RX
RX
J
u
n
p
e
r
s
M
ix
R
E
F
6
1
0
_
a
X5.4-RX(glass)
X5.4-TX(glass)
Fibre-optic Interface
X5.3-TX(plastic)
X5.3-RX(plastic)
132
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
When connecting REF 610 to the bus, a quality twisted pair shielded cable is to be
used. The conductors of the pair are connected to A and B. If signal ground is being
used for balancing potential differences between devices/nodes, a quality dual
twisted pair shielded cable is to be used. In this case, one pair is connected to A and
B, and one of the conductors of the other pair to signal ground. When connecting
one device to another, A is connected to A and B to B.
When using a 4-wire bus, one pair is connected to +RX and -RX and the other to
+TX and -TX. If signal ground is being used, a quality cable with three or several
pairs is to be used and one of the conductors of a pair connected to signal ground.
The cable shield is to be connected directly to earth (shield GND) in one
point/device of the bus. Other devices connected to the bus should have the cable
shield connected to earth via a capacitor (shield GND via capacitor).
Note!
Signal ground can only be used for balancing potential differences between
devices/nodes if all devices connected to the bus have isolated DNP interfaces.
The DNP communication module is provided with jumpers for setting bus
termination and fail-safe biasing. The bus is to be terminated at both ends, which can
be done by using the internal termination resistor on the DNP communication
module. The termination resistor is selected by setting jumper X6 or/and X12 to the
ON position. If the internal termination resistor of 120 Ω is used, the impedance of
the cable should be the same.
The bus is to be biased at one end to ensure fail-safe operation, which can be done
using the pull-up and pull-down resistors on the communication module. The
pull-up and pull-down resistors are selected by setting jumpers X8, X7, X13 and
X11 to the ON position.
The jumpers have been set to no termination (X5 in the OFF position) and no biasing
(X8, X7, X13 and X11 in the OFF position) as default.
Table 4.2.3-6 RS-485 rear connector (DNP 3.0)
Terminal Function
X5.8-8 Data A (+ RX)
X5.8-7 Data B (- RX)
X5.8-6 Data A (+ TX)
X5.8-5 Data B (- TX)
X5.8-4 Signal GND (for potential balancing)
X5.8-3 -
X5.8-2 Shield GND (via capacitor)
X5.8-1 Shield GND
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
133

Fig. 4.2.3.-3 Jumper location on the DNP 3.0 communication module
4.2.4. Technical data
1)
For dimension drawings, refer to the Installation Manual (1MRS 752265-MUM).
Table 4.2.3-7 Jumper numbering
Terminal Function Signal
X8 Pull-up Data A (+ TX)
X6 Termination TX
X7 Pull-down Data B (- TX)
X13 Pull-up Data A (+ RX)
X12 Termination RX
X11 Pull-down Data B (- RX)
X14 4-wire/2-wire
X12
X13
X11
X14
X6
X7
X8
D
N
P
_
J
u
m
p
e
r
s
R
E
F
6
1
0
_
a
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
4-Wire
2-Wire
Table 4.2.4-1 Dimensions
1)
Width, frame 177 mm, case 164 mm
Height, frame 177 mm (4U), case 160 mm
Depth, case 149.3 mm
Weight of the relay ~3.5 kg
Weight of the spare unit ~1.8 kg
Table 4.2.4-2 Power supply
U
aux
rated
• REF610AxxHxxx Ur=100/110/120/220/240 V ac
Ur=110/125/220/250 V dc
• REF610AxxLxxx Ur=24/48/60 V dc
134
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
U
aux
variation (temporary)
• REF610AxxHxxx 85...110% of U
r
(ac)
80...120% of U
r
(dc)
• REF610AxxLxxx 80...120% of U
r
(dc)
Burden of auxiliary voltage supply under quiescent
(P
q
)/operating condition
<9 W/13 W
Ripple in the dc auxiliary voltage Max 12% of the dc value
Interruption time in the auxiliary dc voltage without
resetting the relay
<50 ms at U
aux
rated
Time to trip from switching on the auxiliary voltage <350 ms
Internal over temperature limit +100°C
Fuse type T2A/250 V
Table 4.2.4-3 Energizing inputs
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz ± 5 Hz
Rated current, I
n
0.2 A 1 A 5 A
Thermal withstand capability
• continuously • 1.5 A 4 A 20 A
• for 1 s • 20 A 100 A 500 A
• for 10 s • 5 A 25 A 100 A
Dynamic current withstand
• half-wave value • 50 A 250 A 1250 A
Input impedance <750 mΩ <100 mΩ <20 mΩ
Table 4.2.4-4 Measuring range
Measured currents on phases I
L1
, I
L2
and I
L3
as multiples of the rated
currents of the energizing inputs
0...50 x I
n

Earth-fault current as a multiple of the rated current of the energizing
input
0...8 x I
n

Table 4.2.4-5 Digital inputs
Operating range ±20% of the rated voltage
Rated voltage DI1...DI2 DI3...DI5 (optional)
• REF610AxxHxxx 110/125/220/250 V dc
• REF610AxxLxxx 24/48/60/110/125/220/250 V dc
• REF610AxxxxLx 24/48/60/110/125/220/250 V dc
• REF610AxxxxHx 110/125/220/250 V dc
Current drain 2...18 mA
Power consumption/input ≤ 0.9 W
Table 4.2.4-6 Signal output SO1 and optional SO4 and SO5
Rated voltage 250 V ac/dc
Continuous carry 5 A
Make and carry for 3.0 s 15 A
Make and carry for 0.5 s 30 A
Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time
constant L/R <40 ms, at 48/110/220 V dc
1 A/0.25 A/0.15 A
(5 A/3 A/1 A for series connection of
SO4 and SO5)
Minimum contact load 100 mA at 24 V ac/dc
Table 4.2.4-2 Power supply
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
135
Table 4.2.4-7 Signal output SO2, optional SO3, and IRF output
Rated voltage 250 V ac/dc
Continuous carry 5 A
Make and carry for 3.0 s 10 A
Make and carry for 0.5 s 15 A
Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time
constant L/R <40 ms, at 48/110/220 V dc
1 A/0.25 A/0.15 A
Minimum contact load 100 mA at 24 V ac/dc
Table 4.2.4-8 Power outputs (PO1, PO2, PO3)
Rated voltage 250 V ac/dc
Continuous carry 5 A
Make and carry for 3.0 s 15 A
Make and carry for 0.5 s 30 A
Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time
constant L/R <40 ms, at 48/110/220 V dc (PO1 with
both contacts connected in series)
5 A/3 A/1 A
Minimum contact load 100 mA at 24 V ac/dc
TCS
• Control voltage range 20...265 V ac/dc
• Current drain through the supervision circuit ~1.5 mA
• Minimum voltage over a contact 20 V ac/dc (15...20 V)
Table 4.2.4-9 Lens sensor and optic fibre for arc protection
Normal service temperature range -40...+100°C
Maximum service temperature range, max 1 h +140°C
Minimum permissible bending radius of the
connection fibre
100 mm
Table 4.2.4-10 Enclosure class of the flush-mounted relay
Front side IP 54
Rear side, top of the relay IP 40
Rear side, connection terminals IP 20
Table 4.2.4-11 Environmental tests and conditions
Recommended service temperature range
(continuous)
-10...+55°C
Limit temperature range (short-term) -40...+70°C
Transport and storage temperature range -40...+85°C according to
IEC 60068-2-48
Dry heat test According to IEC 60068-2-2
Dry cold test According to IEC 60068-2-1
Damp heat test, cyclic According to IEC 60068-2-30
136
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610

Table 4.2.4-12 Electromagnetic compatibility tests
EMC immunity test level meets the requirements listed below
1 MHz burst disturbance test, class III According to IEC 60255-22-1
• Common mode 2.5 kV
• Differential mode 1.0 kV
Electrostatic discharge test, class IV According to IEC 61000-4-2,
IEC 60255-22-2 and
ANSI C37.90.3-2001
• For contact discharge 8 kV
• For air discharge 15 kV
Radio frequency interference tests
• Conducted, common mode According to IEC 61000-4-6 and
IEC 60255-22-6 (2000)
10 V (rms), f=150 kHz...80 MHz
• Radiated, amplitude-modulated According to IEC 61000-4-3 and
IEC 60255-22-3 (2000)
10 V/m (rms), f=80...1000 MHz
• Radiated, pulse-modulated According to the ENV 50204 and
IEC 60255-22-3 (2000)
10 V/m, f=900 MHz
Fast transient disturbance tests According to IEC 60255-22-4 and
IEC 61000-4-4
• Power outputs, energizing inputs, power supply 4 kV
• I/O ports 2 kV
Surge immunity test According to IEC 61000-4-5
• Power outputs, energizing inputs, power supply 4 kV, line-to-earth
2 kV, line-to-line
• I/O ports 2 kV, line-to-earth
1 kV, line-to-line
Power frequency (50 Hz) magnetic field
IEC 61000-4-8
300 A/m continuous
Voltage dips and short interruptions According to IEC 61000-4-11
30%/10 ms
60%/100 ms
60%/1000 ms
>95%/5000 ms
Electromagnetic emission tests According to the EN 55011
• Conducted, RF-emission (Mains terminal) EN 55011, class A, IEC 60255-25
• Radiated RF-emission EN 55011, class A, IEC 60255-25
CE approval Complies with the EMC directive 89/
336/EEC and the LV directive 73/23/
EEC
Table 4.2.4-13 Standard tests
Insulation tests
Dielectric tests According to IEC 60255-5
• Test voltage 2 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min
Impulse voltage test According to IEC 60255-5
• Test voltage 5 kV, unipolar impulses, waveform
1.2/50 µs, source energy 0.5 J
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
137
Auxiliary voltage
REF 610 requires a secured auxiliary voltage supply to operate. The internal power
supply of the relay forms the voltages required by the relay electronics. The power
supply is a galvanically isolated (flyback-type) DC/DC converter. When the
auxiliary voltage is connected, the green indicator LED (ready) on the front panel
will be on. For detailed information on power supply, refer to table 4.2.4-2.
The primary side of the power supply is protected with a fuse located on the PCB of
the relay.
Insulation resistance measurements According to IEC 60255-5
• Isolation resistance >100 MΩ, 500 V dc
Mechanical tests
Vibration tests (sinusoidal) According to IEC 60255-21-1, class I
Shock and bump test According to IEC 60255-21-2, class I
Table 4.2.4-14 Data communication
Rear interface, connector X5.3, X5.4, X5.5 or X5.8
• Fibre-optic or RS-485 connection
• SPA bus, IEC 60870-5-103, DNP 3.0 or Modbus protocol
• 9.6 or 4.8 kbps (additionally 2.4, 1.2 or 0.3 kbps for Modbus)
Front interface
• Optical connection (infrared): wirelessly or via the front communication cable
(1MRS050698)
• SPA bus protocol
• 9.6 or 4.8 kbps (9.6 kbps with front communication cable)
Table 4.2.4-13 Standard tests
138
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
5. Application examples
5.1. Auto-reclose function
5.1.1. Fast tripping and initiation of shot 1 using two protection stages
In several applications, such as fuse-saving applications involving down-stream
fuses, tripping and initiation of shot 1 should be fast (instantaneous or short-time
delayed) and of shot 2 and 3, and definite tripping time delayed.
In this example, two overcurrent stages are used, I> and I>>. Stage I>> is given an
instantaneous characteristic and stage I> a time delay. By setting SG2/2 to 1 and
SG2/7 to 1, stage I>> will be blocked by the AR function during shot 2 and 3.
Fig. 5.1.1.-1 Fast initiation of shot 1 using one fast and one delayed stage
In case of a short-circuit in the network, stage I>> will trip the circuit breaker and
initiate shot 1. At the time of shot initiation, the blocking of stage I>> will be
activated. If the network fault is not cleared, stage I> will trip the circuit breaker and
continue the auto-reclose sequence to shot 2, shot 3 and finally definite tripping.
As the set start value of stage I> in this example is higher than that of stage I>>, as
sometimes is the case, it is possible that the current will not exceed the set start value
of stage I> while the blocking of stage I>> is active. This will lead to a pumping
effect when the AR function is reset (the blocking of stage I>> included), i.e. the AR
sequence will start over and over again.
To avoid such a pumping effect, a cutout time is used. The cutout time, like the
reclaim time, will start when the set dead time elapses and the AR function issues a
reclosing command to the circuit breaker. By setting the cutout time to be shorter
than the reclaim time (e.g. half of the reclaim time), the blocking of stage I>> (in this
case) will be reset before the AR function. Stage I>> will now be able to continue
the AR sequence and the pumping effect will thus be avoided.
A
R
e
x
1
R
E
F
6
1
0
_
a
I>>
I>
SG2/2=1
SG2/7=1
0→1
t>> t> t> t>
Trip
Trip
Block I>>
Close CB
CB closed
CB open
Shot 1 Shot 2 Shot 3 Definite Trip
I>> Trip I> Trip
Block I>> at
Shot 1, 2 and 3
Block I>>
I> Trip
Block I>>
I> Trip
Block I>>
Open CB
Open CB
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
139
5.1.2. Fast tripping and initiation of shot 1 using start signals
An alternative way to achieve fast tripping and shot initiation (typical for certain
countries, such as Finland), is to use start signals from protection stages for shot
initiation. The AR function of REF 610 can be initiated by the start signals from
stages I> and I
0
>.
The start time of stages I> and I
0
> is very short but can be extended with the settings
AR I> Start Delay and AR I0> Start Delay of the AR function. When
the set start delay elapses, the shot will be initiated and the AR function will trip the
circuit breaker by issuing the Open CB Command.
Fig. 5.1.2.-1 Fast initiation of shot 1 using start signals
Shot initiation by a start signal applies only to shot 1, and to definite tripping, i.e.
when no more shots are allowed but the network fault has not been cleared. In this
case, the AR function will trip the circuit breaker on expiration of AR I> Start
Delay and AR I0> Start Delay.
Note!
The signal Open CB Command must be routed to the output contact used for
tripping the circuit breaker.
Note!
At the factory default delay of 300 s for AR I> Start Delay and AR I0>
Start Delay, the start signals will, in practise, not be used for shot initiation.
However, if stages I> or I
0
> have been given an IDMT characteristic, the factory
default delay of 300 s will function as a trip time limiter. With small currents, the
operate time at IDMT characteristic may be relatively long. However, since the start
signals are always routed to the AR function, the circuit breaker will be tripped and
a shot initiated (provided that the signal Open CB Command has been routed to
the trip output contact) on expiration of the factory default delay.
A
R
e
x
2
R
E
F
6
1
0
_
a
I>
0→1
t> t>
t
Trip
Start
Close CB
CB closed

CB open
Shot 1 Shot 2 Shot 3 Definite Trip
I> Start I> Trip I> Trip
Open CB
I> start delay
Open CB
Open CB Command

Close CB Command
Close CB
Command
Open CB
Command
Close CB
Command
Close CB
Command
I> start delay I> start delay
Open CB
Command
I> Start
Shots 1, 2 and 3
initiation
Shot 1 initiation
140
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
Note!
When using AR I> Start Delay and AR Io> Start Delay for shot
initiation and the signal Open CB Command has been routed to the trip output
contact, stages I> and I
0
> should not be used for blocking of shot 1.
5.1.3. Selecting adaptive sequence length
The auto-reclose sequence can be set to adapt to the fault current, either through
blocking of shot initiation or inhibition of the AR function.
In the examples below, three overcurrent stages (I>, I>> and I>>>) are used and the
number of shots of the AR sequence vary depending on which stages trips.
Example 1
Start by checking that the switches have been properly set:
If one or several phase currents
• exceed the set start value of stage I> but not of stages I>> and I>>>, the AR
sequence will include shot 1, 2 and 3.
• exceed the set start value of stages I> and I>> but not of stage I>>>, the AR
sequence will include shot 2 and 3.
• exceed the set start value of stages I>, I>> and I>>>, no shots will be performed
(AR function inhibited).
Note!
Stage I>>> should have the shortest and stage I> the longest operate time.
Example 2
Start by checking that the switches have been properly set:
If one or several phase currents
• exceed the set start value of stage I> but not of stages I>> and I>>>, the AR
sequence will include shot 1, 2 and 3
• exceed the set start value of stages I> and I>> but not of stage I>>>, the AR
sequence includes only shot 1
• exceed the set start value of stages I>, I>> and I>>>, no shots will be performed
(AR function inhibited).
Note!
Stage I>>> should have the shortest and stage I> the longest operate time.
Settings Function
SG1/1=1 Blocking of initiation of shot 1 by the trip signal from stage I>>
SG3/1=1 Inhibition of the AR function by the trip signal from stage I>>>
Number of shots = 3
Settings Function
SG1/5=1 Blocking of initiation of shot 2 and 3 by the trip signal from stage I>>
SG3/1=1 Inhibition of the AR function by the trip signal from stage I>>>
Number of shots = 3
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
141
5.2. Arc protection
5.2.1. Arc protection with one REF 610 relay
In installations with limited possibilities to realize signalling between relays
protecting incoming and outgoing feeders, or if only the relay for the incoming
feeder is to be exchanged, an arc protection with a lower protective level can be
achieved with one protection relay.
An arc protection with one REF 610 only (see Fig. 5.2.1.-1) is realized by installing
two arc lens sensors, connected to the relay protecting the incoming feeder, to detect
an arc on the busbar. On arc detection, the arc protection stage will trip the circuit
breaker of the incoming feeder. The maximum recommended installation distance
between the two lens sensors in the busbar area is 6 meters and the maximum
distance from a lens sensor to the end of the busbar 3 meters.
Fig. 5.2.1.-1 Arc protection with one REF 610
A
r
c
E
x
1
R
E
F
6
1
0
_
a
Q3 Q4
PO3
PO1
Q2
3l
Q1
M1
Q5 Q6
142
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
5.2.2. Arc protection with several REF 610 relays
When using several REF 610 relays (see Fig. 5.2.2.-1), a REF 610 protecting an
outgoing feeder will trip the circuit breaker of the outgoing feeder when detecting
an arc at the cable terminations. If the REF 610 protecting the outgoing feeder
detects an arc on the busbar (via the other lens sensor), however, it will generate a
signal to the REF 610 protecting the incoming feeder. On detection of the signal, the
REF 610 protecting the incoming feeder will trip the circuit breaker of the incoming
feeder and generate an external trip signal to all REF 610 relays protecting outgoing
feeders, which in turn will result in tripping of all circuit breakers of outgoing
feeders.
For maximum safety, the REF 610 relays can be configured to trip all circuit
breakers, regardless of where the arc is detected.
Fig. 5.2.2.-1 Arc protection with several REF 610 relays
A
r
c
E
x
2
R
E
F
6
1
0
_
a
PO3
PO1
Q2
3l
Q1
SO1
M1
DI1
Q4
DI1 DI1
Q6 Q5
3I+Io
DI1
3I+Io 3I+Io
Q3
3I+Io
DI1
SO1 SO1 SO1 SO1
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
143
5.2.3. Arc protection with several REF 610 relays and one REA 101
When realizing an arc protection with both REF 610 relays and an REA 101 (see Fig.
5.2.3.-1), the cable terminations of outgoing feeders are protected by REF 610 relays
using one lens sensor for each relay. The busbar and the incoming feeder is protected
by the sensor loop of the REA 101.
On arc detection at the cable terminations, REF 610 will trip the circuit breaker of
the outgoing feeder. However, on detection of an arc on the busbar, REA 101 will
trip the circuit breaker of the incoming feeder and generate an external trip signal to
all REF 610 relays protecting outgoing feeders, which in turn will result in tripping
of all circuit breakers of outgoing feeders.
Fig. 5.2.3.-1 Arc protection with REF 610 and REA 101
A
r
c
E
x
3
R
E
F
6
1
0
_
a
HSO 2
HSO 1
Q2
3l
Q1
Q4
DI1
S2
DI1
Q6 Q5
3I+Io
DI1
S3
3I+Io 3I+Io
TRIP 3
M1
S4
Q3
3I+Io
S1
DI1
144
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
6. Ordering information
When ordering REF 610 protection relays and/or accessories, please specify the
following:
• Order number
• Quantity
The order number identifies the protection relay type and hardware as described in
the figures below and is labelled on the marking strip under the lower handle of the
relay.
Use the ordering key in Fig. 6.-1 to generate the order number when ordering
complete protection relays.
Fig. 6.-1 Ordering key for complete relays
Use the ordering key in Fig. 6.-2 to generate the order number when ordering spare
units.
Fig. 6.-2 Ordering key for spare units
Communication module: P = plastic fibre
M= plastic fibre with input for arc protection
G= plastic and glass fibre
K = plastic and glass fibre with input for arc protection
R= RS-485
T = RS-485 with input for arc protection
D= RS-485 including DNP 3.0 protocol
E = RS-485 including DNP 3.0 protocol and
input for arc protection
N= none
I/O extension module: H= 3xSO and 3xDI (110/125/220/250 V dc)
L = 3xSO and 3xDI (24/48/60/110/125/220/250 V dc)
N= none
Power supply: H= 100-240 V ac/110-250 V dc, 2xDI
(110/125/220/250 V dc), 3xPO, 2xSO
L = 24-60 V dc, 2xDI (24/48/60/110/125/220/250 V dc),
3xPO, 2xSO
Earth-fault current input: 5 = 5A, 1=1A, 2=0.2A
Phase-current inputs: 5 = 5A, 1=1A
REF610A55HCNP
O
r
d
I
n
f
o
1
R
E
F
6
1
0
_
a
REF610A55HSNS
O
r
d
I
n
f
o
2
R
E
F
6
1
0
_
a
I/O extension module: H= 3xSO and 3xDI (110/125/220/250 V dc)
L = 3xSO and 3xDI (24/48/60/110/125/220/250 V dc)
N= none
Power supply: H= 100-240 V ac/110-250 V dc, 2xDI
(110/125/220/250 V dc), 3xPO, 2xSO
L = 24-60 V dc, 2xDI (24/48/60/110/125/220/250 V dc),
3xPO, 2xSO
Earth-fault current input: 5 = 5A, 1=1A, 2=0.2A
Phase-current inputs: 5 = 5A, 1=1A
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
145
The following accessories are available:
Item Order number
Semi-flush mounting kit 1MRS050696
Inclined (/ 25
o
) semi-flush mounting kit
1MRS050831
Wall mounting kit 1MRS050697
19” Rack mounting kit, side-by-side 1MRS050695
19" Rack mounting kit, single relay 1MRS050694
19" Rack mounting kit for single relay and RTXP18 1MRS050783
19" equipment frame mounting (Combiflex), plain bracket 1MRS061208
19" equipment frame mounting (Combiflex), bracket for RTXP18 1MRS061207
Pre-manufactured lens-sensor and optic fibre for arc protection
• 1.5 m ±3% 1MRS120534-1.5
• 3 m ±3% 1MRS120534-3.0
• 5 m ±3% 1MRS120534-5.0
Front communication cable 1MRS050698
146
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
7. References
Other available manuals:
• Operator’s Manual, 1MRS 755311
• Installation Manual, 1MRS 752265-MUM
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
147
8. Abbreviations
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AR Auto-reclose
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
CB Circuit breaker
CBFP Circuit-breaker failure protection
CD Change detect
CPU Central Processing Unit
CRC Cyclical Redundancy Check
CT Current transformer
DI Digital input
EEPROM Electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EPA Enhanced Performance Architecture
ER Event record
FR Fault record
GI General interrogation
HMI Human-Machine Interface
HR Holding register
IDMT Inverse definite minimum time
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEC_103 Standard IEC 60870-5-103
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.
IR Input registers
IRF Internal relay fault
ISO International Organization for Standardization
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED Light-emitting diode
LRC Longitudinal Redundancy Check
LSB Least significant bit
MP Minute-pulse
MSB Most significant bit
MV Medium Voltage
NC Normally closed
NO Normally open
OSI Open System Interconnection
PC Personal Computer
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PLC Programmable Logical Controller
PO1, PO2, PO3 Power outputs
RMS Root Mean Square
RTU Remote Terminal Unit
148
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
SGB Switchgroups for digital inputs
SGF Switchgroups for functions
SGL Switchgroups for programmable LEDs
SGR Switchgroups for output contacts
SO1...SO5 Signal outputs
SP Second-pulse
TCS Trip-circuit supervision
UDR User-defined register
UR Unsolicited reporting
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
149
9. Check lists
Table 9.-1 Setting group 1
Variable
Group/
Channel 1
(R, W, P)
Setting range
Default
setting
Customer’s
setting
Start value of stage I> 1S1 0.30...5.0 x I
n
0.30 x I
n
Operate time of stage I> 1S2 0.05...300 s 0.05 s
Time/current characteristic
for stage I>
1S3 0...8 0
Time multiplier k 1S4 0.05...1.00 0.05
Time multiplier n 1S5 1.0...15.0 1.0
Resetting time of stage I> 1S6 0.05...2.50 s 0.05 s
Start value of stage I>> 1S7 0.50...35.0 x I
n
0.50 x I
n
Operate time of stage I>> 1S8 0.04...300 s 0.04 s
Start value of stage I>>> 1S9 0.50...35.0 x I
n
0.50 x I
n
Operate time of stage I>>> 1S10 0.04...30.0 s 0.04 s
Start value of stage I
0
> 1S11 1.0...100% I
n
1.0% I
n
Operate time of stage I
0
> 1S12 0.05...300 s 0.05 s
Time/current characteristic
for stage I
0
>
1S13 0...8 0
Time multiplier k
0
1S14 0.05...1.00 s 0.05 s
Time multiplier n
0
1S15 1.0…15.0 1.0
Resetting time of stage I
0
> 1S16 0.05...2.50 0.05
Start value of stage I
0
>> 1S17 5.0...400% I
n
5.0% I
n
Operate time of stage I
0
>> 1S18 0.05...300 s 0.05 s
Start value of stage ∆I> 1S19 10...100% 100%
Operate time of stage ∆I> 1S20 1...300 s 60 s
Full load current 1S21 0.30...1.50 x I
n
0.30 x I
n
Time constant of stage θ> 1S22 1...200 min 1 min
Alarm level of stage θ> 1S23 50...100% θ
t
> 95% θ
t
>
Operate time of CBFP 1S24 0.10...60.0 s 0.10 s
Number of AR shots 1S25 0 = AR is not in use
1 = shot 1
2 = shot 1 and 2
3 = shot 1, 2 and 3
0
Current limit ArcI> of stage
ARC
1S26 0.50...35.0 x I
n
2.50 x I
n
Current limit ArcI
0
> of
stage ARC
2)
1S27 5.0...400% I
n
20% I
n
Checksum, SGF 1 1S61 0...255 0
Checksum, SGF 2 1S62 0...127 0
Checksum, SGF 3 1S63 0...127 120
Checksum, SGF 4 1S64 0...63 0
Checksum, SGF 5 1S65 0...255 0
Checksum, SGB 1 1S71 0...1048575 0
Checksum, SGB 2 1S72 0...1048575 0
Checksum, SGB 3 1S73 0...1048575 0
Checksum, SGB 4 1S74 0...1048575 0
150
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
Checksum, SGB 5 1S75 0...1048575 0
Checksum, SGR 1 1S81 0...8388607 2108074
Checksum, SGR 2 1S82 0...8388607 2108074
Checksum, SGR 3 1S83 0...8388607 2108074
Checksum, SGR 4 1S84 0...8388607 5461
Checksum, SGR 5 1S85 0...8388607 5461
Checksum, SGR 6 1S86 0...8388607 0
Checksum, SGR 7 1S87 0...8388607 0
Checksum, SGR 8 1S88 0...8388607 0
Checksum, SGL 1 1S91 0...2097151 0
Checksum, SGL 2 1S92 0...2097151 0
Checksum, SGL 3 1S93 0...2097151 0
Checksum, SGL 4 1S94 0...2097151 0
Checksum, SGL 5 1S95 0...2097151 0
Checksum, SGL 6 1S96 0...2097151 0
Checksum, SGL 7 1S97 0...2097151 0
Checksum, SGL 8 1S98 0...2097151 0
Table 9.-2 Setting group 2
Variable
Group/
Channel 2
(R, W, P)
Setting range
Default
setting
Customer’s
setting
Start value of stage I> 2S1 0.30...5.0 x I
n
0.30 x I
n
Operate time of stage I> 2S2 0.05...300 s 0.05 s
Time/current characteristic
for stage I>
2S3 0...8 0
Time multiplier k 2S4 0.05...1.00 0.05
Time multiplier n 2S5 1.0...15.0 1.0
Resetting time of stage I> 2S6 0.05...2.50 s 0.05 s
Start value of stage I>> 2S7 0.50...35.0 x I
n
0.50 x I
n
Operate time of stage I>> 2S8 0.04...300 s 0.04 s
Start value of stage I>>> 2S9 0.50...35.0 x I
n
0.50 x I
n
Operate time of stage I>>> 2S10 0.04...30.0 s 0.04 s
Start value of stage I
0
> 2S11 1.0...100% I
n
1.0% I
n
Operate time of stage I
0
> 2S12 0.05...300 s 0.05 s
Time/current characteristic
for stage I
0
>
2S13 0...8 0
Time multiplier k
0
2S14 0.05...1.00 s 0.05 s
Time multiplier n
0
2S15 1.0…15.0 1.0
Resetting time of stage I
0
> 2S16 0.05...2.50 0.05
Start value of stage I
0
>> 2S17 5.0...400% I
n
5.0% I
n
Operate time of stage I
0
>> 2S18 0.05...300 s 0.05 s
Start value of stage ∆I> 2S19 10...100% 100%
Operate time of stage ∆I> 2S20 1...300 s 60 s
Full load current 2S21 0.30...1.50 x I
n
0.30 x I
n
Table 9.-1 Setting group 1
Variable
Group/
Channel 1
(R, W, P)
Setting range
Default
setting
Customer’s
setting
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
151
Time constant of stage θ> 2S22 1...200 min 1 min
Alarm level of stage θ> 2S23 50...100% θ
t
> 95% θ
t
>
Operate time of CBFP 2S24 0.10...60.0 s 0.10 s
Number of AR shots 2S25 0 = AR is not in use
1 = shot 1
2 = shot 1 and 2
3 = shot 1, 2 and 3
0
Current limit ArcI> of stage
ARC
2S26 0.50...35.0 x I
n
2.50 x I
n
Current limit ArcI
0
> of
stage ARC
2)
2S27 5.0...400% I
n
20% I
n
Checksum, SGF 1 2S61 0...255 0
Checksum, SGF 2 2S62 0...127 0
Checksum, SGF 3 2S63 0...127 120
Checksum, SGF 4 2S64 0...63 0
Checksum, SGF 5 2S65 0...255 0
Checksum, SGB 1 2S71 0...1048575 0
Checksum, SGB 2 2S72 0...1048575 0
Checksum, SGB 3 2S73 0...1048575 0
Checksum, SGB 4 2S74 0...1048575 0
Checksum, SGB 5 2S75 0...1048575 0
Checksum, SGR 1 2S81 0...8388607 10922
Checksum, SGR 2 2S82 0...8388607 10922
Checksum, SGR 3 2S83 0...8388607 10922
Checksum, SGR 4 2S84 0...8388607 5461
Checksum, SGR 5 2S85 0...8388607 5461
Checksum, SGR 6 2S86 0...8388607 0
Checksum, SGR 7 2S87 0...8388607 0
Checksum, SGR 8 2S88 0...8388607 0
Checksum, SGL 1 2S91 0...2097151 0
Checksum, SGL 2 2S92 0...2097151 0
Checksum, SGL 3 2S93 0...2097151 0
Checksum, SGL 4 2S94 0...2097151 0
Checksum, SGL 5 2S95 0...2097151 0
Checksum, SGL 6 2S96 0...2097151 0
Checksum, SGL 7 2S97 0...2097151 0
Checksum, SGL 8 2S98 0...2097151 0
Table 9.-3 Control parameters
Description
Parameter
(channel 0)
Setting range
Default
setting
Customer’s
setting
Rated frequency V104 50 or 60 Hz 50 Hz
Time setting range for
demand values in minutes
V105 0...999 min 10 min
Non-volatile memory
settings
V106 0...31 31
Table 9.-2 Setting group 2
Variable
Group/
Channel 2
(R, W, P)
Setting range
Default
setting
Customer’s
setting
152
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
Time setting for disabling
new trip indications on the
LCD
V108 0...999 min 60 min
Operation indications on
the LCD
V112 0 = IEC
1 = ANSI
0
Trip-circuit supervision V113 0 = not in use
1 = in use
0
Remote control of settings V150 0 = setting group 1
1 = setting group 2
0
Unit address of the relay V200 1...254 1
Data transfer rate (SPA),
kbps
V201 9.6/4.8 9.6
Rear communication
protocol
V203 0 = SPA
1 = IEC_103
2 = Modbus RTU
3 = Modbus ASCII
0
Connection type V204 0 = loop
1 = star
0
Line-idle state V205 0 = light off
1 = light on
0
Optional communication
module
V206 0 = not in use
1 = in use
0
Table 9.-4 Parameters for the disturbance recorder
Description
Parameter
(channel 0)
Setting range
Default
setting
Customer’s
setting
Sampling rate M15 800/960 Hz
400/480 Hz
50/60 Hz
800 Hz
Station identification/unit
number
M18 0...9999 0
Name of the feeder M20 Max 16 characters - ABB -
Analogue channel
conversion factor and unit
for I
L1
, I
L2
and I
L3
M80, M81 Factor 0...65535, unit
(A, kA), e.g. 10,kA
00001,In
Analogue channel
conversion factor and unit
for the earth-fault current
M83 Factor 0...65535, unit
(A, kA), e.g. 10,kA
00001,In
Internal trigger signals'
checksum
V236 0...16383 682
Internal trigger signal's
edge
V237 0...16383 0
Checksum of internal signal
storing mask
V238 0...16383 751
Post-triggering recording
length
V240 0...100% 50%
Table 9.-3 Control parameters
Description
Parameter
(channel 0)
Setting range
Default
setting
Customer’s
setting
1MRS 755310
Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual
REF 610
153
External trigger signal's
checksum
V241 0...31 0
External trigger signal's
edge
V242 0...31 0
Checksum of external
signal storing mask
V243 0...31 0
Table 9.-5 Auto-reclose parameters
Description
Parameter
(channel 0)
Value
Default
setting
Customer’s
setting
CB Closing time V121 0.1...10 s 0.2 s
Start delay of stage I> V122 0...300 s 300 s
Start delay of stage I
0
> V123 0...300 s 300 s
Reclaim time V124 3...300 s 10 s
Cutout time V125 0.1...300 s 0.1 s
Dead time of shot 1 V126 0.1...300 s 0.3 s
Dead time of shot 2 V127 0.1...300 s 30 s
Dead time of shot 3 V128 0.1...300 s 30 s
SG1 V129 0...255 0
SG2 V130 0...1023 0
SG3 V131 0...31 15
Table 9.-4 Parameters for the disturbance recorder
Description
Parameter
(channel 0)
Setting range
Default
setting
Customer’s
setting
ABB Oy
Distribution Automation
P.O. Box 699
FI-65101 Vaasa
FINLAND
Tel. +358 10 22 11
Fax. +358 10 224 1094
www.abb.com/substationautomation
1
M
R
S

7
5
5
3
1
0

E
N


1
0
.
2
0
0
4

1MRS 755310
Issued: Version: 05.10.2004 A/05.10.2004

Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual

REF 610

Contents
1. Introduction ...............................................................................6
1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. About this manual .........................................................................6 The use of the relay ......................................................................6 Features ........................................................................................6 Guarantee .....................................................................................8

2. Safety information .....................................................................9 3. Instructions ..............................................................................10
3.1. Application ...................................................................................10 3.2. Requirements ..............................................................................10 3.3. Configuration ...............................................................................10

4. Technical description .............................................................13
4.1. Functional description .................................................................13 4.1.1. Product functions .............................................................13 4.1.1.1. Protection functions ............................................13 4.1.1.2. Inputs .................................................................13 4.1.1.3. Outputs ...............................................................14 4.1.1.4. Disturbance recorder ..........................................14 4.1.1.5. HMI .....................................................................14 4.1.1.6. Non-volatile memory ..........................................14 4.1.1.7. Self-supervision ..................................................14 4.1.1.8. Time synchronization .........................................15 4.1.2. Measurements .................................................................16 4.1.3. Configuration ....................................................................16 4.1.4. Protection .........................................................................18 4.1.4.1. Block diagram ....................................................18 4.1.4.2. Overcurrent protection .......................................19 4.1.4.3. Earth-fault protection ..........................................20 4.1.4.4. Thermal protection for cables .............................21 4.1.4.5. Phase discontinuity protection ...........................26 4.1.4.6. Circuit-breaker failure protection ........................26 4.1.4.7. Arc protection .....................................................26 4.1.4.8. Auto-reclose function .........................................28 4.1.4.9. Inverse definite minimum time characteristics ...34 4.1.4.10.Settings ..............................................................46 4.1.4.11.Technical data on protection functions ..............58 4.1.5. Trip-circuit supervision .....................................................62 4.1.6. Trip lockout function .........................................................63 4.1.7. Trip counters for circuit-breaker condition monitoring ......64
©Copyright 2004 ABB Oy, Distribution Automation, Vaasa, FINLAND
3

.... 66 4.......Profile of Modbus REF 610 ..........16......4... 69 4.............Protocol overview ..2.............. Selecting adaptive sequence length ..........11......Recorded data of the last events ...1...1.......Protocol overview . 75 4...1..... Auto-reclose function .......3...........13......2......1........3........15.4.........1... 67 4.Disturbance recorder ...1.................1............................... 143 4 .............. Technical data ...2......11...............11............3..............Settings and unloading .1..1.. 65 4.... 88 4......... 65 4.. 133 5.........11..............................5.Disturbance recorder data ..............Self-supervision (IRF) system ....... 121 4.............. 128 4.................1........ 140 5........1..................2...................2.....................................1..............Commissioning tests .............2......1............2...................2..REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 4...........................2......................................... 65 4. 92 4..........3.....1..............1......12....1........................17............ 88 4..1...1...DNP 3.................8.......15........0 remote communication protocol .........1.....................................5......DNP 3.......1....... 123 4................ 99 4............ 88 4...............1.......1.1..11...................14. Serial communication connections ................17.0 point list of REF 610 .......4..........................Control and indication of disturbance recorder status . 74 4.................... 138 5.................. Light sensor input connections .........1............... Indicator LEDs and operation indication messages .. Input/output connections .1...........18.....REF 610-specific DNP features .................................2....................9.. 70 4...................1.1.DNP 3.......... 138 5...... 67 4.......IEC 60870-5-103 remote communication protocol .........................2. Arc protection ........................... 141 5..0 device profile of REF 610 ...Modbus remote communication protocol ..................16.....16................................ 65 4... 123 4................... 64 4............. Arc protection with one REF 610 relay ..............................3..........2.......19......... 123 4................ Demand values .Communication ports . Arc protection with several REF 610 relays . 102 4........1.1. 67 4.............1.........10......... 74 4. Fast tripping and initiation of shot 1 using start signals ..............2.....Event codes .............1............2....SPA bus communication protocol parameters ........... 141 5...................................... Application examples .1............11......16...........Event code of the disturbance recorder .................15......1.................. 128 4. 138 5......Protocol parameters of REF 610 ..............Relay parameterization .................16. 88 4...................... Design description ........Triggering ..1...................11..........1....1....6..... 142 5............. 64 4..................2. 67 4...16.................... 117 4. Fast tripping and initiation of shot 1 using two protection stages ......... 139 5...............1........ Arc protection with several REF 610 relays and one REA 101 ........Function ...............................

........ Check lists ........................................................... References ...............................1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 6..................................................................................................144 7.147 9..... Ordering information ......149 5 ......... Abbreviations ..146 8........................................................................

3. A self-supervision system continuously monitors the operation of the relay.. Features • Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection with definite-time or IDMT characteristic. REF 610 is based on a microprocessor environment. and to the Installation Manual for installation of the relay. high-set stage • Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection. focusing on giving a technical description of the relay. high-set stage • Phase discontinuity protection • Three-phase thermal overload protection for cables • Arc protection • two lens sensors for arc detection (optional) • automatic reference level adjustment based on backlight intensity • arc detection via a remote light signal • Automatic reclosing 1. Remote control can be carried out via the rear connector connected to the control and monitoring system through the serial communication bus.3 shots • Circuit-breaker failure protection • Trip counters for circuit-breaker condition monitoring • Trip-circuit supervision with possibility to route the warning signal to a signal output • Trip lockout function 6 . also known as the Man-Machine Interface (MMI). Local control of the relay via serial communication can be carried out with a computer connected to the front communication port.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 1. 1. 1..1. 1. instantaneous stage • Non-directional earth-fault protection with definite-time or IDMT characteristic. Introduction About this manual This manual provides thorough information on the protection relay REF 610 and its applications. low-set stage • Non-directional earth-fault protection.2. Refer to the Operator’s Manual for instructions on how to use the Human-Machine Interface (HMI) of the relay. The HMI includes a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) which makes the local use of the relay safe and easy. low-set stage • Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection. The use of the relay The feeder protection relay REF 610 is a versatile multifunction protection relay mainly designed to protect incoming and outgoing feeders in a wide range of feeder applications.

IEC 60870-5-103 or Modbus (RTU and ASCII) communication protocol Optional DNP 3.0 rear communication module with RS-485 connection for system communication using the DNP 3.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Four accurate current inputs User-selectable rated frequency 50/60 Hz Three normally open power output contacts Two change-over signal output contacts and three additional change-over signal output contacts on the optional I/O module Output contact functions freely configurable for desired operation Two galvanically isolated digital inputs and three additional galvanically isolated digital inputs on the optional I/O module Disturbance recorder • recording time up to 80 seconds • triggering by one or several internal or digital input signals • records four analogue channels and up to eight user-selectable digital channels • adjustable sampling rate Non-volatile memory for • up to 100 event codes with time stamp • setting values • disturbance recorder data • recorded data of the five last events with time stamp • number of AR shots and starts/trips for protection stages • operation indication messages and LEDs showing the status at the moment of power failure HMI with an alphanumeric LCD and manoeuvring buttons • eight programmable LEDs Operation indication messages displayed in either the IEC or ANSI mode Multi-language support User-selectable password protection for the HMI Display of primary current values Demand values All settings can be modified with a PC Optical front communication connection: wirelessly or via cable Optional rear communication module with plastic fibre-optic. Battery back-up for real-time clock 7 .0 communication protocol. combined fibre-optic (plastic and glass) or RS-485 connection for system communication using the SPA-bus.

4. 8 . • Detachable plug-in unit 1. Guarantee Please inquire about the terms of guarantee from your nearest ABB representative.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 • Battery charge supervision • Continuous self-supervision of electronics and software.

The relay case internals may contain high voltage potential and touching these may cause personal injury. Only a competent electrician is allowed to carry out the electrical installation.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 2. National and local electrical safety regulations must always be followed. When the plug-in unit has been detached from the case. even though the auxiliary voltage has been disconnected. The frame of the device has to be carefully earthed. The device contains components which are sensitive to electrostatic discharge. personal injury or substantial property damage. Unnecessary touching of electronic components must therefore be avoided. Breaking the sealing tape on the upper handle of the device will result in loss of warranty and proper operation will no longer be guaranteed. Non-observance can result in death. do not touch the inside of the case. Safety information Dangerous voltages can occur on the connectors. ! 9 .

REF 610 can also be used as back-up protection for motors.. The start signals can be used for blocking co-operating protection relays and signalling.+70°C 0. In Fig. see below and section Technical data.1%/°C -40. 3.+55°C -40. the residual current is measured via a summation connection of the phase current transformers and the output contacts are connected to enable the use of the trip lockout function.3.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 3. 3.2. two-stage. 3. the battery should be changed every five years. Requirements To secure correct and safe operation of the relay. The large number of digital inputs and output contacts allows a wide range of applications..3.-1. in industrial as well as in utility applications. including three-stage overcurrent protection. 3.-2 represent REF 610 with the default configuration: all trip signals are routed to trip the circuit breaker. The optional arc protection for detection of arc situations in air insulated metal-clad switchgears and the auto-reclose function for automatic clearing of overhead line faults increase the range of applications further.3.3.1. 3.-2.. non-directional earth-fault protection as well as thermal protection. Instructions Application REF 610 is a versatile multifunction protection relay mainly designed for protection of incoming and outgoing feeders in MV distribution substations. transformers and generators.. When being used for real-time clock or recorded data functions. preventive maintenance is recommended to be performed every five years when REF 610 is operating under the specified conditions. The large number of integrated protection functions. the residual current is measured via a core-balance current transformer and the output contacts are connected to enable the use of the auto-reclose function..+85°C 3. makes REF 610 a complete protection against overcurrent and earth faults. 3. Configuration Setting and connection examples The appropriate configuration of the output contact matrix enables the use of the signals from the protection stages as contact functions. In Fig. Fig.-1 and Fig. Environmental conditions • Recommended temperature range (continuous) • Limit temperature range (short-term) • Temperature influence on the operation accuracy of the protection relay within the specified service temperature range • Transport and storage temperature range -10.3. 10 ..

SGL8 ConnDiagr1REF610_a REF 610 11 .SGF5 SGL1. example 1 13 13 13 13 13 Blocking Blocking 14 15 15 15 15 15 14 14 14 14 I0>> ∆I> Blocking θ> Technical Reference Manual X5..1 21 22 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 23 24 ~ Optional Warning Self-supervision SGB5 SGB4 SGB2 11 11 IRF Optional SGB3 SGB1 SGR5 SGR4 SGR2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 23 22 23 22 13 14 23 22 9 10 11 12 13 14 23 22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 7 8 5 6 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 SGR3 11 11 11 I> Blocking Start Trip Start Trip Start Trip Start Trip Start Trip Start Trip Alarm Trip Arc light output Trip SGR1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 23 22 SGR8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 23 22 SGR7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 23 22 SGR6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 23 22 12 12 12 12 12 I>> Blocking I>>> I0 > Fig.1 Light sensor 1 Light sensor 2 X5..1 6 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 X3..2 9 9 9 9 9 Optional 18 19 16 17 20 18 19 16 17 20 18 19 16 17 20 18 19 16 17 20 18 19 16 17 20 External Arc Arc I>/I0> Feeder Protection Relay 0→1 CB Position Open CB Position Closed AR Inhibit CB Close Inhibit External AR Initiation Open CB Command Close CB Command CB Reclosing Failed Shot Due Definite Trip Alarm AR Lockout 16 17 19 20 18 21 16 17 19 20 18 21 16 17 19 20 18 21 16 17 19 20 18 21 16 17 19 20 18 21 16 17 19 20 18 21 16 17 19 20 18 21 16 17 19 20 18 21 8 10 6 8 10 6 8 10 6 8 10 6 8 10 6 Trip lockout External Triggering Reset External trip External Triggering Trip lockout External Trip 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 7 1 2 3 4 5 3 4 5 3 4 5 3 4 5 3 4 5 7 1 2 7 1 2 7 1 2 7 1 2 CBFP Trip Indications cleared Output contacts unlatched Memorized values cleared Setting group selection Time sync SGF1.1 X4. 3..-1 Connection diagram.3.1 X2.L1 L2 L3 + 0 - 1 1MRS 755310 I + + O U aux + + - ~ DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1 IRF SO2 SO1 PO3 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 16 17 18 PO2 PO1 SO5 SO4 19 20 21 SO3 22 23 24 X3.

example 2 ConnDiagr2REF610_a 12 .3.1 16 17 18 19 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 X3..-2 Connection diagram. 3..1 DI3 2 1 DI2 DI1 21 22 23 24 1 2 IRF 3 4 5 SO2 6 7 8 SO1 9 10 11 PO3 12 13 PO2 14 15 PO1 SO5 SO4 SO3 X4.SGF5 SGL1.2 Optional Alarm Trip 9 9 9 9 9 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 External Arc 18 19 16 17 20 18 19 16 17 20 18 19 16 17 20 18 19 16 17 20 18 19 16 17 20 Arc I>/I0> Arc light output Trip 23 22 23 22 23 22 23 22 23 22 23 22 23 22 23 22 0→1 CB Position Open CB Position Closed AR Inhibit CB Close Inhibit External AR Initiation Open CB Command Close CB Command CB Reclosing Failed Shot Due Definite Trip Alarm AR Lockout 8 10 6 8 10 6 8 10 6 8 10 6 8 10 6 16 17 19 20 18 21 16 17 19 20 18 21 16 17 19 20 18 21 16 17 19 20 18 21 16 17 19 20 18 21 16 17 19 20 18 21 16 17 19 20 18 21 16 17 19 20 18 21 Trip lockout External Triggering Reset External trip 7 1 2 3 4 5 Trip lockout External Trip 15 7 1 2 3 4 5 15 7 1 2 3 4 5 15 7 1 2 3 4 5 15 7 1 2 3 4 5 15 15 15 15 REF 610 External Triggering CBFP Trip Indications cleared Output contacts unlatched Memorized values cleared Setting group selection Time sync SGF1..1 Light sensor 1 Light sensor 2 X5.1 Feeder Protection Relay ~ Technical Reference Manual Optional SGB5 11 12 11 12 Self-supervision SGB4 SGB3 11 12 IRF Warning Optional SGB2 11 12 SGB1 11 12 SGR5 I> Blocking SGR4 Start Trip 1 2 1 2 SGR3 1 2 SGR2 1 2 SGR1 SGR8 SGR7 SGR6 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 I>> Blocking Start Trip 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 I>>> I0 > 13 14 15 13 14 15 13 14 15 13 14 15 13 14 15 Start Trip Blocking Blocking Start Trip 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 I0>> Start Trip 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 ∆I> Blocking Start Trip 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 θ> X5.SGL8 Fig..1MRS 755310 L1 L2 L3 0 - - 1 I O + U aux ~ + + DI5 DI4 4 3 X2.1 7 6 5 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 X3.

1. two digital inputs and three optional digital inputs controlled by an external voltage. low-set stage Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection.1.4. Inputs REF 610 is provided with four energizing inputs.4. 4. refer to sections: • • • • • • • 4.4.1. 4. 4.4.2.4. Phase discontinuity protection 4.2.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 4. 51 50/51 50 46 49 51N 50N/51N 50/50NL 62BF 79 86 Function description Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection.4.4.1.1-1 and 4. two optional light sensor inputs. Three of the energizing inputs are for the phase currents and one for the earth-fault current.1.1. Overcurrent protection 4. Thermal protection for cables 4. low-set stage Non-directional earth-fault protection.1. Technical description Functional description Product functions Protection functions The protection functions of REF 610 with their IEC symbols and IEEE device numbers are presented in the table below: Table 4.1.1.2. 13 .1. instantaneous stage Phase discontinuity protection Three-phase thermal overload protection for cables Non-directional earth-fault protection.10-7.2.4.7. The functions of the digital inputs are determined with the SGB switches.1. refer to section Input/output connections and tables 4.1.1. For details. high-set stage Arc protection Circuit-breaker failure protection Automatic reclosing Lockout relay For descriptions of the protection functions.6.1.3. Circuit-breaker failure protection 4. Arc protection 4. Earth-fault protection 4. Auto-reclose function 4.5.8.1.1-1 IEC symbols and IEEE device numbers IEC symbol I> I>> I>>> ∆I> θ> I 0> I0>> ARC CBFP 0→1 IEEE Device No. 4.1.1.1-5. high-set stage Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection.1.4.

REF 610

Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual

1MRS 755310

4.1.1.3.

Outputs
REF 610 is provided with three power outputs (PO1, PO2 and PO3), two signal outputs (SO1 and SO2) and three optional signal outputs (SO3, SO4 and SO5). Switchgroups SGR1...8 are used for routing internal signals from the protection stages, the external trip signal and signals from the auto-reclose function to the desired signal or power output. The minimum pulse length can be configured to be 40 or 80 ms and the power outputs can all be configured to be latched.

4.1.1.4.

Disturbance recorder
REF 610 includes an internal disturbance recorder which records the momentary measured values, or the RMS curves of the measured signals, and up to eight user-selectable digital signals: the digital input signals and the internal signals from the protection stages. Any digital signal can be set to trigger the recorder on either the falling or rising edge.

4.1.1.5.

HMI
The HMI of REF 610 is equipped with six push-buttons, an alphanumeric 2x16 characters’ LCD, eight programmable indicator LEDs, three indicator LEDs with fixed functionality, and an indicator LED for front communication. The push-buttons are used for navigating in the menu structure and for adjusting setting values. An HMI password can be set to protect all user-changeable values from being changed by an unauthorized person. The HMI password will remain inactive and will thus not be required for altering parameter values until the default HMI password has been replaced. Entering the HMI password successfully can be selected to generate an event code. This feature can be used to indicate interaction activities via the local HMI. For further information on the HMI, refer to the Operator’s Manual.

4.1.1.6.

Non-volatile memory
REF 610 can be configured to store various data in a non-volatile memory, which will retain its data also in case of loss of auxiliary voltage (provided that the battery has been inserted and is charged). Operation indication messages and LEDs, disturbance recorder data, event codes and recorded data can all be configured to be stored in the non-volatile memory whereas setting values will always be stored in the EEPROM.

4.1.1.7.

Self-supervision
The self-supervision system of REF 610 manages run-time fault situations and informs the user about an existing fault. There are two types of fault indications: internal relay fault (IRF) indications and warnings. When the self-supervision system detects a permanent internal relay fault, which will prevent relay operation, the green indicator LED (ready) will start to blink. At the same time, the IRF contact, which is normally picked up, will drop off and a fault code will appear on the LCD. The fault code is numerical and identifies the fault type.

14

1MRS 755310

Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual

REF 610

INTERNAL FAULT FAULT CODE :30
IntFault_a

Fig. 4.1.1.7.-1 Permanent IRF In case of a warning, the relay will continue to operate with full or reduced functionality and the green indicator LED (ready) will remain lit as during normal operation. A fault indication message (see Fig. 4.1.1.7.-2), with a possible fault code (see Fig. 4.1.1.7.-3), will appear on the LCD indicating the type of fault. In case of a warning due to an external fault in the trip circuit detected by the trip-circuit supervision, or due to continuous light on the light sensor inputs, SO2 will be activated (if SGF1/8=1).

WARNING BATTERY LOW
Warning_a

Fig. 4.1.1.7.-2 Warning with text message
WARNING FAULT CODE:

33
WarnREF610_a

Fig. 4.1.1.7.-3 Warning with numeric code For fault codes, refer to section Self-supervision (IRF) system.

4.1.1.8.

Time synchronization
Time synchronization of the relay’s real-time clock can be realized in two different ways: via serial communication using a communication protocol or via a digital input. Any digital input can be configured for time synchronization and used for either minute-pulse or second-pulse synchronization. The synchronization pulse is automatically selected and depends on the time range within which the pulse occurs. The time must be set once, either via serial communication or manually via the HMI. If the synchronization pulse differs more than +/- 0.05 seconds for second-pulse or +/- 2 seconds for minute-pulse synchronization from the relay’s real-time clock, the synchronization pulse will be rejected.

15

REF 610

Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual

1MRS 755310

Time synchronization is always triggered on the rising edge of the digital input signal. The time is adjusted in steps of five milliseconds per synchronization pulse. The typical accuracy achievable with time synchronization via a digital input is +2.5...-2.5 milliseconds for second-pulse and +5...-5 milliseconds for minute-pulse synchronization. Note! The pulse length of the digital input signal does not affect time synchronization.

4.1.2.

Measurements
The table below presents the measured values which can be accessed through the HMI:
Table 4.1.2-1
Indicator L1 L2 L3 I0 ∆I θ I1_min In_min Max I

Measured values
Description Current measured on phase IL1 Current measured on phase IL2 Current measured on phase IL3 Measured earth-fault current Calculated phase unbalance Calculated thermal level One-minute demand value Demand value during the specified time range Maximum one-minute demand value during the specified time range

4.1.3.

Configuration
Fig. 4.1.3.-1 illustrates how the internal and digital input signals can be configured to obtain the required protection functionality.

16

2 9 9 9 Optional 18 19 16 17 20 18 19 16 17 20 18 19 16 17 20 9 9 External Arc Arc I>/I0> 18 19 16 17 20 18 19 16 17 20 0→1 CB Position Open CB Position Closed AR Inhibit CB Close Inhibit External AR Initiation Open CB Command Close CB Command CB Reclosing Failed Shot Due Definite Trip Alarm AR Lockout 16 17 19 20 18 21 16 17 19 20 18 21 16 17 19 20 18 21 16 17 19 20 18 21 16 17 19 20 18 21 16 17 19 20 18 21 16 17 19 20 18 21 16 17 19 20 18 21 Trip lockout Trip lockout 8 10 6 8 10 6 8 10 6 8 10 6 8 10 6 External Triggering Reset External trip External Triggering External Trip Trip 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 7 1 2 3 4 5 3 4 5 3 4 5 7 1 2 7 1 2 7 1 2 7 1 2 CBFP 3 4 5 3 4 5 Indications cleared Output contacts unlatched Memorized values cleared Setting group selection Time sync SGF1.SGL8 SignDiagrREF610_a REF 610 17 .1MRS 755310 DI5 DI3 DI4 DI2 DI1 IRF SO2 SO1 PO3 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 PO2 PO1 SO5 16 17 18 SO4 19 20 21 SO3 22 23 24 X3.1 21 22 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 23 24 ~ Self-supervision Warning IRF Technical Reference Manual Feeder Protection Relay Fig..SGF5 SGL1. 4.1 X3.1..3.-1 SGB3 SGB2 11 11 Optional Optional SGB5 SGB4 SGB1 SGR5 SGR4 SGR2 1 2 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 13 14 23 22 23 22 11 12 13 14 23 22 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 23 22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 SGR3 11 11 11 I> Blocking Start Trip Start Trip Start Trip Start Trip Start Trip Start Trip Alarm Trip Arc light output Trip SGR1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 23 22 SGR8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 23 22 SGR7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 23 22 SGR6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 23 22 12 12 12 12 12 I>> Blocking IL1 IL2 IL3 I>>> I0 > 13 13 13 13 13 Blocking Blocking Signal diagram 14 15 15 15 14 14 Io I0>> ∆I> Blocking 14 14 15 15 θ> X5.1 Light sensor 1 Light sensor 2 X5...1 2 1 1 2 6 5 4 3 X4.

4... Protection Block diagram Switchgroups for digital inputs SGB1. SGB..1. AR Autoreclose CB Pos Open Open CB Cmd CB Pos Closed Close CB Cmd AR Inhibit CB Reclose Failed CB Close Inhibit Shot Due Ext AR Initiation Definite Trip Alarm I> Start AR Lockout I> Trip Block I> I>> Trip Block I>> I>>> Trip Block I>>> Io> Start Block Io> Io> Trip Block Io>> Io>> Trip ∆I> Trip Θ> Alarm Θ> Trip Arc Trip CBFP SGF1..1.4. unlatch output contacts by the digital input signal I>>> Trip I0> Start I0> Trip I0>> Start I0>> Trip ∆I> Start ∆I> Trip θ> Alarm θ> Trip BlockDiagrREF610_a Fig.1.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 The functions of the relay are selected with the switches of switchgroups SGF.5 Reset 1 1) Reset 2 2) Reset 3 3) Digital inputs Optional digital inputs (I/O module) DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 Protection relay functions I> Start Trip Block I>> Double Block I>>> Start Trip Block I IL1 IL2 IL3 Io IL1 IL2 IL3 CBFP PO1 EXT TRIG Trip lockout θ> Start Alarm Trip Start Double Trip Block ∆I> Start Trip Io>> Start Trip Io> Start Trip Switchgroups for programmable LEDs SGL1.4.. Arc I0> I0 Ext Trig Light1 Reset Light2 Light output PO3 Trip lockout Ext Arc Trip 0→1..1.SGF5 Disturbance recorder (4 analogue + up to 8 digital channels) IL 1 DI1 I> Start DI2 I> Trip IL 2 DI3 I>> Start IL 3 DI4 I>> Trip I0 DI5 I>>> Start Optional arc detector inputs Light sensor input1 (Communication module) Light sensor input2 SGR1. SGR and SGL. The checksums of the switchgroups are found under SETTINGS in the HMI menu.1.5 I> Start I> Trip I>> Start I>> Trip I>>> Start I>>> Trip I0> Start I0> Trip I0>> Start I0>> Trip ∆I> Start ∆I> Trip θ> Alarm θ> Trip Ext Trip Open CB Cmd Close CB Cmd Definite Trip Alarm CB Reclose Failled Shot Due AR Lockout Arc Trip Arc light output Trip lockout Warning PO1 PO2 PO3 SO1 SO2 SO3 SO4 SO5 Digital outputs (Output contacts) Optional digital outputs (I/O module) IRF IRF indication LED (green) IRF INDICATION START/ALARM INDICATION Start/Alarm (yellow) and trip (red) indication LEDs TRIP INDICATION The dashed line indicates optional functionality. 1) Clear indications by the digital input signal 2) Clear indications and unlatch output contacts by the digital input signal 3) Reset indications and memorized values. 4.8 I> Trip I>> Trip I>>> Trip I0> Trip I0>> Trip Block ∆I> AR Inhibit CB Close Inhibit CB Pos Open CB Pos Closed Ext AR Initiation Setting group Time sync Ext Trip Ext Trig CBFP Ext Trig Trip lockout Ext Arc Trip lockout reset Block I> Block I>> Block I0> Block I0>> Block ∆I> Trip Θ> Alarm Θ> Trip Trip lockout Definite Trip Alarm Shot Due AR Lockout CB Pos Open CB Pos Closed DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 Arc Trip Arc light output Switchgroups for output contacts LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 LED6 LED7 LED8 Programmable LEDs Io PO2 Analogue inputs Arc I>. The functions of the switches are explained in detail in the corresponding SG_ tables. 4.. 4.-1 Block diagram 18 ..

when the object to be protected is being connected to a network. It is possible to block the tripping of the low-set overcurrent stage by applying a digital input signal to the relay. If stage I> has started and the phase currents fall below the set start value of the stage. the set resetting time ensures that when the stage starts because of current spikes. Overcurrent protection The non-directional overcurrent protection detects overcurrent caused by phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth short circuits.2. the stage will generate a trip signal. This state will be indicated by dashes on the LCD and by “999” when the set start value is read via serial communication. i. i. while the timer is being reset. The inverse-time function of stage I> can be set to be inhibited when stage I>> and/ or I>>> starts. I>>. Consequently. Consequently.e. Stage I> has a settable resetting time (both at definite-time and IDMT characteristics). Stage I>> can be given an instantaneous characteristic by setting the operate time to the minimum. transient faults. if stage I> has already tripped. In this case. tr. 0. Stage I>>> can be given an instantaneous characteristic by setting the operate time to the minimum. for reset coordination with existing electromechanical relays or for reducing fault clearance times of recurring. The start situation ends when all phase currents fall below 1. A start situation is defined as a situation where the maximum phase current rises from a value below 0.4. The selection is made in SGF4. If the phase currents exceed the set start value again.5 times the set start value of the stage. the stage will generate a start signal after a ~ 55 ms’ start time. the stage will generate a start signal after a ~ 30 ms’ start time. the start of the stage will remain active for the set resetting time. The set start value of stage I>> can be set to be automatically doubled in a start situation.04 s. the stage will generate a start signal after a ~ 30 ms’ start time.e. 0. the stage will generate a trip signal. it will not be immediately reset. the start of the stage will remain active. When one or several phase currents exceed the set start value of the high-set stage. When the set operate time at definite-time characteristic elapses. The selection is made in SGF4.5 x I> within less than 60 ms. When one or several phase currents exceed the set start value of the low-set stage. When the set operate time at definite-time characteristic elapses.e. It is possible to block the tripping of the high-set overcurrent stage by applying a digital input signal to the relay.1. When the set operate time at definite-time characteristic or the calculated operate time at IDMT characteristic elapses. the stage will be reset in 50 ms after all three phase currents have fallen below 0. a set start value below the connection inrush current level can be selected for stage I>>. I>. Stage I>> can be set out of operation in SGF3.04 s. I>>>. When one or several phase currents exceed the set start value of the instantaneous stage.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 4.25 x I> and remain below for at least 200 ms. the stage will generate a trip signal.12 x I> to a value above 1. 19 . the operate time will be determined by stage I>> and/or I>>>. i. However.

25 x I0> and remain below for at least 200 ms. for instance.3. If stage I0> has started and the earth-fault current falls below the set start value of the stage. the stage will generate a start signal after a ~ 40 ms’ start time. a set start value below the connection inrush current level can be selected for the stage. the start of the stage will remain active for the set resetting time. i. The selection is made in SGF4. This state will be indicated by dashes on the LCD and by “999” when the set start value is read via serial communication. if stage I0> has already tripped.04 s. the stage will generate a trip signal. tr0.e.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 Stage I>>> can be set out of operation in SGF3.e. the stage will generate a trip signal. Consequently.4. However. The high-set stage can be given an instantaneous characteristic by setting the operate time to the minimum. 0. The stage will be reset in 50 ms after the earth-fault current has fallen below the set start value of the stage. The selection is made in SGF4. while the timer is being reset. I0>>.5 x I0> within less than 60 ms. The start situation ends when the current falls below 1. i. Consequently. the stage will generate a start signal after a ~ 60 ms’ start time. When the set operate time at definite-time characteristic or the calculated operate time at IDMT characteristic elapses. caused by insulation failure due to ageing and thermal cycling. Earth-fault protection The non-directional earth-fault current protection detects phase-to-earth currents.05 s. 0. the operate time will be determined by stage I0>>. When the earth-fault current exceeds the set start value of the low-set stage. Stages I>> and I>>> will be reset in 50 ms after all three phase currents have fallen below the set start value of the stage.e. Stage I0>> can be set out of operation in SGF3. the start of the stage will remain active. The low-set stage can be given an instantaneous characteristic by setting the operate time to the minimum. The inverse-time function of stage I0> can be set to be inhibited when stage I0>> starts. transient faults. In this case.12 x I0> to a value above 1. When the set operate time at definite-time characteristic elapses. 20 . A start situation is defined as a situation where the earth-fault current rises from a value below 0.1. for reset coordination with existing electromechanical relays or for reducing fault clearance times of recurring.5 times the set start value of the stage. the set resetting time ensures that when the stage starts because of current spikes. i. This state will be indicated by dashes on the LCD and by “999” when the set start value is read via serial communication. Note! Stages I> and I>> can be set to be blocked by the auto-reclose function. If the earth-fault current exceeds the set start value again. when the object to be protected is being connected to a network. The set start value of stage I0>> can be set to be automatically doubled in a start situation. it will not be immediately reset. 4. When the earth-fault current exceeds the set start value of the high-set stage. Stage I0> has a settable resetting time (both at definite-time and IDMT characteristics). I0>. the stage will be reset in 50 ms after the earth-fault current has fallen below 0.

The heating up of the cable follows an exponential curve. Prolonged overloading results in the thermal stress capacity of the cable being exceeded. the stage will generate an alarm signal. Thermal protection for cables The thermal protection detects long-time overloads during normal operation. exceeds the set alarm level. The thermal alarm can be used to avoid unnecessary tripping due to a beginning overload.0 0. the thermal capacity will start to increase at a rate depending on the current amplitude and the prior load of the cable. The thermal protection may equally well be used to protect dry-type transformers.5 58 44. which in turn may cause a short circuit or an earth fault.4. for instance. The thermal level at various constant currents are presented in the table below: Table 4. the levelled-out value of which is determined by the squared value of the load current. influenced by the thermal history of the cable.1.7 73.5 0. 4. When the thermal capacity. The thermal capacity is calculated as follows: I . Note! Stages I0> and I0>> can be set to be blocked by the auto-reclose function. busbars and overhead lines.2 0 21 .4.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 It is possible to block the tripping of an earth-fault stage by applying a digital input signal to the relay.2 –t ⁄ τ θ =  -------------------. stage θ> will start.3 0 Thermal level at constant currents Thermal level (%) 90. capacitor banks.4. θa>. which degrades the insulation of the cable. × ( 1 – e ) × 100%  1. At the same time. The thermal protection stage continuously calculates the thermal capacity used as a percentage of the cable’s total thermal capacity.7 8.1.4 22.8 0. Iθ.4-1 I/In 1.7 0.9 0.05 × I θ where θ = thermal capacity I = phase current value Iθ = set full load current t = time (in minutes) τ = time constant (in minutes) When one or several phase currents exceed the set full load current.

connecting the auxiliary supply to the relay will cause a thermal alarm due to the initialization of the thermal level to 75 percent of the thermal capacity of the cable. τ.1025  where I = phase current value Iθ = set full load current Ip = prior load current t = operate time (in minutes) τ = time constant (in minutes) ln = natural logarithm At power up. The operate time.4.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 When the thermal capacity exceeds the trip level. The thermal level can be reset via the HMI during power up.. The calculated thermal level will approach the thermal level of the cable.Fig. is determined by the time constant. Note! The thermal level can be reset or changed via serial communication. the typical time constant is 20 minutes. The time constant is provided by the cable manufacturer. θt>.4. see Fig.4.e. This will ensure that the stage will trip within a safe time span in case of an overload. the stage will generate a trip signal. This state will be indicated by dashes on the LCD and by “999” when the set full load current is read via serial communication. which will generate an event code. Stage θ> can be set out of operation in SGF3. For operate times.1. The operate time is calculated as follows: 2 2  ( I ⁄ Iθ ) – ( Ip ⁄ Iθ )  t = τ × ln  ------------------------------------------. Note! At an alarm level below 75 percent.1. 4.4. 4.. i. and depends on the cable (cable cross section area and cable rated voltage).-1. 2  ( I ⁄ I θ ) – 1. the time from when the stage starts until it trips. 22 . the thermal level will be set to 75 percent of the thermal capacity of the cable.-3. For a 22 kV cable.

4.05 23 .-1 Trip curves when no prior load PrLoad0_a 1.4. 4.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 t/s 100000 10000 1000 t[min] 100 90 60 40 25 10 15 10 5 1 1 0 1 10 I/I q Fig.1.

4.4.7 x In 24 .-2 Trip curves at prior load 0.05 0 1 10 I/Iq PrLoad0.1.4.7_a 10 Fig.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 t/s 100000 10000 1000 t[min] 100 90 60 40 25 15 10 5 1 1 1.

-3 Trip curves at prior load 1 x In 25 .1. 4.4.05 0 1 10 I/Iq Fig.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 t/s 100000 10000 1000 t[min] 100 10 90 60 40 25 15 10 1 5 PrLoad1_a 1 1.4.

When the set operate time at definite-time characteristic elapses. thermal or external trip. Stage ∆I> can be set out of operation in SGF3. ∆I>. The difference between the minimum and maximum phase currents is calculated as follows: ( Imax – Imin ) ∆I = ----------------------------------. The arc protection can be realized as a stand-alone function in a single REF 610 or as a station-wide arc protection including several REF 610 protection relays. caused by a broken conductor.6. the stage will generate a start signal after a ~ 100 ms’ start time. IL2 and IL3. Local light detection requires the optional arc light detection hardware. It is possible to block the tripping of the phase discontinuity stage by applying a digital input signal to the relay. If realized as a station-wide arc protection. Both triggering options can be selected at the same time. 4. for instance.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 4. the CBFP will generate a trip signal via output PO2. Internal triggering is selected by activating the CBFP in SGF and external triggering by activating the CBFP in SGB.5. the CBFP controls the upstream circuit breaker. The CBFP can also be selected to be triggered by applying a digital input signal to the relay. However.4. The stage will be reset in 70 ms after the current difference has fallen below the set start value of the stage.1. Normally.1 x In.1.7.4. If a trip signal generated via output PO1 is still active and the current has not been cut off on expiration of the CBFP set operate time. Phase discontinuity protection The phase discontinuity protection detects phase unbalance between phases IL1. Note! The CBFP will not be triggered in case of a thermal alarm. 4. for instance. Arc protection The arc protection detects arc situations in air insulated metal-clad switchgears. caused by human error during maintenance or poor contact in the cable connections. the CBFP will generate a trip signal via output PO2 if the current has not been cut off on expiration of the set operate time. different tripping schemes can be selected 26 . In this case.× 100% Imax When the current difference exceeds the set start value of the phase discontinuity stage. This state will be indicated by dashes on the LCD and by “999” when the set start value is read via serial communication. The phase discontinuity protection will be inhibited when all phase currents fall below 0.4. Circuit-breaker failure protection The circuit-breaker failure protection (CBFP) detects situations where the trip remains active although the circuit breaker should have operated. the stage will generate a trip signal.1. it can also be used for tripping via redundant trip circuits of the same circuit breaker.

The light detected by the lens sensors is compared to an automatically adjusted reference level. be set to trip the circuit breaker of either the incoming or the outgoing feeder depending on the fault location in the switchgear. The stage will be reset in 30 ms after all three phase currents and the earth-fault current have fallen below the set current limits.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 for the operation of the circuit breakers of the incoming and outgoing feeders. The arc protection consists of: • optional arc light detection hardware with automatic backlight compensation for two lens sensors • a light signal output for routing the locally detected light signal to another relay • the protection stage ARC with phase. or the earth-fault current the set current limit ArcI0>. the light is detected by lens sensors connected to inputs Light sensor 1 and Light sensor 2 on the serial communication module of the relay. can be configured to be activated either immediately upon detection of light in all situations. The light signal output. Stage ARC and the light signal output can be set out of operation in SGF3. an arc has been detected locally. L>. for instance. in the busbar compartment and the cable compartment of the metal-clad cubicle. Note! Inputs not in use should be covered with dust caps. the REF 610 relays in the station can. the REF 610 relays can be set to always trip both the circuit breaker of the incoming feeder and that of the outgoing feeder. The lens sensors can be placed. 27 . Inputs Light sensor 1 and Light sensor 2 have their own reference levels. The selection is made in SGF4. Consequently. When the reference level of either or both inputs is exceeded. The light from an arc is detected either locally or via a remote light signal. for instance. or only when the arc has not been extinguished by the time the trip signal is generated. For maximum safety. When light has been detected locally or remotely and one or several phase currents exceed the set current limit ArcI>. Note! The warning signal generated in case of continuous light on the light sensor inputs can be routed to SO2 by setting switch SGF1/8 to 1. Locally. a station-wide arc protection is realized.and earth-fault current measurement. the arc protection stage (ARC) will generate a trip signal in less than 15 ms. By routing the light signal output to an output contact connected to a digital input of another REF 610 relay.

Tripping faults are detected by the CBFP. De-energizing of the fault location for a selected time period is implemented through automatic reclosing. 28 . A permanent fault must be located and cleared before the fault location can be re-energized. one high-speed and one delayed. the next shot will be initiated. Blocking can be used to limit the number of shots in an auto-reclose sequence. due to an discharged spring. during which most faults can be cleared. 4. Consequently.-1 Block diagram of the arc protection 4. shot initiation is not possible when the circuit breaker is open. Inhibition will also interrupt any ongoing shot. for instance. for instance. In case of shot initiation while a blocking is active. At a permanent fault. The AR function can be initiated by start and trip signals from certain overcurrent and earth-fault protection stages.4.4.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 Arc protection ÎL SGF3/6=1 Arc I> 25 ms t Arc Trip Î0 External Arc Light sensor 1 Light sensor 2 Arc I0> SGF3/7=1 L> light output ArcREF610_a OR SGF4/6=0 AND Fig. Auto-reclose function The vast majority of MV overhead line faults are transient and automatically cleared by momentarily de-energizing the line. which may be advantageous with certain types of faults. tripping of the arc protection stage. For safety reasons. Initiation is also possible from an external device via a digital input. The AR function can be inhibited (AR Inhibit) by trip signals from certain protection stages or via a digital input. The initiation of one or several auto-reclose shots can be set to be blocked by trip signals from certain protection stages. Inhibition is advantageous with tripping faults as this type of fault cannot be cleared during an auto-reclose sequence.1. Blocking is also possible via a digital input. If the circuit breaker is not ready.1. for instance. Information on the circuit-breaker position is always required whereas circuit-breaker status is optional. does not initiate the AR function. The auto-reclose (AR) function of REF 610 can be used with any circuit breaker suitable for auto-reclosing.8. The AR function provides three programmable auto-reclose shots and can thus be set to perform one to three successive auto-reclosures of desired type and duration. auto-reclosing is followed by definite tripping. for instance.7. The AR function monitors the position and status of the circuit breaker.

However. When the set dead time elapses. For the cutout time. fast tripping and shot initiation will be achieved. If the network fault has still not been cleared. the AR function will be automatically reset after the reclaim time. and the protection trips the circuit breaker before expiration of the set reclaim time. After this. By setting a stage with a short operate time to trip and initiate only the first auto-reclose shot. The typical auto-reclose sequence is as follows: the overcurrent or earth-fault protection detects a network fault. At the time of shot initiation. the blocking of selected protection stages (the same as for shot 2) will be activated and the AR function will issue a reclosing command to the circuit breaker.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 reclosing can be inhibited via a digital input (CB Close Inhibit). the next shot will be initiated (provided that a further auto-reclosure is allowed). i. the next shot will be initiated (provided that a further auto-reclosure is allowed). the auto-reclosure is successful. the set reclaim time and set cutout time will start when the set dead time elapses. the AR function will generate a definite trip alarm. In addition. At the time of shot initiation. Inhibition of reclosing is checked only when necessary and can therefore not be used to prevent initiation or progression of a shot. the duration of which is settable. The blocking of protection stages will be reset on expiration of the set cutout time. trips the circuit breaker and initiates the first auto-reclose shot. In addition. 29 . i.e.e. all selected auto-reclose shots have been unsuccessful. if the fault is not cleared and the protection trips the circuit breaker before expiration of the reclaim time. The blocking of protection stages will be reset on expiration of the cutout time. the blocking of selected protection stages (may differ from shot 1) will be activated and the AR function will issue a reclosing command to the circuit breaker. If the network fault is cleared. the set dead time for shot 2 will start. At the time of shot initiation. such as down-stream fuses. the auto-reclosure is unsuccessful. the AR function supports optional blocking of selectable overcurrent and earth-fault protection stages (refer to section Blocking of protection stages). In addition. the blocking of selected protection stages will be activated and the AR function will issue a reclosing command (Close CB Command) to the circuit breaker. The circuit breaker will now remain open and the AR function will be locked out. When the set dead time elapses. refer to section Fast tripping and initiation of shot 1 using two protection stages. the set reclaim time and set cutout time will start when the set dead time elapses. i. the stage will be blocked to allow selective delayed tripping of another stage in accordance with the time-grading plan of the system. For co-ordination of the other protection devices in the network. However. the set dead time for shot 1 will start. The blocking of protection stages will be reset on expiration of the set cutout time. the set reclaim time will expire and the AR function will be automatically reset to the quiescent condition.e. and the protection trips the circuit breaker before expiration of the set reclaim time. the set reclaim time and set cutout time will start when the set dead time elapses. if the network fault is not cleared. If the network fault is cleared. When the set dead time elapses. the set dead time for shot 3 will start.

At the factory default delay of 300 s. Note! Shot initiation by a start signal applies only to shot 1 and definite tripping.4. 4. in practise.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 As default. The AR function can be activated either via the HMI or with SPA parameter S25 by setting the number of auto-reclose shots to 1. not be used for shot initiation.1. the start signal will. 2 or 3.-1 Simplified shot logic diagram Shot initiation The AR function can be initiated by any of the following signals: • external AR initiation signal • start signal from stages I> and I0> • trip signal from stages I>. Note! The AR function will issue an opening command to the circuit breaker at shot initiation by a start or a trip signal. I>>. External AR initiation by the digital input signal is selected in SGB. the AR function is not in use (number of auto-reclose shots = 0).8. I0> and I0>> The start signal from stages I> and I0> will initiate a shot on expiration of a settable start delay for the respective stage. 30 . OR Dead time t t t S R Shot Due Shot Initiation Shot 1 Shot 2 Shot 3 OR AND CB Close Inhibit S CB closing time t CB position closed Close CB Command ARShotREF610_a OR R CB Reclosing Failed AND Fig.

Note! In case of shot initiation while a blocking is active. If the signal used for blocking is not simultaneously used for initiation of the next shot..8. Blocking of shot initiation can also be used to skip the entire shot sequence (by blocking the initiation of all three shots). the AR function will generate a definite trip alarm and be locked out. Note! Shot initiation is blocked only for as long as the blocking signal is active.8 *) Shot initiation by a start signal applies only to shot 1 and definite tripping.4.. the next shot (if such has been selected and not blocked) will be initiated.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 CB position closed Shot Due 100 ms t AND Shot Initiation I>> Trip Ext AR Initiation I> Trip I> Start *) Io>> Trip Io> Trip Io> Start *) AND I> start delay t OR OR Open CB Command Io> start delay t OR ARInitREF610_a SG1/ Blocking of shot 1.4. to allow shot initiation by the trip signal from stage I>. for instance.-2 Simplified shot initiation logic diagram Blocking of shot initiation The initiation of one or several auto-reclose shots can be set to be blocked by any of the following signals: • external AR initiation signal • trip signal from overcurrent stages I> and I>> • trip signal from earth-fault stages I0> and I0>> The selection is made in SG1 (see table 4.10-10). but to go directly to definite tripping in case of shot initiation by the trip signal from stage I>>. 31 . 4. Note! Activation of any above-mentioned signal will always cause the AR function to issue an opening command to the circuit breaker. This can be used to skip Shot 1. it can be used.1. and go directly to definite tripping. Further. for instance.1. Fig.

or the circuit breaker does not close before expiration of the set CB closing time. Circuit-breaker closing When the set dead time elapses.10-12). ∆I> The trip signals from stages ARC and θ> and from the CBFP are fixed and will thus always inhibit the AR function. • At manual circuit-breaker closing during an ongoing shot. the shot will be interrupted and the AR function inhibited during the reclaim time.1. θ> trip signal from overcurrent stage I>>> trip signal from earth-fault stage I0>> • trip signal from the phase discontinuity stage. • Shot initiation is allowed only when the circuit breaker is closed. the circuit breaker will remain open and the AR function will generate a CB Reclosing Failed signal. Information on the circuit-breaker position The AR function requires information on the circuit-breaker position. Information on the circuit-breaker position is used in the following situations: • At manual circuit-breaker closing. Any digital input can be selected for the information on the circuit breaker being open (CB Position Open) and closed (CB Position Closed) in SGB.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 Inhibition of the auto-reclose function The AR function can be inhibited (AR Inhibit) by any of the following signals: • • • • • • • external AR inhibit signal trip signal from the arc protection stage. External inhibition of reclosing by the digital input signal is selected in SGB. External AR inhibition by the digital input signal is selected in SGB. • Reclosing of the circuit breaker is ended immediately after the AR function has received information that the circuit breaker has been closed. two digital inputs is recommended although either one is enough for the AR function. I0>> and ∆I> in SG3 (see table 4. 32 . θ> trip signal from the CBFP alarm signal from the thermal protection stage. Normally. the AR function will issue a reclosing command to the circuit breaker (Close CB Command). Note! The AR function will remain inhibited after all inhibition signals have been reset for a time equal in length to the set reclaim time. When reclosing is inhibited. Note! Inhibition will always also interrupt any ongoing shot. ARC trip signal from the thermal protection stage.4. Reclosing can be inhibited via a digital input (CB Close Inhibit). the AR function will be inhibited for the reclaim time. and the alarm signal from stage θ> and the trip signals from stages I>>>.

33 . Lockout of the auto-reclose function The lockout signal indicates whether the AR function is ready for shot initiation. when reclosing begins.1.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 Reclosing is inhibited and the CB Reclosing Failed signal generated also if an AR initiation signal is active. the aim is at fast tripping and initiation of shot 1 and delayed tripping and initiation of shot 2 and 3.e.4. The set reclaim time will start when the definite trip alarm signal.10-11). or if a protection trips the circuit breaker again. one fast and the other one delayed. depending on the reason for the AR function being locked. the AR inhibition signal or the CB reclosing failed signal has been reset or the circuit breaker closed. The protection stages can be set to be blocked at shot 1 and/or shot 2 and 3. the circuit breaker is open and there is no ongoing shot. The selection is made in SG2 (see table 4. Note! The definite trip alarm signal will not be generated if the AR function has been set out of operation. Blocking of protection stages In several applications. such as fuse-saving (refer to section Fast tripping and initiation of shot 1 using two protection stages).e. Definite trip alarm The AR function will generate a definite trip alarm signal after an unsuccessful auto-reclose sequence. i. However. The definite trip alarm signal will also be generated in case a protection trips the circuit breaker while the AR function is inhibited. when no more auto-reclose shots are allowed but the network fault has not be cleared. The duration of the reclosing command is settable (CB closing time). the fault has not been cleared. if two protection stages are used. Note! The definite trip alarm signal is active for 1 second. reclosing of the circuit breaker will end immediately after the AR function has received information that the circuit breaker has been closed. i. the fast stage should be set to be blocked by the AR function during shot 2 and 3. The AR function will be locked out in any of the following situations: • • • • the AR function generates a definite trip alarm the AR function is inhibited circuit-breaker closing fails manual circuit-breaker closing is detected The lockout signal will be reset and the AR function ready for shot initiation on expiration of the set reclaim time. Consequently.

1.112 standard.4.9. One is a special characteristic according to ABB praxis and is referred to as RI.9-1 Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Time/current characteristic settings Time/current characteristic Definite time IEC Extremely inverse IEC Very inverse IEC Normal inverse IEC Long-time inverse RI-type IEEE Extremely inverse IEEE Very inverse IEEE Moderately inverse IDMT characteristics according to IEC 60255-3 REF 610 provides four time/current curve groups which comply with the IEC 60255-3 standard: normal inverse. 34 . Inverse definite minimum time characteristics The low-set overcurrent and earth-fault stages can be given an inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristic. REF 610 provides eight IDMT characteristics. the shorter the operate time. and the operate time of the trip output contact. of which four comply with the IEC 60255-3 and three with the IEEE C37... × k t[s ] =  I  α    ----- – 1  I> where t = operate time I = phase (or earth-fault) current value k (or k0) = time multiplier I> (or I0>) = set start value Note! The actual operate time of the relay (see Fig.9.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 4.9. When the operate time of the relay is calculated as above. 4. The time/current characteristics can be selected either via the HMI or the SPA bus as follows: Table 4.4.4. approximately 30 ms should be added to the result.1.4. very inverse.-4). the operate time of the stage is dependent on the current value: the higher the current value.1.1. At IDMT characteristic.-1. extremely inverse and long-time inverse. includes an additional filter and detection time. The relationship between time and current is expressed as follows:   β  ----------------------. 4.Fig.

00E Extremely 2.34E 1.1.-4.01E 1. the operate time will be the same as when the ratio is 20.1.. very inverse or extremely inverse characteristic.1 times. The relay is to start before the current exceeds the set start value by 1.0 1.4.26E 1.7 times the set start value.22E 1.4.02E 1.Fig.00E Long time 2. 4..20 times the set start value at normal inverse.9-3 I/I> 2) 2 5 7 10 20 1) 2) Operate time tolerances specified by the standard 1) Normal 2.1.3 times. the normal current range is specified to be 2.01E 1.0 2.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 Table 4. At long-time inverse characteristic.13E 1.= not specified or I0/I0> Within the normal current range the inverse-time stage fulfils the tolerance requirements of class 5 at all degrees of inversity.00E - E = accuracy in percent. The time/current curve groups based on the IEC standard are illustrated in Fig. and the relay is to start before the current exceeds the set start value by 1. .26E 1.0 120 Time/current curve group According to the standard.1.44E 1..00E Very 2.9.9-2 Normal inverse Very inverse Extremely inverse Long-time inverse Values of constants α and β α 0. the normal current range is 2.02 1.34E 1. Table 4. Note! If the ratio between the current and the set start value is higher than 20..4. 4.5 80.-1.9.4.0 β 0.48E 1. 35 ...14 13.

0 0.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 t/s 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 k 1. 4.05 0.2 1 0.3 0.6 0.-1 Normal inverse-time characteristic 36 .7 0.03 0.2 0.5 0.9 0.07 0.7 0.6 0.9.8 0.1 0.04 0.1 0.08 0.5 0.02 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 20 I/I> Fig.1.09 0.9 0.4 0.4 0.8 0.4.3 0.06 0.05 IEC_NoInvREF610_a 0.

05 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 I/I> Fig.4.7 0.1 0.2 k 1.7 0.5 0.09 0.4 0.05 0.03 0.2 0.3 0.-2 Very inverse-time characteristic 37 IEC_VeInvREF610_a .3 0.06 0.08 0.4 0.9 0.9 0.1.8 0.02 0.6 0.1 0. 4.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 t/s 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0.6 0.04 0.8 0.5 0.0 0.07 0.9.

2 k 1.04 0.07 0.-3 Extremely inverse-time characteristic 38 IEC_ExInvREF610_a .06 0.4.02 0.5 0.3 0.05 0.6 0.1.9 0.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 t/s 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0.0 0.1 0.4 0.6 0. 4.03 0.8 0.3 0.09 0.9.7 0.08 0.1 0.8 0.2 0.4 0.05 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 I/I> Fig.

7 0.4.2 0.0 0.5 0.9 0.4 0.8 0.1 0. 4.-4 Long-time inverse-time characteristic 39 IEC_LoInvREF610_a .8 0.9.7 0.3 0.4 0.9 0.2 1 0.6 0.05 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 20 I/I> Fig.6 0.1.3 0.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 t/s 700 600 500 400 300 200 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 k 1.5 0.

1.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 IDMT characteristics according to the IEEE C37. 4. and the operate time of the trip output contact.4.4.0185 P 2.9..4.. 40 .112 REF 610 provides three time/current curve groups which comply with the IEEE C37. includes an additional filter and detection time.-7. When the operate time of the relay is calculated as above.4. Table 4.-5.1.1.0086 B 0.855 0. very inverse and moderately inverse. 4. approximately 30 ms should be added to the result.. 4.02 Time/current curve group The time/current curve groups based on the IEEE standard are illustrated in Fig..-7). The relationship between time and current is expressed as follows:     A t [ s ] =  ---------------------.0 2.1.4.407 2. P    I> – 1  where t = operate time I = phase (or earth-fault) current value n (or n0) = time dial I> (or I0>) = set start value Note! The actual operate time of the relay (see Fig.9. B and P A 6.Fig.0 0.9-4 Extremely inverse Very inverse Moderately inverse Values of constants A.9.112 standard: extremely inverse.025 0.9.0712 0. 4.Fig.-5.1.+ B × n I  ---.

9 0.4.1 0.07 0.08 0.03 0.-5 Extremely inverse-time characteristic 41 ANSI_ExInvREF610_a .9.05 0.06 0.5 0.09 0.04 0.1.6 0.4 0.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 t/s 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0.02 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 I/I> Fig.3 0. 4.8 0.7 0.2 n 15 12 10 8 6 5 4 3 0.

1.1 0.04 0.9.9 0.5 0.06 0.7 0.4 0.-6 Very inverse-time characteristic 42 ANSI_VeInvREF610_a .6 0.09 0. 4.02 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 I/I> Fig.03 0.4.05 0.07 0.3 0.2 12 10 8 6 5 4 3 2 0.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 t/s 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 n 15 1 0.08 0.8 0.

9.05 ANSI_MoInvREF610_a 0.9 0.09 0.08 0.03 0.3 0.02 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 I/I> Fig.04 0.7 0.-7 Moderately inverse-time characteristic 43 .06 0.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 t/s 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 n 15 12 10 8 1 0.6 0.4.5 0.1.4 0. 4.8 0.1 0.2 6 5 4 3 2 1 0.07 0.

-8.4. and the operate time of the trip output contact.1. 4. includes an additional filter and detection time.9.339 – 0.1. approximately 30 ms should be added to the result. 4.236 × ---I where t = operate time I = phase (or earth-fault) current value k (or k0) = time multiplier I> (or I0>) = set start value Note! The actual operate time of the relay (see Fig.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 RI-type characteristic The RI-type characteristic is a special characteristic which is principally used for obtaining time grading with mechanical relays.-8).4. 44 . When the operate time of the relay is calculated as above. The RI-type characteristic is illustrated in Fig. The relationship between time and current is expressed as follows: k t [ s ] = -------------------------------------------I> 0.9.

7 0.-8 RI-type characteristic 45 .07 0.5 0.03 0.9.05 0.7 0.8 0.5 0.4 1 0.8 0.9 0.6 0.02 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 20 I/I> Fig.1 0.04 RI_InvREF610_a 0.2 0.1.08 0.4.1 0. 4.2 0.05 0.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 t/s 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 k 1.4 0.06 0.3 0.0 0.09 0.9 0.3 0.6 0.

.. Table 4.0....04.05 5.05..50.30. one at a time.100% 1.0…15.0% In 0..1.05 s 100% 60 s 0.100% In 0..300 s Default setting 0.0 0.35.0 x In 0. setting groups 1 and 2..1.... Before the relay is connected to a system it must be assured that the relay has been given the correct settings.00 x In 0.1. This can be done in any of the following ways: • via the HMI • entering SPA parameter V150 via serial communication • via a digital input Note! Switching between setting groups via a digital input has higher priority than via the HMI or with V150.05 s 1.05 s 0 0..10-1 Setting values Setting I>/In t> IDMT I> k n tr> I>>/In t>> I>>>/In t>>> I0>/In t0> IDMT I0> k0 n0 tr0> I0>>/In t0>> ∆I> t∆> Iθ τ Description Start value of stage I> Operate time of stage I> Time/current characteristic for stage I> Time multiplier k Time multiplier n Resetting time of stage I> Start value of stage I>> Operate time of stage I>> Start value of stage I>>> Operate time of stage I>>> Start value of stage I0> Operate time of stage I0> Setting range 0. Either of these setting groups can be used as the actual settings..50 x In 1... the setting values should be read with the relay trip circuits disconnected or tested with current injection..05. The setting values can be altered via the HMI or with a PC provided with the Relay Setting Tool.04 s 0.2...35.50 x In 0.0 0.00 s 1.05.05..300 s 0.50.50 s 0.10..4.200 min 46 ..50 5. If there is any doubt..04 s 1.15.50 x In 0.05.05..0 s 1.30..300 s 10. Settings There are two alternative setting groups available.0 0.300 s 0..... a whole group of settings can be changed at the same time.2..05.8 0..4.1...04.5. Both groups have their related registers.1..05 s 0 0.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 4.0.05 1..0.300 s 0.00 1...30 x In 1 min Time/current characteristic for stage 0.0% In 0..0 0.30 x In 0... refer to section Check lists for additional information..05 s 0.8 I 0> Time multiplier k0 Time multiplier n0 Resetting time of stage I0> Start value of stage I0>> Operate time of stage I0>> Start value of stage ∆I> Operate time of stage ∆I> Full load current Time constant of stage θ> 0.400% In 0.30. By switching between the setting groups.0 x In 0..

1MRS 755310

Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual Table 4.1.4.10-1 Setting values
Setting θa> CBFP 0→1 Description Alarm level of stage θ> Operate time of CBFP Number of AR shots Setting range 50...100% θt>

REF 610

Default setting 95% θt>

ArcI> ArcI0>

Current limit ArcI> of stage ARC Current limit ArcI0> of stage ARC

0.10...60.0 s 0.10 s 0 = AR is not in use 0 1 = shot 1 2 = shot 1 and 2 3 = shot 1, 2 and 3 0.50...35.0 x In 2.50 x In 5.0...400% In 20.0% In

47

REF 610

Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual

1MRS 755310

Switchgroups and parameter masks
The settings can be altered and the functions of the relay selected in the SG_ selector switchgroups. The switchgroups are software based and thus not physical switches to be found in the hardware of the relay. A checksum is used for verifying that the switches have been properly set. The figure below shows an example of manual checksum calculation.
Switch number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Position 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 checksum x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Weighting factor 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 65536 131072 262144 524288 1048576 2097152 4194304 SG_ ∑ Value = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = 1 0 4 0 16 0 64 0 256 0 1024 0 4096 0 16384 0 65536 0 262144 0 1048576 0 4194304 5505024

Fig. 4.1.4.10.-1 An example of calculating the checksum of a SG_ selector switchgroup When the checksum, calculated according to the example above, equals the checksum of the switchgroup, the switches in the switchgroup have been properly set. The factory default settings of the switches and the corresponding checksums are presented in the tables below.

48

1MRS 755310

Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual

REF 610

SGF1...SGF5
Switchgroups SGF1...SGF5 are used for configuring the desired function as follows:
Table 4.1.4.10-2 SGF1
Switch SGF1/1 SGF1/2 SGF1/3 Function Selection of the latching feature for PO1 Selection of the latching feature for PO2 Selection of the latching feature for PO3 • When the switch is in position 0 and the measuring signal which caused the trip falls below the set start value, the output contact will return to its initial state. • When the switch is in position 1, the output contact will remain active although the measuring signal which caused the trip falls below the set start value. A latched output contact can be unlatched either via the HMI, a digital input or the serial bus. Minimum pulse length for SO1 and SO2 and optional SO3, SO4 and SO5 • 0=80 ms • 1=40 ms Minimum pulse length for PO1, PO2 and PO3 • 0=80 ms • 1=40 ms Note! The latching feature being selected for PO1, PO2 and PO3 will override this function. CBFP • 0 = CBFP is not in use • 1 = the signal to PO1 will start a timer which will generate a delayed signal to PO2, provided that the fault is not cleared before the CBFP operate time has elapsed. Trip lockout function • 0 = the trip lockout function is not in use. • 1 = the trip lockout function is in use. PO3 is dedicated to this function. External fault warning • When the switch is in position 1, the warning signal from the trip-circuit supervision or generated in case of continuous light on light sensor inputs is routed to SO2. Default setting 0 0 0

SGF1/4

0

SGF1/5

0

SGF1/6

0

SGF1/7

0

SGF1/8

0

ΣSGF1

0

49

REF 610

Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual

1MRS 755310

Table 4.1.4.10-3 SGF2
Switch SGF2/1 SGF2/2 SGF2/3 SGF2/4 SGF2/5 SGF2/6 SGF2/7 Function Operation mode of the start indication of stage I> Operation mode of the start indication of stage I>> Operation mode of the start indication of stage I>>> Operation mode of the start indication of stage I0> Operation mode of the start indication of stage I0>> Operation mode of the start indication of stage ∆I> Operation mode of the alarm indication of stage θ> • 0 = the start indication will automatically be cleared once the fault has disappeared • 1 = latching. The start indication will remain active although the fault has disappeared. Default setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

ΣSGF2

0

Table 4.1.4.10-4 SGF3
Switch SGF3/1 SGF3/2 SGF3/3 SGF3/4 SGF3/5 SGF3/6 SGF3/7 ΣSGF3 Function Inhibition of stage I>> Inhibition of stage I>>> Inhibition of stage I0>> Inhibition of stage ∆I> Inhibition of stage θ> Inhibition of stage ARC • When the switch is in position 1, the stage is inhibited. Inhibition of light signal output • When the switch is in position 1, the output is inhibited. Default setting 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 120

Table 4.1.4.10-5 SGF4
Switch SGF4/1 Function Automatic doubling of the start value of stage I>> • When the switch is in position 1, the set start value of the stage will be automatically doubled at high inrush situations. Inverse-time operation of stage I> inhibited by the start of stage I>> Inverse-time operation of stage I> inhibited by the start of stage I>>> • When the switch is in position 1, inverse-time operation is inhibited. Automatic doubling of the start value of stage I0>> • When the switch is in position 1, the set start value of the stage will be automatically doubled at high inrush situations. Inverse-time operation of stage I0> inhibited by the start of stage I0>> • When the switch is in position 1, inverse-time operation is inhibited. Default setting 0

SGF4/2 SGF4/3

0 0

SGF4/4

0

SGF4/5

0

50

4.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4..4.5/1 SGB1..10-7 SGB1... Default setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ΣSGF5 0 SGB1. Table 4.4. the programmable LED will be cleared. the DI2 signal with those of SGB2. ΣSGF4 0 Table 4.1. and so forth.1.1.5/3 0 51 . • When the switch is in position 1.SGB5 The DI1 signal is routed to the functions below with the switches of switchgroup SGB1. a digital input or the serial bus. the light signal output will be blocked by the trip signal from stage ARC..SGB5 Switch SGB1... A latched programmable LED can be cleared either via the HMI..10-6 SGF5 Switch SGF5/1 SGF5/2 SGF5/3 SGF5/4 SGF5/5 SGF5/6 SGF5/7 SGF5/8 Function Selection of the latching feature for programmable LED1 Selection of the latching feature for programmable LED2 Selection of the latching feature for programmable LED3 Selection of the latching feature for programmable LED4 Selection of the latching feature for programmable LED5 Selection of the latching feature for programmable LED6 Selection of the latching feature for programmable LED7 Selection of the latching feature for programmable LED8 • When the switch is in position 0 and the signal routed to the LED is reset..10-5 SGF4 Switch SGF4/6 Function REF 610 Default setting 0 Operation mode of light signal output • When the switch is in position 1. the programmable LED will remain lit although the signal routed to the LED is reset..5/2 Function • 0 = indications are not cleared by the digital input signal • 1 = indications are cleared by the digital input signal • 0 = indications are not cleared and latched output contacts are not unlatched by the digital input signal • 1 = indications are cleared and latched output contacts are unlatched by the digital input signal • 0 = indications and memorized values are not cleared and latched output contacts are not unlatched by the digital input signal • 1 = indications and memorized values are cleared and latched output contacts are unlatched by the digital input signal Default setting 0 0 SGB1.

5/4 Function 1MRS 755310 Default setting 0 SGB1.10-7 SGB1. When the digital input is energized.5/9 SGB1..5 Switching between setting groups 1 and 2 using the digital input • 0 = the setting group cannot be changed using the digital input • 1 = the setting group is changed by using the digital input...5/16 SGB1... The switchgroup checksum is obtained by vertically adding the weighting factors of all the selected switches of the switchgroup.5/15 SGB1..SGR8.5/18 SGB1.SGR8......5/12 SGB1.5/11 SGB1.1.SGR3 and to SO1.. the signals from the auto-reclose function and the external trip signal are combined with the output contacts by encircling the desired intersection point.. The start.PO3 with the switches of switchgroup SGR1.. The signals are routed to PO1.5/7 SGB1.. it is important that the switch has the same setting in both setting groups.. Note! The trip lockout signal is always routed to PO3....5/6 SGB1.5/13 SGB1.. 52 ..SGR8 The start.. Note! When SGB1..5/17 SGB1. trip and alarm signals from the protection stages..SO5 with those of SGR4..5/19 SGB1... the signals from the auto-reclose function... trip and alarm signals from the protection stages..5/5 SGB1...5/8 SGB1.. if not.5/20 ΣSGB1.. Note! The trip signal from CBFP is always routed to PO2.....SGB5 Switch SGB1.. setting group 2 will be activated.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4..5/10 SGB1.. The matrix below can be of help when making the desired selections...5/4 is set to 1....5/14 SGB1.... setting group 1 will be activated. and the external trip signal are routed to the output contacts with the switches of switchgroups SGR1. and the corresponding weighting factor of the switch is shown to the right in the matrix..4. Time synchronization by the digital input signal External tripping by the digital input signal External triggering of the CBFP by the digital input signal External triggering of the trip lockout by the digital input signal External arc signalling by the digital input signal Resetting of the trip lockout by the digital input signal Blocking of tripping of stage I> by the digital input signal Blocking of tripping of stage I>> by the digital input signal Blocking of tripping of stage I0> by the digital input signal Blocking of tripping of stage I0>> by the digital input signal Blocking of tripping of stage ∆I> by the digital input signal External AR inhibition by the digital input signal External inhibition of CB reclosing by the digital input signal CB position open CB position closed External AR initiation by the digital input signal 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SGR1. Each intersection point is marked with a switch number...

...8/9 SGR1..8/2 SGR1.. Trip Open CB Command Close CB Command Definite Trip Alarm CB Reclosing Failed PO2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 PO3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 SO1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 SO2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 SO3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 SO4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Weighting SO5 factor 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 65536 131072 262144 524288 1048576 2097152 4194304 Shot Due AR Lockout ARC Trip L> ΣSGR1 ΣSGR2 ΣSGR3 ΣSGR4 ΣSGR5 ΣSGR6 ΣSGR7 Checksum ΣSGR8 23 23 23 23 OutpSignREF610_a Fig..8/19 SGR1.8/21 SGR1.8/18 SGR1.8/6 SGR1.8/3 SGR1..1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 Note! The external fault warning is always routed to SO2...8/11 SGR1.8/15 SGR1.8/14 SGR1......8/12 SGR1....8/20 SGR1..8/7 SGR1..8/5 SGR1...8/22 SGR1.8/17 SGR1.-2 Output signal matrix 53 .8/23 I> t> I>> t>> I>>> t>>> I0 > t0 > I0>> t0>> ∆I> ∆t> θ> Alarm θ> Trip Ext..8/16 SGR1......8/10 SGR1.1....8/4 SGR1.4.... PS_I/O card Optional I/O card PO1 SGR1...8/8 SGR1.8/1 SGR1......10..8/13 SGR1... 4....

8/9 SGR1..... and so forth..8/23 ΣSGR1.... Table 4.8/2 SGR1. SGL1.10-8 SGR1....SGR5 SGR6.8/10 SGR1.1...8/8 SGR1..8/11 SGR1.. to LED2 with those of SGL2..8/7 SGL1..8/2 SGL1...........SGR3 SGR4...1...4..SGL8 The signals are routed to LED1 with the switches of switchgroup SGL1...8 1) Function Start signal from stage I> Trip signal from stage I> Start signal from stage I>> Trip signal from stage I>> Start signal from stage I>>> Trip signal from stage I>>> Start signal from stage I0> Trip signal from stage I0> Start signal from stage I0>> Trip signal from stage I0>> Start signal from stage ∆I> Trip signal from stage ∆I> Alarm signal from stage θ> Trip signal from stage θ> External trip signal Open CB command from AR Close CB command from AR Definite trip alarm signal from AR CB reclosing failed signal from AR Shot due signal from AR Lockout signal from AR Trip signal from stage ARC Light signal output SGR1........8/8 54 Function Trip signal from stage I> Trip signal from stage I>> Trip signal from stage I>>> Trip signal from stage I0> Trip signal from stage I0>> Trip signal from stage ∆I> Alarm signal from stage θ> Trip signal from stage θ> Default setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .8/12 SGR1..8/18 SGR1.SGR8 1) 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2108074 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5461 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 If the optional I/O module has not been installed..8/20 SGR1..SGR3 Default setting Switch SGR1..10-9 SGL1.8/6 SGL1.8/17 SGR1.8/6 SGR1.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 Table 4..8/21 SGR1..8/19 SGR1.8/1 SGR1..8/3 SGL1..4....8/14 SGR1. dashes will be shown on the LCD and “9999999” when the parameter is read via the SPA bus.........8/22 SGR1.8/1 SGL1..8/5 SGL1..8/7 SGR1...8/15 SGR1.8/16 SGR1.8/13 SGR1.8/3 SGR1....SGL8 Switch SGL1.....8/5 SGR1....8/4 SGR1...8/4 SGL1.

1.8/21 ΣSGL1.10-9 SGL1... and SG3 for inhibiting the AR function as follows: Table 4.....8/18 SGL1. ΣSG1 0 Default setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 55 .4.8/10 SGL1.SGL8 Function Trip lockout signal Definite trip alarm signal from AR Shot due signal from AR Lockout signal from AR CB position open CB position closed DI1 signal DI2 signal DI3 signal DI4 signal DI5 signal Trip signal from stage ARC Light signal output REF 610 Default setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Auto-reclose SG1...8/16 SGL1.8/12 SGL1.10-10SG1 Switch SG1/1 SG1/2 SG1/3 SG1/4 SG1/5 SG1/6 SG1/7 SG1/8 Function Blocking of initiation of shot 1 by the trip signal from stage I>> Blocking of initiation of shot 1 by the external AR initiation signal Blocking of initiation of shot 1 by the trip or delayed start signal from stage I> Blocking of initiation of shot 1 by the trip or delayed start signal from stage I0> or the trip signal from stage I0>> Blocking of initiation of shot 2 and 3 by the trip signal from stage I>> Blocking of initiation of shot 2 and 3 by the external AR initiation signal Blocking of initiation of shot 2 and 3 by the trip or delayed start signal from stage I> Blocking of initiation of shot 2 and 3 by the trip or delayed start signal from stage I0> or the trip signal from stage I0>> • When the switch is in position 1.. shot initiation is blocked...1.8/17 SGL1......SGL8 Switch SGL1..1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4.4.SG3 Switchgroup SG1 is used for blocking the initiation of one or several auto-reclose shots.8/13 SGL1..8/19 SGL1.. SG2 for blocking of protection stages at one or several auto-reclose shots.8/20 SGL1....8/9 SGL1.8/15 SGL1.8/14 SGL1.......8/11 SGL1.....

indications are reset when the AR function issues a reclosing command to the circuit breaker.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 Table 4.. the first trip indication will be displayed until the time.4.10-13 New trip indication timer Setting New trip indication Description New trip indication timer in minutes No new trip indication allowed until the previous one has been manually cleared. Default setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The blocking is active until the set cutout time or the set reclaim time elapses or the AR function is locked out.1. a new trip indication can displace the old one. After this.1. Table 4. the AR function is inhibited.4. Setting range 0..10-11SG2 1) Switch SG2/1 SG2/2 SG2/3 SG2/4 SG2/5 SG2/6 SG2/7 SG2/8 SG2/9 SG2/10 ΣSG2 1) Function Blocking of tripping of stage I> at shot 1 Blocking of tripping of stage I>> at shot 1 Blocking of tripping of stage I>>> at shot 1 Blocking of tripping of stage I0> at shot 1 Blocking of tripping of stage I0>> at shot 1 Blocking of tripping of stage I> at shots 2 and 3 Blocking of tripping of stage I>> at shots 2 and 3 Blocking of tripping of stage I>>> at shots 2 and 3 Blocking of tripping of stage I0> at shots 2 and 3 Blocking of tripping of stage I0>> at shots 2 and 3 • When the switch is in position 1. setting value. as specified by the NEW TRIP IND.998 999 Default setting 60 56 . the stage is blocked.10-12SG3 Switch SG3/1 SG3/2 SG3/3 SG3/4 Function Inhibition of the AR function by the trip signal from stage I>>> Inhibition of the AR function by the trip signal from stage I0>> Inhibition of the AR function by the alarm signal from stage θ> Inhibition of the AR function by the trip signal from stage ∆I> • When the switch is in position 1. has expired. Resetting indications at CB reclosing • When the switch is in position 1.1. When several protection stages trip. Table 4. Default setting 1 1 1 1 SG3/5 0 ΣSG3 15 New trip indication timer The new trip indication timer can be configured to allow a second trip indication on the LCD. setting. The basic protection functions are not affected by the NEW TRIP IND.4.

57 ... Note! When all switches have been set to zero.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 Non-volatile memory settings The table below presents data which can be configured to be stored in the battery backed-up non-volatile memory.10-14 Memory settings Setting Non-volatile memory settings Switch 1 Function • 0 = operation indication messages and LEDs will be cleared • 1 = operation indication messages and LEDs will be retained 1) • 1 = disturbance recorder data will be retained1) • 1 = event codes will be retained 1) • 1 = recorded data and information on the number of starts of the protection stages will be retained 1) • 1 = the real-time clock will be running also during loss of auxiliary voltage 1) Default setting 1 2 3 4 1 1 1 5 1 Checksum 1) 31 The prerequisite is that the battery has been inserted and is charged.5 either via the HMI or the SPA bus. All of the functions mentioned below can be selected separately with switches 1.1. Table 4. the battery supervision will be disabled.4.

3.2.0 x In 1) At IDMT characteristic.1.96 ±2% of the set operate time or ±25 ms • at IDMT characteristic according to IEC 60255-3: accuracy class index E • at IDMT characteristic according to IEEE C37.0 x In Set start value...300 s 0.00 x In • at IDMT characteristic 0..0 x In • 5...05% In ±3% of the set start value ±3% of the set start value ±3% of the set start value ±3% of the set start value ±3% of the set start value Operation accuracy • 0.11-1 Stages I>..04.30.2. but regards any setting >2....50..0.0 x In Stage I>>> 0.00 Extremely inverse Very inverse Moderately inverse 1.5 x In..112 • at RI-type characteristic ±7% of the calculated operate time ±7% of the calculated operate time ±5% of the set start value or 0.04.5.30. I>> and I>>> • at definite-time characteristic 0.5 x In • 0.1.. Technical data on protection functions Table 4.300 s • IDMT according to IEC 60255-3 Extremely inverse Very inverse Normal inverse Long-time inverse time multiplier.35.50 x In 1) 30 ms Start time.4.96 ±2% of the set operate time or ±25 ms 5 50 ms 30 ms 0..35.05.15 50 ms 2) 30 ms 0. maximum Retardation time.05. 2) Resetting time of the trip signal.4.11. typical Set resetting time.50.. t>> and t>>> 0... I>> and I>>> Feature Stage I> Stage I>> 0. typical Operate time accuracy • at definite-time characteristic 50 ms 30 ms 0...5 x In for stage I>.05.. k 0. k • IDMT according to IEEE C37.. t>.. the relay allows settings above 2.5.5 x In as equal to 2.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 4..00 • Special type of IDMT RI-type inverse characteristic time multiplier. n Resetting time..35...50 s 0. 58 .1.1... typical 55 ms 30 ms Time/current characteristic • definite-time operate time. I>. tr Drop-off/pick-up ratio.5.0.05.112 0..300 s time dial.96 ±2% of the set operate time or ±25 ms 0.

0. maximum Retardation time. k0 • IDMT according to IEEE C37.05.300 s • IDMT according to IEC 60255-3 Extremely inverse Very inverse Normal inverse Long-time inverse 0.0.300 s 0.04. tr0 Drop-off/pick-up ratio.2. typical Time/current characteristic • definite time operate time. typical Operate time accuracy • at definite-time characteristic • at IDMT characteristic according to IEC 60255-3: accuracy class index E • at IDMT characteristic according to IEEE C37..0% In • 10..1.4 x In for stage I0>.11-2 Stages I0> and I0>> Feature Set start value. I0> and I0>> • at definite-time characteristic • at IDMT characteristic Start time.00 Extremely inverse Very inverse Moderately inverse 1. the relay allows settings above 0. k0 • Special type of IDMT characteristic time multiplier. but regards any setting >0.4 x In.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 Table 4..05.05% In ±3% of the set start value ±5% of the set start value or 0.....10...05...00 time multiplier. typical Set resetting time.. Resetting time of the trip signal.100% In • 100.40% In 1) 60 ms 40 ms 5.4.4 x In as equal to 0...0. 59 .112 RI-type inverse 0..96 ±2% of the set operate time or ±25 ms 5 50 ms 30 ms 0..05.. n0 Resetting time..0..15 50 ms 2) 30 ms 0..50 s 0....400% In 1) 2) At IDMT characteristic.400% In Stage I0> Stage I0>> 0.1.1. t0> and t0>> 1..0.96 ±2% of the set operate time or ±25 ms time dial.112 • at RI-type characteristic ±7% of the calculated operate time ±7% of the calculated operate time ±5% of the set start value or 0.100% In 1.05% In ±3% of the set start value ±3% of the set start value Operation accuracy • 1.

Iθ Set alarm level. θa> Trip level..2 Value 0.11-5 Stage ARC and L> Feature Stage ARC Set current limit • ArcI> • ArcI0> Operate time Resetting time Operation accuracy L> Activation time of L> Resetting time 1) Value 0. ∆I> • at definite-time characteristic Start time...4..11-3 Stage θ> Feature Set full load current.5.... 60 . θt> Time constant. typical Operate time accuracy • at definite-time characteristic Value 10. maximum Drop-off/pick-up ratio. τ Operate time accuracy • I/Iθ >1.100% 100% 1..1.300 s 70 ms 0..REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 Table 4. typical Time/current characteristics • definite time operate time.5) is used.4.100% 100 ms 1.1..1.100% Table 4.1...35... t∆> Resetting time...50 x In 50..4.3 ms will be added..90 ±2% of the set operate time or ±25 ms ±3% of the set start value and ±1 unit Operation accuracy • 10.30..400% In < 15 ms 1) 30 ms ±7% of the set start value < 15 ms 20 ms Applies only if a signal output contact (SO1. 2..200 min ±2% of the set operate time or ±1 s Table 4. If a power output contact (PO1.11-4 Stage ∆I> Feature Set start value.3) is used.0.0 x In 5...

300 s 0.1.60.11-6 Auto-reclose function Feature Number of shots CB Closing time Start delay of stage I> Start delay of stage I0> Reclaim time Cutout time Dead time of shot 1 Dead time of shot 2 Dead time of shot 3 Operate time accuracy Value 0.1. 4.300 s 3..1.1......11-7 CBFP Feature Set operate time Phase-current threshold for external triggering of the CBFP • pick-up/drop-off Value 0...10.-1 Relative sensitivity of lens sensors Table 4.4.04 x In 61 .0 s 0..1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 ArcSensitREF610_a Fig...300 s 0.1.10 s 0.300 s 0.11.300 s 0..08/0..4.1...300 s 0...3 0.300 s ±2% of the set time and ±25 ms Table 4..1.1...4.

which will activate the trip-circuit supervision. for instance. Under normal operating conditions.5 mA • Rext = external shunt resistor • Rint = internal shunt resistor. Uc 48 V dc 60 V dc 110 V dc 220 V dc The circuit breaker is to be provided with two external contacts. If the external trip circuit’s resistance is too high or the internal circuit’s too low. The closing contact is to be connected in parallel with the external shunt resistor.. the applied external voltage is divided between the relay’s internal circuit and the external trip circuit so that at least 20 V remains over the relay’s internal circuit.2 kΩ. whereas too low a resistance may cause faulty operation of the trip coil. which in turn will result in the operation conditions not being fulfilled. 5 W 5. a constant current is forced to flow through the external trip circuit. one opening and one closing contact. the voltage over the relay’s internal circuit will fall below 20 V (15. If the resistance of the trip circuit exceeds a certain limit. and trip-circuit supply failure.1. due to welded relay contacts. Rext: Table 4. the trip-circuit supervision will be activated and a warning will appear on the LCD together with a fault code.5-1 Recommended values for Rext Shunt resistor Rext 1. for instance. The operation condition is: U c – ( R ext + R int + R s ) × I c ≥ 20Vac ⁄ dc where • Uc = operating voltage over the supervised trip circuit • Ic = current flowing through the trip circuit.1.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 4. which will enable trip-circuit supervision when the circuit breaker is 62 . The trip-circuit supervision is based on the constant current injection principle: by applying an external voltage. 1 kΩ • Rs = trip coil resistance The external shunt resistor is used to enable trip-circuit supervision also when the circuit breaker is open.. both when the circuit breaker is open and closed.20 V). 5 W 33 kΩ.5. due to oxidation or a bad contact. The following values are recommended for the external resistor. The resistance of the external shunt resistor is to be calculated so that it does not cause malfunction of the trip-circuit supervision or affect the operation of the trip coil. The warning signal from the trip-circuit supervision can also be routed to SO2 by setting switch SGF1/ 8 to 1. 5 W 22 kΩ. ~1. 5 W Operating voltage. Too high a resistance will cause too high a voltage drop.6 kΩ. Trip-circuit supervision The trip-circuit supervision (TCS) detects open circuits.

1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 closed. When the contacts have opened. but not before the signal which activated the function has been reset. This function is useful when the trip output contact of the relay is latched or the open circuit of the circuit breaker remains activated. which will enable trip-circuit supervision when the circuit breaker is open. 63 . When selected. Trip-circuit supervision can be selected either via the HMI or with SPA parameter V113.-1.1. PO3 will be dedicated to this function.1.1. Every signal which has been routed to PO3 via the output signal matrix will activate the trip lockout function and open the contacts of PO3.6. PO3 will be closed. As long as no trip occurs. see Fig. 4. 4. The opening contact. on the contrary. is to be connected in series with the external shunt resistor.5. they will be locked into the open state. The trip lockout function can also be activated externally. via a digital input. Trip lockout function The trip lockout function is used to prevent accidental closing of the circuit breaker after a trip. The trip lockout function can be reset via a digital input.5. X4.1 18 Rint + PO1 Rext 19 Rs TCS 16 17 7 SO2 8 - HW SW 6 SGF1/8 TCSopenREF610_a TRIP-CIRCUIT SUPERVISION TCS STATE WARNING HMI Fig.-1 Connecting the trip-circuit supervision using two external contacts and the external resistor in the trip circuit 4. the HMI or SPA parameter V103. The trip lockout function is selected in SGF1. The trip lockout function must be locally reset with a separate reset command before the circuit breaker can be closed again.

Demand values REF 610 provides three different kinds of demand values. the trip lockout function will be activated and the contacts of PO3 will remain open when the auxiliary power is switched on again.. The counters can be read via the HMI or SPA parameters V9.1. Each overcurrent stage (I>. which count the number of trip signals generated to the circuit breaker by REF 610. Trip counters for circuit-breaker condition monitoring The trip counters for circuit-breaker condition monitoring provide history data. The second value shows the average current during an adjustable time range. the message with the highest priority will appear on the LCD.1.7. Indicator LEDs and operation indication messages The operation of REF 610 can be monitored via the HMI by means of LED indications and text messages on the LCD. with an accuracy of one 64 . whereas there is a common trip counter for stages I0>. With this information. 4. The first value shows the average current of all three phases measured during one minute. If no battery has been inserted.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 In case of loss of auxiliary power when the trip lockout function is in use. the AR function (Open CB Command) and the external trip. In addition. If different types of indications are activated simultaneously. the corresponding counter value will be increased by one.9.1. there are eight programmable LEDs and an indicator LED for front communication. Trip 3. it will roll over. CBFP 2. ranging from 0 to 999 minutes.8. the service cycle can be estimated for the future. There are separate counters for the different protection stages because breaking the current in different fault situations wears the circuit breaker differently. The monitoring function consists of four counters. I0>>. Start/Alarm 4. a yellow indicator LED (start/alarm) and a red indicator LED (trip).V12 and cleared via SPA parameter V166. Every time a stage generates a trip signal. only the counter of the stage which tripped first will be incremented. On the front panel of the relay there are three indicator LEDs with fixed functionality: a green indicator LED (ready). Refer to the Operator’s Manual for a more thorough presentation. The priority order of the messages: 1. Note! In case several stages trip during the same fault sequence. When a counter reaches its maximum value. which can be used for circuit-breaker service scheduling.. ∆I>. provided that the battery has been inserted and is charged. the contacts of PO3 will return to the same state as before the loss. The value is updated once a minute. I>> and I>>>) has its own trip counter. The messages on the LCD have a certain priority order. θ> and ARC. The number of trips is stored in the non-volatile EEPROM memory. 4.

1. After the recorder has been triggered.11. The demand values will also be reset if SPA parameter V105 is changed or the relay is reset. Triggering of the recorder will generate an event code. The maximum value is the highest one-minute mean value since the last reset.. The third value shows the highest one-minute average current value measured during the previous time range. if the time range is set to zero. the recording can be uploaded and analysed by means of a PC provided with a special program. Disturbance recorder Function REF 610 features an integrated disturbance recorder for recording monitored quantities. The demand values can be set to zero through serial communication using SPA parameter V102. 4. The digital input test is used for testing the connections to the relay.. As soon as the recorder has been triggered and the recording has finished. By selecting this test..1. 4. the internal signals from the protection stages.1.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 minute. 4.10. However. 4.. whose data is stored either as RMS curves or as momentary measured values. Disturbance recorder data One recording contains data from the four analogue channels and up to eight digital channels. Provided that the signals have been set to be routed to the output contacts (PO1. However.1. it will continue to record data for a pre-defined post-triggering time. The analogue channels. Refer to the Operator’s Manual for instructions on how to perform the tests. Commissioning tests The following two product functions can be used during the commissioning of the relay: function test and digital input test. activation of the internal signals from the protection stages. the output contacts will be activated and their corresponding event codes generated when the test is run. the signals from the auto-reclose function.11.. are the currents measured by the relay. This value is updated at the expiration of each time range. The status of the recording can also be viewed using SPA parameter V246.. the external trip signal and the IRF function can be activated one by one. only the one-minute and the maximum demand value will be shown.2.SO5) with the switches of SGR1.1. the external trip signal and the IRF function will not generate an event code. The recorder continuously captures the curve forms of the currents as well as the status of both internal and digital input signals and stores these in the memory.11. The digital 65 . An asterisk will be shown on the LCD on completion of the recording.8. The function test is used for testing the configuration as well as the connections from the relay. The state of the digital inputs can be monitored via the HMI.PO3 and SO1.

This. indicating whether the recorder 66 . a complete recording will have been created. M2 and V246. Triggering of the recorder immediately after it has been cleared or the auxiliary voltage connected may result in a shortened total recording length.11. The digital signals to be stored are selected with parameters V238 and V243. The recording length varies according to the selected sampling frequency. The user can select up to eight digital signals to be recorded. see the table below for details.1. By the time the post-triggering recording finishes.17-6 and 4. triggered recorder data will be retained in the memory provided that it has been defined non-volatile. but before the recording has finished. Control and indication of disturbance recorder status It is possible to control and monitor the recording status of the disturbance recorder by writing to and reading SPA parameters M1. At a power reset. however.1. Table 4. starting with the internal signals followed by the digital input signals.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 channels. may result in a shortened post-triggering recording length. see tables 4. The post-triggering recording length defines the time during which the recorder continues to store data after it has been triggered. Reading SPA parameter V246 will return either the value 0 or 1. V238 and V243 is allowed only when the recorder is not triggered. no data stored prior to the triggering will be retained in the memory.3.11.1.2-1 Sampling frequency Nominal frequency Hz 50 Sampling frequency Hz 800 400 50 1) 960 480 60 1) 1) Cycles 250 500 4000 250 500 4000 60 RMS curve. the first eight signals will be stored. The sampling frequency is selected with SPA parameter M15. Recording length: Cycles [ s ] = ---------------------------------------------------------------Nominal frequency [ Hz ] Changing the setting values of parameters M15. If the post-triggering recording length has been defined to be the same as the total recording length.1. If more than eight signals are selected. on the other hand. 4. the signals from the auto-reclose function and the digital input signals linked to the relay. referred to as digital signals. Disconnection of the auxiliary voltage after the recorder has been triggered. will not affect the total recording length. The length can be changed with SPA parameter V240. The RMS curve is recorded by selecting the sampling frequency to be the same as the nominal frequency of the relay. are start and trip signals from the protection stages.17-7. the alarm signal from stage θ>.

1MRS 755310

Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual

REF 610

has not been triggered or triggered and ready to be uploaded. Event code E31 will be generated the moment the disturbance recorder is triggered. If the recorder is ready to be uploaded, this will also be indicated by an asterisk shown in the lower right-hand corner of the LCD when it is in the idle mode. Writing the value 1 to SPA parameter M2 will clear the recorder memory, restart the recording of new data and enable the triggering of the recorder. Recorder data can be cleared by performing a master reset, i.e. clearing indications and memorized values and unlatching output contacts. Writing the value 2 to SPA parameter V246 will restart the unloading process by setting the time stamp and the first data ready to be read.

4.1.11.4.

Triggering
The user can select one or several internal or digital input signals to trigger the disturbance recorder, either on the rising or falling edge of the signal(s). Triggering on the rising edge means that the post-triggering recording sequence will start when the signal is activated. Correspondingly, triggering on the falling edge means that the post-triggering recording sequence will start when the active signal is reset. The trigger signal(s) and the edge are selected with SPA parameters V236...V237 and V241...V242; see tables 4.1.17-6 and 4.1.17-7. The recorder can also be triggered manually with SPA parameter M1. Triggering of the disturbance recorder is only possible if the recorder has not already been triggered.

4.1.11.5.

Settings and unloading
The setting parameters for the disturbance recorder are V parameters V236...V238, V240...V243 and V246, and M parameters M15, M18, M20 and M80...M83. Unloading correct information from the recorder requires that M80 and M83 have been set. Unloading is done using a PC application. The uploaded recorder data is stored in separate files defined by the comtrade format.

4.1.11.6.

Event code of the disturbance recorder
The disturbance recorder generates an event code on triggering (E31) and clearing (E32) the recorder. The event mask is determined using SPA parameter V155.

4.1.12.

Recorded data of the last events
REF 610 records up to five events. This enables the user to analyze the last five fault conditions in the electrical power network. Each event includes the measured currents, start durations and time stamp, for instance. Additionally, information on the number of starts, trips and auto-reclose shots is provided. Recorded data is non-volatile by default, provided that the battery has been inserted and is charged. A master reset, i.e. clearing of indications and memorized values and unlatching of output contacts, will erase the contents of the stored events and the number of starts.

67

REF 610

Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual

1MRS 755310

Note! The number of trips and auto-reclose shots is stored in the non-volatile EEPROM memory and will thus not be cleared when performing a master reset. The number of trips can be erased by entering the value 1 and the number of auto-reclose shots by entering the value 2 into parameter V166. REF 610 collects data during fault conditions. When all start or thermal alarm signals have been reset or a stage trips, the collected data and time stamp will be stored as “EVENT1” and the previously stored events will move one step forward. When a sixth event is stored, the oldest event will be cleared.
Table 4.1.12-1 Recorded data
REGISTER Data description EVENT1 • Phase current L1, measured as a multiple of the rated current, In, is displayed in two registers: the main register and the sub register. When a stage starts but does not trip, the maximum fault current during the pick-up period will be stored in both the main register and the sub register. When a stage trips, the fault current at the time of the trip will be stored in the main register and the maximum fault current during the pick-up period in the sub register. The same applies to phase currents L2, L3 and I0. • The phase unbalance, ∆I, as a percentage of the maximum phase current value. When the stage starts but does not trip, the maximum phase unbalance value during the pick-up period will be stored. When the stage trips, the fault unbalance at the time of the trip will be stored. • Thermal level, as a percentage of the maximum thermal level of the cable, at activation of a start or alarm signal. If the thermal protection stage has been set out of operation, dashes will be shown on the LCD and “999” when read via serial communication. • The maximum thermal level during the time the start or alarm signal was active, as a percentage of the maximum thermal level of the cable, or in case of a trip, the thermal level, as a percentage of the maximum thermal level of the cable, at activation of a trip signal. If the thermal protection stage has been set out of operation, dashes will be shown on the LCD and “999” when read via serial communication. • Duration of the starts of stages I>, I>>, I>>>, ∆I, I0> and I0>>, the trip of stage ARC (local), the trip of stage ARC (remote), and of the external trip. A value other than zero indicates that the corresponding stage has started whereas the value 100% indicates that the operate time of the stage has elapsed, i.e. the stage has tripped. If the operate time of a stage has elapsed but the stage is blocked, the value will be 99% of the set or calculated operate time. • Trip number in the auto-reclose sequence. The number 1...20 indicates the order of the trip in the AR sequence. The value 1 indicates the first trip in the AR sequence, the value 2 the second trip, and so forth. On expiration of the set reclaim time, the value will start from 1 again. If the AR function has been set out of operation, the value will always be 1. • Time stamp for the event. The time when the collected data was stored. The time stamp is displayed in two registers, one including the date expressed as yy-mm-dd, and the other including the time expressed as HH.MM; SS.sss. Same as EVENT 1. Same as EVENT 1. Same as EVENT 1. Same as EVENT 1. • The number of times each protection stage, I>, I>>, I>>>, ∆I, I0> and I0>>, has started, counting up to 999.

EVENT 2 EVENT 3 EVENT 4 EVENT 5 Number of starts

68

1MRS 755310

Feeder Protection Relay
Technical Reference Manual Table 4.1.12-1 Recorded data
REGISTER Data description Number of trips

REF 610

Number of AR shots

• The number of times each protection stage, I>, I>> and I>>>, has tripped. When the counters reach their maximum values (65535), it will roll over. • The number of times protection stages I0>, I0>>, θ> and ARC has tripped, external trips, and the number of times the AR function has issued an opening command to the circuit breaker. When the counter reaches its maximum value (65535), it will roll over. • Number of AR shots (shot 1) initiated by the trip signal from stage I>>, counting up to 255 • Number of AR shots (shot 1) initiated by the digital input signal, counting up to 255 • Number of AR shots (shot 1) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage I>, counting up to 255 • Number of AR shots (shot 1) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage I0>, counting up to 255 • Number of AR shots (shot 2) initiated by the trip signal from stage I>>, counting up to 255 • Number of AR shots (shot 2) initiated by the digital input signal, counting up to 255 • Number of AR shots (shot 2) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage I>, counting up to 255 • Number of AR shots (shot 2) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage I0>, counting up to 255 • Number of AR shots (shot 3) initiated by the trip signal from stage I>>, counting up to 255 • Number of AR shots (shot 3) initiated by the digital input signal, counting up to 255 • Number of AR shots (shot 3) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage I>, counting up to 255 • Number of AR shots (shot 3) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage I0>, counting up to 255

4.1.13.

Communication ports
REF 610 is provided with an optical communication port (infrared) on the front panel. Rear communication is optional and requires a communication module, which can be provided with either a plastic fibre-optic, combined fibre-optic (plastic and glass) or RS-485 connection. The relay is connected to an automation system via the rear connection. The optional rear communication module allows the use of either the SPA bus, IEC 60870-5-103 or Modbus communication protocol. For connection to the DNP 3.0 communication system, REF 610 can be provided with an optional DNP 3.0 rear communication module with RS-485 connection. For further information on optional rear communication module connections, refer to section Serial communication connections.

69

REF 610 has a counter which can be accessed via COMMUNICATION under CONFIGURATION in the HMI menu. the setting value will remain unchanged. Connecting REF 610 to a fibre-optic communication bus requires a fibre-optic communication module. no 1MRS050698). 4.1. When setting values are altered via the front communication port. IEC 60870-5-103 remote communication protocol REF 610 supports the IEC 60870-5-103 remote communication protocol (henceforward referred to as the IEC_103) in the unbalanced transmission mode.14. The cable has a fixed baud rate of 9. The line-idle state of the fibre-optic communication module can be selected either via the HMI or the SPA bus. The following serial communication parameters are to be set for RS-232: • Number of data bits • Number of stop bits • Parity • Baud rate 7 1 even 9.1. The cable is connected to the serial RS-232 port of the PC. the IEC_103 protocol cannot be used to transfer disturbance recorder data. the relay will check that the entered parameter values are within the permitted setting range. The front connection can be used in two different ways: wirelessly using a PC compatible to the IrDA Standard specifications or using a specific front communication cable (ABB art. If an entered value is too high or too low.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 FrConREF 610_a Fig. The front connection allows the use of the SPA bus protocol only. The optical front connection galvanically isolates the PC from the relay.-1 Front connection (1) for local communication The relay is connected to a PC used for local parameterization via the infrared port on the front panel. However.6 kbps.13. the line-idle state is 70 . The optical stage of the cable is powered by RS-232 control signals. The IEC_103 protocol is used to transfer measurand and status data from the slave to the master.6 kbps Relay data such as events. According to the IEC_103 standard. The IEC_103 protocol can be used only through the rear connection of the relay on the optional communication module. The counter value is set to zero when the relay receives a valid message. setting values and all input data and memorized values can be read via the front communication port. however. 4.

. To ensure communication. Configuration set 2 includes additional information. output contact events 6. 71 . The tables below indicate the information mapping of the corresponding configuration sets.g.DI5)..8 (SO3. the line-idle state should be the same for both the master and the slave device. REF 610 is provided with two different selectable configuration sets. If not defined by the standard. The measurand multiplied by the normalize factor is proportional to the rated value.5 (DI3. all events in the selected configuration set will be included in the event reporting. e. event masks are not in use..1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 “light on”. The relative time in messages with the type identification 2 is calculated as a time difference between the occurred event and the event specified in the column Relative time... Function type and information number have been mapped into configuration sets according to the IEC_103 standard to the extent that these have been defined by the standard. the default being loop. REF 610 will use the SPA bus protocol as default when the optional communication module is in use. Configuration set 1 is intended to be used when the optional I/O module has not been installed. the type of function and/or the information number have/has been mapped into a private range. According to the IEC_103 standard. Therefore.SO5) and digital input events 3. The baud rate can be selected either via the HMI or the SPA bus. The protocol selection is memorized and will therefore always be activated when the rear connection is in use.. the baud rate is 9. The connection topology can be selected to be either loop or star.. The column GI indicates whether the status of the specified information object is transmitted within the general interrogation cycle. When the IEC_103 protocol is active. provided that the optional I/O module has been installed. however. of which configuration set 1 is used by default. The selected line-idle state and connection topology apply irrespective of which rear communication protocol is active. the maximum value of each measurand is the normalize factor multiplied by the rated value. and either via the HMI or the SPA bus.6 kbps.. Consequently.

1.14-1 Information mapping of configuration set 1 and 2 Configuration set 2 Configuration set 1 Type identification 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 Information number Event code Function type Event reason Disturbance recorder Triggered/Cleared HMI Password Opened/Closed I> Start/Reset E31/ E32 E33/ E34 1E1/ 1E2 1E3/ 1E4 1E5/ 1E6 1E7/ 1E8 1E9/ 1E10 1E11/ 1E12 1E13/ 1E14 1E15/ 1E16 1E17/ 1E18 1E19/ 1E20 1E21/ 1E22 1E23/ 1E24 1E25/ 1E26 1E27/ 1E28 1E29/ 1E30 1E31/ 1E32 1E33/ 1E34 1E35/ 1E36 X X 178 100 - X X 178 101 - X X 160 84 X I> Trip/Reset X X 160 90 - I>> Start/Reset X X 162 94 X I>> Trip/Reset X X 160 91 - I>>> Start/Reset X X 162 96 X I>>> Trip/Reset X X 162 98 - I0> Start/Reset I0> Trip/Reset I0>> Start/Reset I0>> Trip/Reset ∆I> Start/Reset ∆I> Trip/Reset θ> Start/Reset θ> Alarm/Reset θ> Trip/Reset X X 160 67 X X X 160 92 - X X 162 95 X X X 160 93 - X X 173 84 X X X 173 90 - X X 184 84 X X X 184 11 X X X 184 90 - ARC (light and current) Trip/Reset ARC (DI and current) Trip/Reset Arc light signal output Activated/Reset X X 100 90 - X X 100 50 - X X 100 20 - 72 Relative time 1E1 1E1 1E5 1E5 1E9 1E9 1E13 1E13 1E17 1E17 1E21 1E21 1E25 1E25 1E31 1E33 - GI .REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 Table 4.

1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4.1.14-1 Information mapping of configuration set 1 and 2 Configuration set 1 Configuration set 2 REF 610 Event reason Trip Lockout/Reset 1E37/ 1E38 1E39/ 1E40 1E41/ 1E42 2E1/ 2E2 2E3/ 2E4 2E5/ 2E6 2E7/ 2E8 2E9/ 2E10 2E11/ 2E12 2E13/ 2E14 2E15/ 2E16 2E17/ 2E18 2E19/ 2E20 2E21/ 2E22 2E23/ 2E24 2E25/ 2E26 3E1/ 3E2 3E3/ 3E4 3E5/ 3E6 3E7/ 3E8 X X 10 223 X - External Trip/Reset X X 10 222 - - CBFP Activated/ Reset PO1 Activated/Reset X X 160 85 - - X X 251 27 X - PO2 Activated/Reset X X 251 28 X - PO3 Activated/Reset X X 251 29 X - SO1 Activated/Reset X X 251 30 X - SO2 Activated/Reset X X 251 31 X - SO3 Activated/Reset - X 251 32 X - SO4 Activated/Reset - X 251 33 X - SO5 Activated/Reset - X 251 34 X - DI1 Activated/ Deactivated DI2 Activated/ Deactivated DI3 Activated/ Deactivated DI4 Activated/ Deactivated DI5 Activated/ Deactivated Shot 1 Initiated/ Ended Shot 2 Initiated/ Ended Shot 3 Initiated/ Ended CB Position Open/Closed X X 249 231 X - X X 249 232 X - - X 249 233 X - - X 249 234 X - - X 249 235 X - X X 169 101 - - X X 169 102 - - X X 169 103 - - X X 240 160 - - Type identification 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 73 Information number Event code Function type Relative time GI .

1.14-2 Information mapping of configuration set 1 and 2 Configuration set 1 Configuration set 2 Type identification 9 Rated value Measurand Current IL1 Current IL2 Current IL3 Current I0 2.14-1 Information mapping of configuration set 1 and 2 Configuration set 1 Configuration set 2 1MRS 755310 Event reason Definite Trip Alarm/ Reset AR Lockout/Reset 3E9/ 3E10 3E11/ 3E12 3E13/ 3E14 3E15/ 3E16 3E17/ 3E18 3E19/ 3E20 3E21/ 3E22 X X 169 150 - - X X 169 164 - - Open CB Command/ Reset Close CB Command/ Reset CB Reclosing Failed/ Reset CB Reclosing Inhibited/Reset AR Cancelled/Reset X X 169 127 - - X X 169 128 - - X X 169 163 - - X X 169 162 - - X X 169 130 - - Table 4. 74 Information number Normalize factor Function type 140 Type identification 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Information number Event code Function type Relative time GI . refer to “Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference Guide PI-MBUS-300 Rev. 4. Both the link mode and the line setting parameters are user-configurable. Modbus remote communication protocol Protocol overview The master/slave protocol Modbus was first introduced by Modicon Inc.15. For the protocol definition.1.40 2.40 2. and is widely accepted as a communication standard for industrial device controllers and PLCs.15. E”.1.1.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4.40 2.1. The implementation of the Modbus protocol in REF 610 supports both the RTU and the ASCII link mode.40 In In In In X X X X X X X X 135 4.

1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 The character codings of the link modes follow the protocol definition. the data addresses in table 4. coils as 0X. Therefore.15.15. Note! The data address range in the Modbus network follows the protocol definition and starts from 0. no bit if parity is not used 1 stop bit if parity is used. CRC byte order and baud rate. The RTU character format is presented in table 4.1. the turnaround time can vary between approximately 20 and 100 milliseconds. However.15.1.2.1-2 ASCII character format Coding system Bits per character Two ASCII characters representing a hexadecimal number 1 start bit 7 data bits.1.1-1 RTU character format Coding system Bits per character 8-bit binary 1 start bit 8 data bits. i. HR 123. can be adjusted either via the HMI or the SPA bus. 75 .1. of which the former will be used here.15. the least significant bit is sent first 1 bit for even/odd parity.1. Note! The Modbus data type digital input (DI) is commonly also referred to as 1X. Thus.15. no bit if parity is not used 1 stop bit if parity is used.1-2: Table 4. parity. Profile of Modbus REF 610 The Modbus protocol (ASCII or RTU) is selected via the HMI and can be used only through the rear connection of the relay on the optional communication module.1-1 and the ASCII character format in table 4. can also be referred to as register 400123.15. the least significant bit is sent first 1 bit for even/odd parity. 4. a turnaround timeout no lower than 150 ms is recommended for the Modbus master. 2 stop bits if parity is not used Table 4. Modbus line settings. Consequently. for instance. input register (IR) as 3X and holding register (HR) as 4X.e.1. 2 stop bits if parity is not used Note! The turnaround time (response time) of REF 610 depends on the amount of data requested in a query.2-5 will be decreased by one when transferred over the network.

Force listen only The slave is forced to enter the listen only mode for Modbus mode communication. Preset single register Sets the value of a holding register.15.2-1 Supported application functions Function code 01 02 03 04 05 06 08 Function description Read coil status Reads the status of discrete outputs. Read/write holding registers Exchanges holding registers in one query. clear counters operation or power up is returned in the response. 15 16 23 Table 4. diagnostic register Return bus The number of messages in the communications system message count detected by the slave since its last restart. Read digital input status Reads the status of discrete inputs. Read input registers Reads the contents of input registers. Before this. Force single coil Sets the status of a discrete output. Return bus The number of CRC errors encountered by the slave since its communication last restart. clear counters operation or power up is returned in the response.15.1.1. Preset multiple registers Sets the value of multiple holding registers. 01 04 10 11 12 13 14 76 . a option normal response will be sent provided that the port is not in the listen only mode. no response will be sent. The entire response is to be identical to the query. However. Return bus The number of Modbus exception responses sent by the slave exception error since its last restart. Diagnostics Checks the communication system between the master and the slave. Clear counters and All counters and the diagnostic register are cleared. Force multiple coils Sets the status of multiple discrete outputs. Return slave The number of messages addressed to the slave or broadcast message count which the slave has processed since its last restart. clear counters operation or power up is returned in error count the response.2-2 Supported diagnostic subfunctions Code Name 00 Description Return query data The data in the query data field is returned (looped back) in the response. clear counters operation or power up is count returned in the response. Read holding registers Reads the contents of output registers. if the port is in the listen only mode.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 The implementation of the Modbus protocol in REF 610 supports the following functions: Table 4. Restart The slave’s peripheral port is initialized and restarted and the communication communication event counters are cleared.

clear counters operation or power up. clear counters operation or power up. The number of messages addressed to the slave for which a NACK response has been sent is returned in the response. clear counters operation or power up. Slave message count The number of messages addressed to the slave or broadcast which the slave has processed since its last restart.2-4 Possible exception codes Code Name 01 02 03 04 Illegal function Illegal data address Illegal data value Slave device failure Description The slave does not support the requested function. clear counters operation or power up is returned in the response. The Modbus protocol provides the following diagnostic counters: Table 4. The following exception codes may be generated by the Modbus protocol: Table 4. 77 . The slave does not support the data address or the number of items in the query is incorrect. An unrecoverable error has occurred while the slave was attempting to perform the requested task.2-3 Diagnostic counters Name Bus message count Description The number of messages in the communications system detected by the slave since its last restart. Bus communication error The number of CRC or LRC errors encountered by the slave count since its last restart.1.15. The number of messages addressed to the slave for which it has not been able to send a response due to a character overrun since its last restart.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4.2-2 Supported diagnostic subfunctions Code Name 15 Return slave no response count Description REF 610 16 18 Return slave NACK response count Return bus character overrun count The number of messages addressed to the slave for which a response (neither a normal response nor an exception response) has not been sent since its last restart.1. clear counters operation or power up is returned in the response. Slave no response count The number of messages addressed to the slave for which a response (neither a normal response nor an exception response) has not been sent since its last restart. Bus character overrun count The number of messages addressed to the slave for which it has not been able to send a response due to a character overrun since its last restart. clear counters operation or power up.1. Slave NACK response The number of messages addressed to the slave for which a count NACK response has been sent. clear counters operation or power up. A value contained in the query data field is out of range. clear counters operation or power up. Bus exception error count The number of Modbus exception responses sent by the slave since its last restart.15. Note! Sending other subfunction codes than those listed above will cause an “Illegal data value” response.15.

a set of programmable user-defined registers (UDR) has been defined in the holding register area. 2. The first sixteen holding registers. If the master reads from a disabled UDR. Fault records The data recorded during a fault sequence is called a fault record (FR). 4. User-defined registers Reading of unwanted data in a data block wastes bandwidth and complicates data interpretation. the master can read the contents using selection code 1. linking cannot be nested. Write a preset single register command (function 06) to HR601 using a selection code as data value.. Read the selected fault record (function 04) from HR601. the oldest record will be deleted.-2). Alternatively. Selection code 1: The master reads the oldest unread record Status register 3 (HR403) informs whether there are unread fault records (see Fig. The master compares the sequence number to that of the previously read fault record. The slave keeps track of which fault record is currently the oldest unread. In addition. Special case 1: If there are no unread fault records.. When a sixth record is stored. register count 28... HR1. This is the only time when sequence number zero will appear. The UDRs can be linked to any holding register. The UDRs are mirrored in HR385…400.. 78 .e. Giving the link address the value 0 will disable the UDR.15. are user-defined registers. data has therefore been organized into consecutive blocks. Registers which have already been preset will not be restored. a fault record can be read using one command (function 23) only. except for HR721. reading from the register will fail and an “Illegal address exception” response will be sent. the registers will contain only zeros. the contents of the register to which an illegal value has been imposed and of the following registers will not be changed.e. the contents of the last read record will be returned. The slave stores the five latest fault records.. However.2. To read a fault record: 1. If a UDR is linked to a non-existent holding register.16. one UDR cannot be linked to another. however.727. i. If there is one or several unread fault records. For optimum efficiency in Modbus communication. The fault record contains a sequence number which makes it possible for the master to determine whether one or several unread fault records have been deleted due to overflow. the value 0 will be returned. using SPA parameters 504V1. The master can continue reading fault records for as long as Status register 3 indicates that there are unread records. If the buffer is empty. Each parameter contains the address of the holding register to which the UDR is linked. i.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 Note! If an “Illegal data value” exception response is generated when attempting to preset multiple registers.504V16.1.

register count 8. Simultaneously. from date to millisecond. The slave keeps track of which event record is currently the oldest unread. Selection code 2: The master reads the oldest stored record By resetting the read pointer using selection code 2. If the buffer is empty. This is the only time when sequence number zero will appear. Write a preset single register command (function 06) to HR671 using a selection code as data value. SPA events update binary points in the DI and the packed HR area. Special case 2: If the master tries to read the next unread event record without entering selection code 1 again. after which the sequence number will start from 1 again. SPA events lacking a corresponding DI/CO data point are shown as SPA channel and event code (informative event) in the event record. the contents of the last read record will be returned. The time stamp of Modbus events is extended to contain complete information.-2). 79 . The event record contains the Modbus DI/CO data point address and the value to which the point has changed (0 or 1). Special case 1: If there are no unread event records. however. To read an event record: 1. Selection code 1: reading the oldest unread record Status register 3 (HR403) informs whether there are unread event records (see Fig. Read the selected fault record (function 04) from HR672. Event records Modbus events are derived from SPA events. a fault record can be read using one command (function 23) only. Note! Resetting the read pointer will not affect the sequence number of the fault record. the contents of the last read record will be returned. The event record contains a sequence number which makes it possible for the master to determine whether one or several unread event records have been deleted due to overflow by comparing it to the sequence number of the previously read event record.e. the master can read the oldest stored fault record. a corresponding Modbus event record will be generated. the master can continue reading the following records using selection code 1. clearing of indications and memorized values and unlatching of output contacts.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 Special case 2: If the master tries to read the next unread fault record without entering selection code 1 again. the registers will contain only zeros. If there is one or several unread event records. With a few exceptions. the contents of the last read record will be returned. irrespective of whether they have been read before. the master can read the contents using selection code 1.1. i. After this. 2. The maximum capacity of the Modbus event buffer is 99 events. 4. Alternatively. Note! A master reset.15. The master can continue reading event records for as long as Status register 3 indicates that there are unread records.2. will clear the fault records.

-99. After this. Modbus data mapping There are two types of monitoring data: digital indications and measurands.1. Momentary Change detect Master reads Master reads Master reads Master reads Fig.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 Selection code 2: reading the oldest stored record By resetting the read pointer using selection code 2. the same data can be read from different data areas. Clearing the buffer does not require any read operation to follow.-1 Change detection bit If the momentary value of an indication bit has changed two or more times since the master last read it.. the master can continue reading the following records using selection code 1. the master can read the oldest stored event record. Special case: If there is not as many events in the buffer as specified by the selection code.. an additional change detect (CD) indication bit will be created for every momentary indication point. Selection code -1. After this. the CD bit will be set to one..-99 With selection code -1.2. When the CD bit has been read. Measurands and other 16-bit values can be read either from the IR or HR 80 ChDet_a . Digital Inputs As the master may not detect the state changes of all digital signals when scanning. 4. Selection code 3 The Modbus event buffer is cleared with selection code 3. the oldest stored event will be read. irrespective of whether they have been read before. For convenience and efficiency. the master can move backwards from the newest event as many events as defined by the selection code and read that specific event record. it will be set to zero. Note! Resetting the read pointer will not affect the sequence number of the event record.. The momentary and the CD bit of a certain indication point always occur as a pair in the Modbus memory map. irrespective of whether they have been read before.15. see the example below. the master can continue reading the following records using selection code 1.

2-5.bit) address Value range Comment Status registers Status register 1 Status register 2 Status register 3 401 402 403 IRF code Warning codes See Structure 1 See Structure 1 See Structure 1 Analogue data Phase current IL1 x In Phase current IL2 x In Phase current IL3 x In Earth-fault current x In Phase discontinuity x In 404 405 406 407 408 0...50 x In 0.5000 0...15.02 409...50 x In 0.5000 0.03 409..04 409. Some register structures are presented in separate sections below....2-5 Mapping of Modbus data Description User-defined registers UDR 1 UDR 2 UDR 3 UDR 4 UDR 5 UDR 6 UDR 7 UDR 8 UDR 9 UDR 10 UDR 11 UDR 12 UDR 13 UDR 14 UDR 15 UDR 16 1 or 385 2 or 386 3 or 387 4 or 388 5 or 389 6 or 390 7 or 391 8 or 392 9 or 393 10 or 394 11 or 395 12 or 396 13 or 397 14 or 398 15 or 399 16 or 400 HR/IR DI/Coil bit Writeable address (. It is also possible to read the status of the DIs as packed 16-bit registers from both the IR and the HR area..800% In 0. all monitoring data can be read as consecutive blocks of data from the IR or HR area..00 409. The register and bit addresses are presented in table 4.50 x In 0.15..01 409.100% In Digital data Start signal from stage I> Start signal from stage I> CD Trip signal from stage I> Trip signal from stage I> CD Start signal from stage I>> Start signal from stage I>> CD 409.800 0.100 0.5000 0.1..1.. Consequently...1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 (read-only) area and digital indication values from either the DI or coil (read-only) area... Note! The HR and IR values are unsigned 16-bit integers unless otherwise specified. Table 4.05 1 2 3 4 5 6 0/1 1 = activated 0/1 1 = activated 0/1 1 = activated 81 ..

04 410.15 410.15.06 410.11 410.06 411.09 411.07 410.10 410.2-5 Mapping of Modbus data Description Trip signal from stage I>> Trip signal from stage I>> CD Start signal from stage I>>> Start signal from stage I>>> CD Trip signal from stage I>>> Trip signal from stage I>>> CD Start signal from stage I0> Start signal from stage I0> CD Trip signal from stage I0> Trip signal from stage I0> CD Start signal from stage I0>> Start signal from stage I0>> CD Trip signal from stage I0>> Trip signal from stage I0>> CD Start signal from stage ∆I> Start signal from stage ∆I> CD Trip signal from stage ∆I> Trip signal from stage ∆I> CD Start signal from stage θ> Start signal from stage θ> CD Alarm signal from stage θ> Alarm signal from stage θ> CD Trip signal from stage θ> Trip signal from stage θ> CD Trip signal from stage ARC (light and current) Trip signal from stage ARC (light and current) CD Trip signal from stage ARC (light and DI) Trip signal from stage ARC (light and DI) CD Light signal output Light signal output CD Trip lockout signal Trip lockout signal CD External trip signal External trip signal CD CBFP CBFP CD Shot 1 Shot 1 CD 1MRS 755310 HR/IR DI/Coil bit Writeable address (.03 410.01 411.13 410.13 409.12 409.10 409.02 410.14 410.12 410.00 411.09 410.05 410.08 411.14 409.01 410.10 411.bit) address 409.02 411.07 409.1.05 411.08 409.15 411.07 411.06 409.04 411.00 410.11 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 Value range 0/1 Comment 1 = activated 0/1 1 = activated 0/1 1 = activated 0/1 1 = activated 0/1 0/1 1 = activated 1 = activated 0/1 1 = activated 0/1 1 = activated 0/1 1 = activated 0/1 1 = activated 0/1 1 = activated 0/1 0/1 1 = activated 1 = activated 0/1 1 = activated 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = failure 1 = initiated 82 .11 409.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4.09 409.08 410.03 411.

1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4.06 414.07 414.11 413.08 412.02 413.12 412.05 412.07 412.03 413.12 413.06 413.03 414.bit) address 411.01 412.09 413.02 412.10 412.04 413.14 413.07 413.11 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 Value range 0/1 0/1 0/1 Comment 1 = initiated 1 = initiated 1 = closed 0 = open 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = triggered 0 = cleared 83 .01 414.02 414.09 414.00 413.15 412.08 413.06 412.15 413.2-5 Mapping of Modbus data Description Shot 2 Shot 2 CD Shot 3 Shot 3 CD CB position CB position CD Definite trip alarm signal Definite trip alarm signal CD AR lockout signal AR lockout signal CD Open CB command Open CB command CD Close CB command Close CB command CD CB reclosing failed signal CB reclosing failed signal CD CB reclosing inhibited CB reclosing inhibited CD AR cancelled AR cancelled CD PO1 PO1 CD PO2 PO2 CD PO3 PO3 CD SO1 SO1 CD SO2 SO2 CD SO3 SO3 CD SO4 SO4 CD SO5 SO5 CD DI1 DI1 CD DI2 DI2 CD DI3 DI3 CD DI4 DI4 CD DI5 DI5 CD Disturbance recorder Disturbance recorder CD REF 610 HR/IR DI/Coil bit Writeable address (.10 413.00 414.04 414.13 412.15 414.13 413.03 412.14 411.14 412.09 412.04 412.12 411.05 413.08 414.01 413.15.13 411.1.00 412.05 414.11 412.10 414.

.628 671.999 0.....5000 0......727 W See Structure 4 Additional analogue data Thermal level One-minute demand value Demand value during the specified time range Maximum one-minute demand value during the specified time range Stage/phase which caused the trip Trip indication code Number of starts of stage I> Number of starts of stage I>> Number of starts of stage I>>> Number of starts of stage I0> Number of starts of stage I0>> Number of starts of stage ∆I> Number of trips of stage I> Number of trips of stage I>> Number of trips of stage I>>> Number of trips of other stages Number of AR shots (shot 1) initiated by the trip signal from stage I>> 801 802 803 804 0...999 0..999 0..12 414.....65535 0......2-5 Mapping of Modbus data Description HMI password HMI password CD IRF IRF CD Warning Warning CD SPA event overflow SPA event overflow CD 1MRS 755310 HR/IR DI/Coil bit Writeable address (.255 See table 4....106 0.13 414.01 415....1.15.00 415. Recorded data Fault record Event record 601. 2 chars/register Real-time clock Time reading and setting 721.65535 0.679 See Structure 2 See Structure 3 Relay identification Type designation of the relay 701....50 x In 0..21 0.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4.1.65535 0.5000 0.50 x In 805 HI word 806 LO word 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 0..bit) address 414......999 0..15 415..5000 % 0.999 0.17-3 Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter 84 .14 414.708 ASCII chars..999 0.65535 0..17-3 0.02 415..131071 See table 4...1.03 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 Value range 0/1 Comment 1 = opened 0 = closed 1 = activated 1 = activated 0/1 0/1 Only the CD bit will be activated in case of overflow..50 x In 0..

2.18-1 for IRF codes and table 4.255 Counter 825 0.255 Counter 821 0.18-2 for warning codes....2-5 Mapping of Modbus data Description Number of AR shots (shot 1) initiated by the digital input signal Number of AR shots (shot 1) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage I> Number of AR shots (shot 1) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage I0> Number of AR shots (shot 2) initiated by the trip signal from stage I>> Number of AR shots (shot 2) initiated by the digital input signal Number of AR shots (shot 2) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage I> Number of AR shots (shot 2) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage I0> Number of AR shots (shot 3) initiated by the trip signal from stage I>> Number of AR shots (shot 3) initiated by the digital input signal Number of AR shots (shot 3) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage I> Number of AR shots (shot 3) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage I0> REF 610 HR/IR DI/Coil bit Writeable address (......bit) address 819 Value range 0.255 Counter 822 0.. either the SP (second-pulse) or MP (minute-pulse) bit will be activated. 85 ..1. If time synchronization is realized via a digital input.255 Counter 823 0..255 Comment Counter 820 0..15.255 Counter 829 0....255 Counter 827 0.1. Refer to table 4.255 Counter 826 0....... only writeable. The registers are arranged as in the figure below. Structure 1 The status registers contain information on unread fault and event records.255 Counter Control points LED reset 1) 501 W 1 1 = LED reset 1) Coil area.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4.255 Counter 828 0.1. 4. and relay status.. there is one or several unread fault/event records.1. 15 401 402 403 FR ER Reserved Warning code Reserved SP MP StatRegREF610_a 8 7 IRF code 0 Fig.255 Counter 824 0.15.-2 Status registers When the value of the FR/ER bit is 1.

MM 2 bytes: DD..100% 0....106% 0.....100 0.50 x In 0.100 0..255 0/100 0/100 Readable and writeable register.50 x In 0..800 0...5000 0.100% 0.2 Comment 1 = read oldest unread record 2 = read oldest stored record 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 1) Sequence number Unread records left Time stamp of the recorded data.100% In 0......... Table 4......106% 0....REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 Structure 2 This structure contains data recorded during a fault sequence.. date and time Time stamp of the recorded data.100% 0...100% 0.1.....5000 0.100 0.100% 0/100% 0/100% 0..100 0..5000 0.999 ms 0...HH 2 bytes: MM....100 0...100 0...50 x In 0.......50 x In 0.. time Phase current IL1 Phase current IL2 Phase current IL3 Earth-fault current Phase discontinuity Thermal level at start Thermal level at trip Maximum pick-up phase current IL1 Maximum pick-up phase current IL2 Maximum pick-up phase current IL3 Maximum pick-up earth-fault current Start duration of stage I> Start duration of stage I>> Start duration of stage I>>> Start duration of stage I0> Start duration of stage I0>> Start duration of stage ∆I> Start duration of external trip Trip number of AR sequence Start duration of stage ARC (local) Start duration of stage ARC (remote) 1...800 0...6 2 bytes: YY.5000 0..100 0.999 0.106 0.800% In 0.255 0...100 0.... time Time stamp of the recorded data......5000 0..50 x In 0.5000 0... 86 .100% 0.106 0.15.SS 0.50 x In 0.2-6 Fault record Address Signal name 601 Latest selection code 1) Range 1.... Refer to section Fault records for the reading method..100% 0........800% In 0... date Time stamp of the recorded data.

MM 2 bytes: DD. date and time Time stamp of the event.. 87 .. In case of an informative event...0 indicate the SPA channel.99 2 bytes: YY. time Modbus DI point or informative event (SPA channel) • DI event 1...15.-99 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 Sequence number Unread records left Time stamp of the event. Table 4. Refer to section Event records for the reading method... 679 DI value or SPA event code • DI event 0/1 • Informative event 0.999 0/1 0 • Informative event 1 When MSB = 0.. time Time stamp of the event.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 Structure 3 This structure contains Modbus event records..1. bits 14.HH 2 bytes: MM. When MSB = 1.255 0. the register will contain the DI value.. bits 14. date Time stamp of the event..63 1) Readable and writeable register........ In case of a DI event.3 Comment 1 = read oldest unread record 2 = read oldest stored record 3 = clear Modbus event buffer -1.-99 = move to the nth newest record -1.2-7 Event record Address Signal name 671 Latest selection code 1) Range 1.SS 0..0 indicate the DI point. the register will contain the SPA event code.999 ms 0.

REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 Structure 4 The relay's real-time clock is stored in this structure. analogue and counters) of REF 610.0 protocol was developed by Harris Control based on the early versions of the IEC 60870-5 standard telecontrol protocol specifications.1. refer to table 4..3.0 module.0 remote communication protocol Protocol overview The DNP 3. Today..3-1.. this is necessary only if the DNP parameters have been altered.99 4.1. DNP 3.. which only specifies physical.3-3 below. To support advanced RTU functions and messages larger than the maximum frame length as defined in the IEC 60870-1. The DNP protocol supports the ISO OSI (Open System Interconnection) based model. It can be updated by presetting the whole register structure in one Modbus transaction.17-14.15..0 parameters All DNP parameters are stored on the external DNP 3.16. For the DNP parameters.1.23 0.16. 4. However.12 1..1. After parameterization with the Relay Setting Tool..2-8 Real-time clock structure Address 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 Description Year Month Day Hour Minute Second Hundredth of a second Range 0..1. 4. 4.1.16.. the DNP 3. the transport pseudo-layer implements message assembly and disassembly services.0 Data Link is to be used with a transport pseudo-layer. Protocol parameters of REF 610 The DNP parameters can all be adjusted using the Relay Setting Tool.1.16. REF 610 must be switched to the rear communication mode for at least 10 seconds in order for the DNP parameters to be replicated and stored onto the DNP module.59 0.16.1. 88 .2. Table 4.16..... Storing DNP 3.0 point list of REF 610 The DNP data points (binary. This reduced protocol stack is referred to as Enhanced Performance Architecture (EPA). presented in tables 4. the DNP protocol specifications are controlled by the DNP Users Group. data link and application layers. As a minimum.99 1. are all in use as default..59 0.. 4.31 0.. DNP 3.1.

1. the DNP and Modbus analogue values of REF 610 are identical as default. the point-specific enable/disable parameters are meaningless unless unsolicited reporting has been enabled with SPA parameter 503V24.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 The default class settings of the DNP points within the different event object groups are: • binary inputs change events: class 1 • analogue inputs change events: class 2 • counter change events: class 3 All static data points belong to class 0.3-1 Binary data Description Start signal from stage I> Trip signal from stage I> Start signal from stage I>> Trip signal from stage I>> Start signal from stage I>>> Trip signal from stage I>>> Start signal from stage I0> Trip signal from stage I0> Start signal from stage I0>> Trip signal from stage I0>> Start signal from stage ∆I> Trip signal from stage ∆I> Start signal from stage θ> Alarm signal from stage θ> Trip signal from stage θ> Trip signal from stage ARC (light and current) Trip signal from stage ARC (DI and current) Light signal output Trip lockout signal External trip signal CBFP Shot 1 Shot 2 DNP point address 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Event class 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 UR enable 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Value range 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 Comment 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = detected 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = failure 1 = initiated 1 = initiated 89 . The pointers to the scaling factors for analogue objects are all 0 as default. However. Consequently. adding and removing DNP points assigning event classes to specific DNP points DNP point-specific enabling/disabling of unsolicited reporting defining deadbands for event reporting defining scaling factors for analogue values Table 4. Editing features include: • • • • • re-organizing.16. All DNP process points can be edited using the Relay Setting Tool. Unsolicited reporting is enabled for all event objects as default.

REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4....800 0..5000 0.16..5000 0.5000 Internal scaling factor (ix=0) 100 100 100 10 10 1 100 100 100 90 .3-2 Analogue data Description Phase current IL1 x In Phase current IL2 x In Phase current IL3 x In Earth-fault current x In Phase discontinuity x In Thermal level One-minute demand value Demand value during the specified time range Maximum one-minute demand value during the specified time range DNP Event UR Value point Deadband class enable range address 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0........16..106 0..5000 0.100 0...3-1 Binary data Description Shot 3 CB position Definite trip alarm signal AR lockout signal Open CB command Close CB command CB reclosing failed signal CB reclosing inhibited AR cancelled PO1 PO2 PO3 SO1 SO2 SO3 SO4 SO5 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 Disturbance recorder HMI password IRF Warning SPA event overflow 1MRS 755310 DNP point address 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 Event class 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 UR enable 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Value range 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 Comment 1 = initiated 1 = closed 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = triggered 0 = cleared 1 = opened 0 = closed 1 = activated 1 = activated 1 = activated Table 4.1.5000 0.1..5000 0..

.255 17 3 1 1 0.999 0..3-3 Counters Description Number of starts of stage I> Number of starts of stage I>> Number of starts of stage I>>> Number of starts of stage I0> Number of starts of stage I0>> Number of starts of stage ∆I> Number of trips of stage I> Number of trips of stage I>> Number of trips of stage I>>> Number of trips of other stages Number of AR shots (shot 1) initiated by the trip signal from stage I>> Number of AR shots (shot 1) initiated by the digital input signal Number of AR shots (shot 1) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage I> Number of AR shots (shot 1) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage I0> Number of AR shots (shot 2) initiated by the trip signal from stage I>> Number of AR shots (shot 2) initiated by the digital input signal Number of AR shots (shot 2) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage I> Number of AR shots (shot 2) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage I0> Number of AR shots (shot 3) initiated by the trip signal from stage I>> Number of AR shots (shot 3) initiated by the digital input signal Number of AR shots (shot 3) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage I> Number of AR shots (shot 3) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage I0> REF 610 DNP point address 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Event class 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 UR enable 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Deadband Value range 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0......999 0...65535 0..65535 0...255 11 3 1 1 0..255 18 3 1 1 0....255 16 3 1 1 0...255 91 ......16.255 20 3 1 1 0.255 15 3 1 1 0.999 0.1..999 0...255 21 3 1 1 0.......1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4.255 19 3 1 1 0....255 12 3 1 1 0.255 13 3 1 1 0....65535 0..999 0.999 0..65535 0....255 14 3 1 1 0..

multi-fragment application frames not supported Application Confirm Configurable with application layer timeout Complete Appl. range from 0 to 255 with Configurable. default NO ACK Requires Application Layer Confirmation Configurable with confirmation type selector when reporting Event Data (Slave devices only) Always after response to reset request Always when sending multi-fragment responses (Slave devices only) Configurable. Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets) Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets) Transmitted 292 Transmitted 2048 Received 292 Received 2048 Maximum Data Link Re-tries: Maximum Application Layer Re-tries: Configurable.00 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT Vendor Name: ABB Oy.16.0 device profile of REF 610 DNP V3. with confirmation type selector. not relevant in slave Sends/Executes Control Operations WRITE Binary Outputs Never SELECT/OPERATE Never DIRECT OPERATE Never DIRECT OPERATE . DNP 3.4. with confirmation type selector Timeouts while waiting for Data Link Confirm Configurable with primary data link layer timeout. functions. range from 0 to 255 with primary data link layer retransmission count application layer retransmission count Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation: Configurable. Response No. Fragment No. Distribution Automation Device Name: REF 610 Highest DNP Level Supported Device Function For Requests L2 Slave For Responses L2 Notable objects.NO ACK Never Count Never Code Never Trip/Close Never Pulse On Never Queue Never Clear Queue Never 92 . and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete list is described in the attached table): Additions to level 2 are marked as shaded in the implementation table.1. not relevant when NO ACK Complete Appl.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 4.

5) and 255 (Counters 10..1.21) Point-by-point list attached Sends Multi-Fragment Responses Yes No Table 4.16..9) 32 Bits.4-1 Supported function codes Code Function Transfer Function Codes 0 1 2 Confirm Read Write Message fragment confirmation No response Request objects from outstation Respond with requested objects Store specified objects to outstation Respond with status of operation Select output point of outstation Respond with status of control point Yes Yes Yes Description Supported Control Function Codes 3 Select No 93 . depends on objects basic variation (variation used at initialization) Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses Never When Device Restarts When Status Flags Change Sends Unsolicited Responses Never Configurable Only certain objects Sometimes (attach explanation) ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED Function codes supported No other options are permitted. Default Counter Object/Variation No Counters Reported Configurable. one or the other (depends on default variation) Reports time-tagged Digital Input Change Events when no specific variation requested Never Binary Input Change With Time Binary Input Change With Relative Time Configurable.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 FILL OUT THE FOLLOWING ITEMS FOR SLAVE DEVICES ONLY Reports Digital Input Change Events when no specific variation requested Never Only time-tagged Only non-time-tagged Configurable to send both. but roll-over bits not used Other value: 999 (Counters 0. default object and variation Default Object 20 Default Variation 2 Point-by-point list attached Counters Roll Over at No Counters Reported Configurable (attach explanation) 16 Bits (Counters 6.....

16.1.4-1 Supported function codes Code Function 4 5 6 Operate Direct operate Direct operate NO ACK Description Set previously selected output Respond with status of control point Set output directly Respond with status of control point Set output directly No response 1MRS 755310 Supported No No No Freeze Function Codes 7 8 9 Immediate Freeze Immediate Freeze NO ACK Freeze and Clear Copy specified objects to freeze buffer Respond with status of operation Copy specified objects to freeze buffer No response Copy specified objects to freeze buffer and clear objects Respond with status of operation Copy specified objects to freeze buffer and clear objects No response Copy specified objects to freeze buffer at specified time Respond with status of operation Copy specified objects to freeze buffer at specified time No response Perform desired reset sequence Respond with a time object Perform desired partial reset operation Respond with a time object Initialize the specified data to default Respond with status of operation Set the specified application ready to be run Respond with status of operation Start the specified application to run Respond with status of operation Stop the specified application to run Respond with status of operation Yes Yes Yes 1) 10 Freeze and Clear NO ACK Yes 1) 11 Freeze with time No 12 Freeze with time NO ACK No Application Control Function Codes 13 14 15 16 Cold Restart Warm Restart Initialize Data to Defaults Initialize Application Yes Yes No No 17 18 Start Application Stop Application Yes Yes Configuration Function Codes 19 20 21 22 Save configuration Respond with status of operation Enable Unsolicited Messages Enable Unsolicited Messages Respond with status of operation Disable Unsolicited Messages Disable Unsolicited Messages Respond with status of operation Assign Class Assign specified objects to a class Respond with status of operation Delay Measurement Perform propagation delay measurement Save configuration No Yes Yes Yes Time Synchronization Function Codes 23 Yes 94 .REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4.

01. 08 129. 17. 20.4-1 Supported function codes Code Function Response Function Codes 0 129 130 1) REF 610 Description Supported Confirm Response Unsolicited Message Message fragment confirmation Response to request message Spontaneous message without request Yes Yes Yes Counters of REF 610 can not be cleared using the DNP 3. 01. all variations Binary Output Binary Output with Status Control Block. 7.28 00. 22 129 00. 01.1. 22 00. 17. all variations 1 1 1 1. 21. 20. 28 1 1 Binary Input 1. 17. 8. 08. 01. 07. 7. 22 129 00. 07. all variations Binary Input Change without Time Binary Input Change with Time Binary Input Change with Relative Time Binary Output. 17. 8. 21.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4. 07. 21. 06. 22 1.28 06. 06. 08. 17. 17. 28 17. 01. 28 129 00. 01. 01. 06. 22 00. 17. 17. 130 17. 07. 28 20 2 16-Bit Binary Counter 129 00. 20. 08. 06. 01. 17. 20. 17.4-2 Supported objects OBJECT Object Variation group 1 0 REQUEST (slave must parse) RESPONSE (master must parse) Description Binary Input. 28 1 2 Binary Input with Status 1. 01. 08. 01. 07. 08 06. 8. 21. 21. 21. 20.16. 07. 08 06. 07. 28 20 20 3 4 32-Bit Delta Counter 16-Bit Delta Counter 95 . 08. 22 1.0 protocol. 130 129. 07. 01. all variations Function Qualifier Function Qualifier Codes Codes Codes Codes (dec) (hex) (dec) (hex) 1. all variations Control Relay Output Block Pattern Control Block Pattern Mask Binary Counter. 07. 06. 28 20 1 32-Bit Binary Counter 129 00. 01.28 00.28 00.1. 08. Table 4. 06.16. 7. 17. 28 2 2 2 2 10 10 10 12 12 12 12 20 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 0 Binary Input Change. 17. 20.28 00.28 129 00.

01. 06. all variations Function Qualifier Function Qualifier Codes Codes Codes Codes (dec) (hex) (dec) (hex) 1 00.28 129 00. 28 21 21 21 21 21 21 22 22 22 22 22 7 8 9 10 11 12 0 1 2 3 4 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter with Time of Freeze 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter with Time of Freeze 32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter without Flag 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter without Flag Counter Change Event. 07. 28 96 .1. all variations 32-Bit Counter Change Event without Time 16-Bit Counter Change Event without Time 32-Bit Delta Counter Change Event without Time 16-Bit Delta Counter Change Event without Time 1 1 1 06.28 00. 08. 01. 17.28 129 00. 130 129. 07. 17. 01. 28 21 6 16-Bit Frozen Counter with Time 1 of Freeze 129 00. 06. 07. 07. 01. 17.4-2 Supported objects OBJECT Object Variation group 20 20 20 20 21 5 6 7 8 0 1MRS 755310 REQUEST (slave must parse) RESPONSE (master must parse) Description 32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 16-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 32-Bit Delta Counter without Flag 16-Bit Delta Counter without Flag Frozen Counter. 08. 17. 08 06. 17. 08 06. 28 21 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter 1 129 00. 17. 08 129. 17. 07. 28 17. 06. 01. 07. 17. 01. 06. 28 21 21 21 3 4 5 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter 32-Bit Frozen Counter with Time 1 of Freeze 00. 08. 130 129. 06.16. 130 17.28 00. 08. 07.28 00. 17. 17. 01. 01. 08. 07. 28 17. 01.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4. 28 21 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter 1 129 00. 01.

1. 08 06. 01. 06. 06. 06. 21. 28 30 2 16-Bit Analogue Input 1. 08. 17. 07.16. 28 30 4 16-Bit Analogue Input without Flag 1. 08. 07. 01. 130 129. 22 129 00.28 00. 17. 01. 21. 20. 17.28 1. 22 129 00. 08. all variations Function Qualifier Function Qualifier Codes Codes Codes Codes (dec) (hex) (dec) (hex) 1 1 06. 21. 06. 08.4-2 Supported objects OBJECT Object Variation group 22 22 22 22 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 30 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 REF 610 REQUEST (slave must parse) RESPONSE (master must parse) Description 32-Bit Counter Change Event with Time 16-Bit Counter Change Event with Time 32-Bit Delta Counter Change Event with Time 16-Bit Delta Counter Change Event with Time Frozen Counter Event. 28 17. 22 129 00.28 00. 01. 20. 07. 20. 17. 20. 20.28 00. all variations 32-Bit Frozen Analogue Input 16-Bit Frozen Analogue Input 32-Bit Frozen Analogue Input with Time of Freeze 97 . 01.28 129 00. 07. 01. 17. 07. 28 30 3 32-Bit Analogue Input without Flag 1. 130 17. 07. 01. 28 30 1 32-Bit Analogue Input 1. 28 31 31 31 31 0 1 2 3 Frozen Analogue Input. 21. 07. all variations 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event without Time 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event without Time 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event without Time 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event without Time 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event with Time 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event with Time Analogue Input. 01.28 00. 21. 17. 01. 17. 17. 08 129. 17. 06.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4. 08. 22 00. 17. 01. 22 129 00.

130 129.4-2 Supported objects OBJECT Object Variation group 31 31 31 32 32 32 32 32 33 33 33 33 33 40 40 40 41 41 41 50 50 50 50 51 51 51 52 52 52 60 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 (def) 1 (def) 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1MRS 755310 REQUEST (slave must parse) RESPONSE (master must parse) Description 16-Bit Frozen Analogue Input with Time of Freeze 32-Bit Frozen Analogue Input without Flag 16-Bit Frozen Analogue Input without Flag Analogue Change Event. 28 17. 28 17. 28 17. all variations 32-Bit Analogue Output Block 16-Bit Analogue Output Block Time and Date. all variations 32-Bit Analogue Change Event without Time 16-Bit Analogue Change Event without Time 32-Bit Analogue Change Event with Time 16-Bit Analogue Change Event with Time Frozen Analogue Event. 08 129 129 129 17. all variations Time and Date Time and Date Time and Date with Interval Time and Date CTO. all variations 32-Bit Frozen Analogue Event without Time 16-Bit Frozen Analogue Event without Time 32-Bit Frozen Analogue Event with Time 16-Bit Frozen Analogue Event with Time Analogue Output Status. 07. 28 1 1 2 06.1. 07. 07. 130 17. 08 06. 08 06. 07. 08 06. 08 129. 08 07.16. 28 23 1 07 06 129 129 07 28 98 . 07. all variations Time and Date CTO Unsynchronized Time and Date CTO Time Delay. 28 17. 130 129. 28 17. 08 06. all variations Time Delay Coarse Time Delay Fine All classes Function Qualifier Function Qualifier Codes Codes Codes Codes (dec) (hex) (dec) (hex) 1 1 1 1 1 06. 130 129. 07. all variations 32-Bit Analogue Output Status 16-Bit Analogue Output Status Analogue Output Block. 07.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4. 130 129. 08 06.

REF 610-specific DNP features Time synchronization If time synchronization (minute-pulse or second-pulse) of the relay’s real-time clock is realized via a digital input. 07. 08 00 129 129 129 129 17.16. 07. • REF 610 will send only one request for time synchronization to the DNP master. 08 06. the following applies to the DNP interface of REF 610: • Depending on the pulse type. 99 . 28 17. either the date-to-minute or the date-to-second information of the DNP time synchronization message will be used. 08 06. 28 2 129 13.5. 08 06.1. 07. 14 4. which is at power up. 28 17. 28 17.4-2 Supported objects OBJECT Object Variation group 60 60 60 60 70 80 81 82 83 83 90 100 100 100 101 101 101 1 2 3 4 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 REF 610 REQUEST (slave must parse) RESPONSE (master must parse) Description Class 0 Data Class 1 Data Class 2 Data Class 3 Data File Identifier Internal Indications Storage Object Device Profile Private Registration Object Private Registration Object Descriptor Application Identifier Short Floating Point Long Floating Point Extended Floating Point Small Packed Binary-Coded Decimal Medium Packed Binary-Coded Decimal Large Packed Binary-Coded Decimal No Object Function Qualifier Function Qualifier Codes Codes Codes Codes (dec) (hex) (dec) (hex) 1 1 1 1 06.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4. 07.1.16.

As events have been lost in both cases. as defined by the standard.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 Unsolicited reporting start up Due to implementation differences in DNP master devices. REF 610 will automatically activate and reset the IIN2. Event buffer overflow DNP 3.3 can also indicate event buffer overflow in the internal communication between the DNP3.0 standard. Note! Only the last alternative is compliant with the DNP 3. When unsolicited reporting has been enabled (SPA parameter 503V24). the following alternative unsolicited reporting (SPA parameter 503V24) start ups are available in REF 610: • 1 = Unsolicited reporting starts immediately. the event delay should be set to 0 and the event count to 1. the DNP 3. IIN2. Event handling The maximum capacity of the DNP event buffer is 100 events. In this case. DNP counters and frozen counters DNP counters in use have a corresponding frozen counter.3.0 module and the main CPU module of REF 610.3 bit. The frozen counters in object group 21 have the same DNP point index as the ordinary DNP counters. without permission from the master. Further. the event reporting will use the following SPA parameters. • 3 = REF 610 will send an empty unsolicited response message when communication begins.3 bit has been reset. REF 610 will start to send unsolicited responses. the master will enable unsolicited reporting for certain or all classes using function 20. which the master will confirm. 100 . If send throttles are not desired. Classes which are not enabled remain disabled. frozen counters can only be read as static objects.0 event buffer overflow is indicated with the internal indication IIN2. • 2 = REF 610 will send an empty unsolicited response message when communication begins. In this case. and frozen counter events (object group 23) are not supported. After this. which the master will confirm.0 master should perform an integrity scan after the IIN2. the class events will be sent to the host immediately as they occur. called send throttle parameters: 503V18 503V19 503V20 503V21 503V22 503V23 Class 1 Event delay Class 1 Event count Class 2 Event delay Class 2 Event count Class 3 Event delay Class 3 Event count Example (class 1) The events will be reported when the event delay (SPA parameter 503V18) has elapsed or the defined amount of events (SPA parameter 503V19) have been generated for class 1. After this.

the priority between the devices are defined with SPA parameters 503V233 and 503V234. using collision avoidance before sending the message. REF 610 will check the link again..1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 Collision avoidance and detection REF 610 supports both collision avoidance and detection. By setting the time-slot width to 10 milliseconds and the maximum number of time slots to 10. REF 610 supervises collisions on the link. REF 610 will start the transmission. If a collision is detected. the user-defined scaling factor of the corresponding scaling factor parameter.. the transmission will be immediately cancelled. If set to 1. a backoff time will start. When preparing to transmit and the link is busy. After this. the maximum random delay will be 100 milliseconds.00..50. the internal scaling factor will be used. REF 610 will first wait until the link becomes idle. While sending a message. When the backoff time elapses. Scaling DNP analogue values The DNP analogue values can be scaled using either an internal (fixed) or a user-defined scaling factor.0 x In 100 0. for instance.. If the scaling factor index for a certain analogue value is set to 0. Collision detection is always active during transmission (provided that it has been enabled). SPA parameter 503V(100+index). The backoff time is calculated as follows: backoff time = silent interval + random delay The silent interval is set with SPA parameter 503V232 and the maximum random delay with SPA parameters 503V233 (the width of a single time slot in milliseconds) and 503V234 (the maximum number of time slots).. Collision detection can be enabled or disabled with SPA parameter 503V235. Collision avoidance occurs before message transmission. After this..5. A device with shorter silent interval and maximum random delay has higher sending priority than a device with longer silent interval and maximum random delay. will be used: 503V101 503V102 503V103 503V104 503V105 Scaling factor 1 Scaling factor 2 Scaling factor 3 Scaling factor 4 Scaling factor 5 Example Phase current IL1 Internal scaling factor Default DNP range 0. If not busy. REF 610 will try to transmit the message again. Note! In a network consisting of several slaves.5000 101 .

5. Set the scaling index pointer of the analogue value to point at the scaling factor.. To exit the setting mode.. Take any unused scaling factor and set it to 300.0 x In 1S1 1S2 1S3 1S4 1S5 1S6 1S7 1S8 1S9 102 . P) S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 1) S8 S9 1) Group/ Channel 2 Setting range (R. The password is a user-defined number within the range 1. Channel 1 channel 0 (R.8 0...504.2.04. 503.999..1. If the scaling factor is set to 300 A. P) 2S1 2S2 2S3 2S4 2S5 2S6 2S7 2S8 2S9 0.50. the deadband value is set as follows: 0....02 = 6 A. the default value being 1. enter the same password into parameter V161. but it is not possible to read the password via this parameter.1...0..00 1..30. the scaled deadband is 300 A x 0.05. To enter the setting mode..603.. The value range will now be 0. 3.50 s 0...50..REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 To show the analogue value in primary units. SPA parameters are found on channels 0.. enter the password into parameter V160. Example For a deadband of 2% In when the internal scaling factor is 100...35.0 x 300 = 0. 4.02 x 100 = 2..0 0.05.00 x 300.300 s 0. and if In = 300 A and the accuracy of the analogue value = 1 A: 1.00 x In 0. The password protection is also reactivated in case of loss of auxiliary voltage... 2.300 s 0.. Abbreviations used in the following tables: • R = readable data • W = writeable data • P = password protected writeable data Settings Table 4.05.. The HMI password can be changed with parameter V162.5..15. W. irrespective of whether the internal scaling factor is used for value presentation or not. W. DNP analogue values deadband The deadband is always defined in units of the original value when scaled using the internal (fixed) scaling factor.50.0 x In 0.35.1....17. 507 and 601. SPA bus communication protocol parameters Altering parameter values via serial communication requires the use of the SPA password in some cases..15000 A..17-1 Settings Variable Start value of stage I> Operate time of stage I> Time/current characteristic for stage I> Time multiplier k Time multiplier n Resetting time of stage I> Start value of stage I>> Operate time of stage I>> Start value of stage I>>> Actual Group/ settings (R).

35....400% In 0. SGR 5 Checksum.... SGB 1 Checksum.2097151 0. SGB 5 Checksum..04.0...1048575 0...8388607 0. SGR 4 Checksum.60.2097151 1S10 1S11 1S12 1S13 1S14 1S15 1S16 1S17 1S18 1S19 1S20 1S21 1S22 1S23 1S24 1S25 1) 1) Current limit ArcI> of stage ARC Current limit ArcI0> of stage ARC Checksum. SGL 1 Checksum...1.0 s 0 = AR is not in use 1 = shot 1 2 = shot 1 and 2 3 = shot 1.300 s 0..8388607 0.05...255 0. SGR 8 Checksum....50 5.300 s 10.8388607 0.1048575 0.200 min 50...05.00 s 1.8388607 0..05..63 0.1.100% 1.0..17-1 Settings Variable Operate time of stage I>>> Start value of stage I0> Operate time of stage I0> Time/current characteristic for stage I0> Time multiplier k0 Time multiplier n0 Resetting time of stage I0> Start value of stage I0>> Operate time of stage I0>> Start value of stage ∆I> Operate time of stage ∆I> Full load current Time constant of stage θ> Alarm level of stage θ> Operate time of CBFP Number of AR shots Actual Group/ settings (R).100% In 0..1....2. SGF 5 Checksum...127 0.......1048575 0.1048575 0..300 s 0.8388607 0. SGF 2 Checksum... SGR 1 Checksum. SGR 6 Checksum.8 0..1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4. W..50.255 0.....100% θt> 0... P) S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 1) S18 S19 S20 S21 S22 S23 S24 S25 1) REF 610 Group/ Channel 2 Setting range (R.. W...10... 2 and 3 0...8388607 0...05.....0 0. SGR 3 Checksum..30. SGF 4 Checksum...0 x In 5...8388607 0. Channel 1 channel 0 (R.30. P) 2S10 2S11 2S12 2S13 2S14 2S15 2S16 2S17 2S18 2S19 2S20 2S21 2S22 2S23 2S24 2S25 0.. SGB 2 Checksum.50 x In 1.127 0.0…15... SGF 1 Checksum. SGR 2 Checksum. SGR 7 Checksum.. SGB 3 Checksum. SGL 2 S26 1) 2) S27 1) 2) S61 S62 S63 S64 S65 S71 S72 S73 3) S74 3) S75 3) S81 S82 S83 S84 S85 S86 3) S87 3) S88 3) S91 S92 1S26 1S27 1S61 1S62 1S63 1S64 1S65 1S71 1S72 1S73 1S74 1S75 1S81 1S82 1S83 1S84 1S85 1S86 1S87 1S88 1S91 1S92 2S26 2S27 2S61 2S62 2S63 2S64 2S65 2S71 2S72 2S73 2S74 2S75 2S81 2S82 2S83 2S84 2S85 2S86 2S87 2S88 2S91 2S92 103 ..0..8388607 0. SGF 3 Checksum.. SGB 4 Checksum.400% In 0.1048575 0.0 s 1.

104 . P) S93 S94 S95 S96 S97 S98 1S93 1S94 1S95 1S96 1S97 1S98 Group/ Channel 2 Setting range (R. SGL 6 Checksum.. a dash will be shown on the LCD and “999” when the parameter is read via the SPA bus.1. channel 0 V121 V122 V123 V124 V125 V126 V127 V128 V129 V130 V131 Value 0.... Auto-reclose parameters Table 4. W.300 s 3.300 s 0. P) 2S93 2S94 2S95 2S96 2S97 2S98 0.2097151 0....1.. the number indicating the currently used value will be displaced by “999” when the parameter is read via the SPA bus and by dashes on the LCD.1.300 s 0..... W.300 s 0. SGL 3 Checksum...1. 2 or 3.1.10 s 0..2097151 0. W..31 The AR function can be activated either via the HMI or with SPA parameter S25 by setting the number of auto-reclose shots to 1.........300 s 0...300 s 0.1. P). 2) If the optional/O module has not been installed.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4...300 s 0.1023 0.17-2 Settings Description CB Closing time Start delay of stage I> Start delay of stage I0> Reclaim time Cutout time Dead time of shot 1 Dead time of shot 2 Dead time of shot 3 SG1 SG2 SG3 Parameter (R. SGL 5 Checksum. SGL 4 Checksum. SGL 7 Checksum.255 0.2097151 the protection stage is out of operation.17-1 Settings Variable Checksum. Channel 1 channel 0 (R.2097151 0..2097151 0... SGL 8 1) If 1MRS 755310 Actual Group/ settings (R).... 3) If the optional/O module has not been installed.1. a dash will be shown on the LCD and “9999999” when the parameter is read via the SPA bus.2097151 0.

......1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 Recorded data Parameter V1 shows the stage which has caused the trip.V24 the number of initiated auto-reclose shots. parameter V2 the trip indication code.999 0..999 0. and parameters V13.999 105 Trip indication code V2 Number of starts of stage I> Number of starts of stage I>> Number of starts of stage I>>> Number of starts of stage I0> Number of starts of stage I0>> Number of starts of stage ∆I> V3 V4 V5 V6 V7 V8 ..999 0...999 0.V8 show the number of starts of the protection stages..999 0. parameters V9...17-3 Recorded data: Channel 0 Recorded data Stage/phase which caused the trip Parameter (R) V1 Value 1=IL3> 2=IL2> 4=IL1> 8=I0> 16=IL3>> 32=IL2>> 64=IL1>> 128=I0>> 256=IL3>>> 512=IL2>>> 1024=IL1>>> 2048=∆I> 4096=θ> 8192=external trip 16384=AR 32768=trip of stage ARC (local) 65536=trip of stage ARC (remote) 0 = --1=start of stage I> 2=trip of stage I> 3=start of stage I>> 4=trip of stage I>> 5=start of stage I>>> 6=trip of stage I>>> 7=start of stage I0> 8=trip of stage I0> 9=start of stage I0>> 10=trip of stage I0>> 11=start of stage ∆I> 12=trip of stage ∆I> 13=alarm of stage θ> 14=trip of stage θ> 15=external trip 16=definite trip alarm 17=CB reclosing failed 18=AR shot due 19=AR lockout 20=trip of stage ARC 21=CBFP 0.V12 the number of trips of the protection stages.. parameters V3.1... Table 4...

1...17-3 Recorded data: Channel 0 Recorded data Number of trips of stage I> Number of trips of stage I>> Number of trips of stage I>>> Number of trips of other stages Number of AR shots (shot 1) initiated by the trip signal from stage I>> Number of AR shots (shot 1) initiated by the digital input signal Number of AR shots (shot 1) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage I> Number of AR shots (shot 1) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage I0> Number of AR shots (shot 2) initiated by the trip signal from stage I>> Number of AR shots (shot 2) initiated by the digital input signal Number of AR shots (shot 2) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage I> Number of AR shots (shot 2) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage I0> Number of AR shots (shot 3) initiated by the trip signal from stage I>> Number of AR shots (shot 3) initiated by the digital input signal Number of AR shots (shot 3) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage I> Number of AR shots (shot 3) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage I0> Parameter (R) V9 V10 V11 V12 V13 Value 0......255 V19 0.255 V16 0.255 V21 0.V23 on channels 1.65535 0......255 1MRS 755310 V14 0.50 x In 0..50 x In 0......255 V18 0........255 V15 0.50 x In ....255 V23 0... Event n denotes the last recorded value.65535 0...255 V17 0..5...REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4.255 V22 0. Table 4.5 Event (R) Recorded data Phase current IL1 Phase current IL2 Phase current IL3 106 n n-1 n-2 n-3 n-4 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 1V1 1V2 1V3 2V1 2V2 2V3 3V1 3V2 3V3 4V1 4V2 4V3 5V1 5V2 5V3 Value 0.65535 0...255 V24 0..... and so forth.. n-1 the next one.65535 0.1.255 V20 0..17-4 Recorded data: Channels 1.255 The last five recorded values can be read with parameters V1..

...50 x In 0..100% 0....100% 0.17-4 Recorded data: Channels 1.106% 1) 0..255 0/100% 0/100% YY-MM-DD HH.800% 0. date Time stamp of the recorded data.106% 1) 0.... dashes will be shown on the LCD and “999” when the parameter is read via the SPA bus.. SS.800% In 0...100% 0....100% 0/100% 0....100% 0.....1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4....... 107 .50 x In 0.50 x In 0.100% 0.MM.1.5 Event (R) Recorded data Earth-fault current Phase discontinuity Thermal level at start Thermal level at trip Maximum pick-up phase current IL1 Maximum pick-up phase current IL2 Maximum pick-up phase current IL3 Maximum pick-up earth-fault current Start duration of stage I> Start duration of stage I>> Start duration of stage I>>> Start duration of stage I0> Start duration of stage I0>> Start duration of stage ∆I> Start duration of external trip Trip number of AR sequence Start duration of stage ARC (local) Start duration of stage ARC (remote) Time stamp of the recorded data.sss If the thermal protection has been set out of operation (SGF3/5).. time 1) REF 610 n n-1 n-2 n-3 n-4 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 1V4 1V5 1V6 1V7 1V8 1V9 1V10 1V11 1V12 1V13 1V14 1V15 1V16 1V17 1V18 1V19 1V20 1V21 1V27 1V28 2V4 2V5 2V6 2V7 2V8 2V9 2V10 2V11 2V12 2V13 2V14 2V15 2V16 2V17 2V18 2V19 2V20 2V21 2V27 2V28 3V4 3V5 3V6 3V7 3V8 3V9 3V10 3V11 3V12 3V13 3V14 3V15 3V16 3V17 3V18 3V19 3V20 3V21 3V27 3V28 4V4 4V5 4V6 4V7 4V8 4V9 4V10 4V11 4V12 4V13 4V14 4V15 4V16 4V17 4V18 4V19 4V20 4V21 4V27 4V28 5V4 5V5 5V6 5V7 5V8 5V9 5V10 5V11 5V12 5V13 5V14 5V15 5V16 5V17 5V18 5V19 5V20 5V21 5V27 5V28 Value 0..100% 0.

W R R.16383 0. sets the first information and the time stamp for triggering ready to be read 4 = manual triggering 1) The disturbance recorder requires this parameter to be set.65535. W R..REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 Disturbance recorder Table 4.g.M47 M60.16383 0. W R.. The conversion factor is the transformation ratio multiplied by the rated current of the relay.31 0. dashes will be shown on the LCD instead of the primary values and the recorded data will be redundant. unit (A. IL2 and IL3 Analogue channel conversion factor and unit for the earth-fault current Internal trigger signals' checksum Internal trigger signal's edge Checksum of internal signal storing mask Post-triggering recording length External trigger signal's checksum External trigger signal's edge Checksum of external signal storing mask Triggering state.. If this parameter has been given the value 0.. W R. clearing and restart M18 M19 M20 M40. W R. W Station identification/unit number Rated frequency Name of the feeder Digital channel texts Analogue channel texts Analogue channel conversion factor and unit for IL1. unit (A. W R.. 4) This value is copied to parameters M81 and M82.16383 0.. 2) M1 can be used for broadcast triggering by using the unit address “900”..31 R: 0 = recorder not triggered 1 = recorder triggered and recording stored in the memory W: 0 = clear recorder memory 2 = download restart... kA).9999 50 or 60 Hz Max 16 characters W W R.M63 M80 1) 4) M81 and M82 M83 1) V236 V237 V238 3) V240 V241 V242 V243 3) V246 R. W (channel 0) M1 2) M2 M15 3) Value 1 1 800/960 Hz 400/480 Hz 50/60 Hz 0.. W R. kA)..kA 0... 3) Parameters can be written if the recorder has not been triggered.. 108 .... W R. W R R R... e.17-5 Parameters for the disturbance recorder Description Remote triggering Clear recorder memory Sampling rate Parameter R..1. W Factor 0..g. 10. e...31 0. W R. W R R.kA Factor 0..100% 0. 10.65535.

Control parameters Table 4. triggering V243 mask. V236 V237 1) 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 682 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 751 0 = rising edge. channel number and event code 0 = normal state 1 = the relay has been subject to an automatic reset 2 = overflow of the event buffer 3 = both 1 and 2 109 . 1 = falling edge.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 Table 4. storing mask.17-7 Disturbance recorder external triggering and storing Event DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 Checksum 1) Weighting factor 1 2 4 8 16 Default value of Default value of Default value of triggering edge.17-8 Control parameters Description Reading of the event buffer Re-reading of the event buffer Reading of relay state data Parameter R. W. P L B C R R R Value Time. V241 V242 1) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = rising edge.1.17-6 Disturbance recorder internal triggering and storing Event Start of stage I> Trip of stage I> Start of stage I>> Trip of stage I>> Start of stage I>>> Trip of stage I>>> Start of stage I0> Trip of stage I0> Start of stage I0>> Trip of stage I0>> Start of stage ∆I> Trip of stage ∆I> Alarm of stage θ> Trip of stage θ> Checksum 1) Weighting factor 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 Default value of Default value of Default value of triggering edge. channel number and event code Time.1. Table 4. 1 = falling edge. storing mask. triggering V238 mask.1.

. start LED off 2 = start LED on. W R. trip LED off 3 = start and trip LEDs on 0..999 1= clear trip counters 2= clear AR counters 2 = restore factory settings for CPU 3 = restore factory settings for DNP 0.999 1. W R.17-8 Control parameters Description Resetting of relay state data Parameter R....65535 1) 0.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4.1..254 LED test for start and trip indicators V110 W (P) LED test for programmable LEDs Operation indications on the LCD Trip-circuit supervision Remote control of setting group Entering the SPA password for settings Changing the SPA password or reinstating the password protection Changing the HMI password Clearing trip counters or AR counter Restoring factory settings V111 V112 V113 V150 V160 V161 V162 V166 V167 W (P) R.255 0 = IEC 1 = ANSI 0 = not in use 1 = in use 0 = setting group 1 1 = setting group 2 1. W W W (P) W W (P) W (P) Warning code IRF code Unit address of the relay 110 V168 V169 V200 R R R..255 1) 1.... W R.999 min 1 = the self-supervision output contact is activated and the READY indicator LED starts to blink 0 = normal operation 0 = start and trip LEDs off 1 = trip LED on.. W (P) W (P) 1 = reset 50 or 60 Hz 0...sss YY-MM-DD HH.999 1.SS.. W R.999 min 0..sss REF 610 1 = unlatch 1 = clear and unlatch V103 V104 V105 V106 V108 V109 W R..31 0.. W R.. W (P) R.MM. W. W . W R W W 0 = reset E50 and E51 1 = reset only E50 2 = reset only E51 4 = reset all events including E51 except for E50 SS.. P C W Value 1MRS 755310 Time reading and setting Date and time reading and setting Type designation of the relay Unlatching output contacts Clearing indications and memorized values and unlatching contacts (master reset) Resetting of trip lockout Rated frequency Time setting range for demand values in minutes Non-volatile memory settings Time setting for disabling new trip indications on the LCD Testing the self-supervision T D F V101 V102 R..

50 x In 0..Z XXX BAxxxxxx ACxxxxxx AKxxxxxx YYMMDD YY-MM-DD HH. the status of light detection with parameter I6.6/4.17-9 Inputs Description Current measured on phase IL1 Current measured on phase IL2 Current measured on phase IL3 Measured earth-fault current Calculated phase discontinuity value Light detected (arc) Parameter (R). W Value REF 610 Connection type Line-idle state Optional communication module CPU software number CPU software revision CPU build number DNP protocol name DNP software number DNP software revision DNP build number Relay serial number CPU serial number DNP serial number Test date Date reading and setting (RED 500 format) Time reading and setting (RED 500 format) 1) V204 V205 V206 V227 V228 V229 2V226 2V227 2V228 2V229 V230 V231 V232 V235 V250 V251 R.. W R.MM... 2) If the optional communication module has not been installed. W W R. W 9.100% 0/1 111 .50 x In 0. P V201 V202 V203 3) R.800% In 0...Z XXX DNP 3.17-8 Control parameters Description Data transfer rate (SPA). the CB position with parameter I7 and the status of the digital inputs with parameters I8. the DNP 3.sss In case of a warning.0 module has been installed.8 1 = rear connector activated 0 = SPA 1 = IEC_103 2 = Modbus RTU 3 = Modbus ASCII 4 = DNP 3.0 1MRS118531 A..50 x In 0... the value 255 will be stored in V169.0 communication protocol will be automatically selected.SS... This will enable the master to continuously read only V169....0 (read-only) 0 = loop 1 = star 0 = light off 1 = light on 0 = not in use 1 = in use 2) 1MRS118512 A.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4. a warning of a faulty communication module will appear on the LCD together with the fault code..I4.1. W. W R. channel 0 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 Value 0. kbps Rear communication Rear communication protocol Parameter R. Table 4..I12. W R. The measured currents can be read with parameters I1.1. W (P) R R R R R R R R R R R R. 3) If the optional DNP 3.. the calculated phase discontinuity value with parameter I5..

O109.O26 and the recorded functions with parameters O61. the digital input is energized. Table 4.. Each protection stage has its internal output signal. The state of the output contacts can be read or changed with parameters O41.1.1. a I8 I9 I10 I11 I12 dash will be shown on the LCD and “9” when the parameter is read via the SPA bus. channel 0 I7 Value 1MRS 755310 0 = undefined 1 = closed 2 = open 3 = undefined 0/1 1) 0/1 1) 0/1 1) 2) 0/1 1) 2) 0/1 1) 2) DI1 status DI2 status DI3 status DI4 status DI5 status 1) When the value is 1. functions (R)... These signals can be read with parameters O1. stages channel 0 channel 0 Start of stage I> Trip of stage I> Start of stage I>> Trip of stage I>> Start of stage I>>> Trip of stage I>>> Start of stage I0> Trip of stage I0> Start of stage I0>> Trip of stage I0>> Start of stage ∆I> Trip of stage ∆I> Start of stage θ> Alarm of stage θ> Trip of stage θ> External trip Trip lockout CBFP Trip Trip of stage ARC Light signal output Open CB command Close CB command Definite trip alarm O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 O7 O8 O9 O10 O11 O12 O13 O14 O15 O16 O17 O18 O19 O20 O21 O22 O23 O61 O62 O63 O64 O65 O66 O67 O68 O69 O70 O71 O72 O73 O74 O75 O76 O77 O78 O79 O80 O81 O82 O83 Value 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 112 .. 2) If the optional I/O module has not been installed...17-9 Inputs Description CB position Parameter (R).86.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4.17-10Output signals Recorded Status of the protection State of stage (R)..O49 and the recorded functions read with parameters O101..

1..8 113 . Note! Parameters O41. channel 0 O41 O42 O43 O44 O45 O46 O47 O48 O49 O51 Recorded functions (R).1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4.17-12Settings Description Unit address of the relay Data transfer rate (IEC_103).17-10Output signals Recorded Status of the protection State of stage (R). a dash will be shown on the LCD and “9” when the parameter is read via the SPA bus. SO2. channel 0 O101 O102 O103 O104 O105 Value 0/1 0/1 0/1 2) 0/1 0/1 0/1 2) O107 O108 O109 0/1 4) 0/1 4) 0/1 4) 0/1 1) State of output when the trip lockout function is not in use. SO1.O49 and O51 control the physical output contacts which can be connected to circuit breakers.. for instance.17-11 Outputs Operation of output contact Output PO1 Output PO2 Output PO3 1) Output SO1 Output SO2 Output PO3 (trip lockout) 3) Output SO3 Output SO4 Output SO5 Enabling activation of output contacts PO1. P).1. Parameters for the IEC 60870-5-103 remote communication protocol Table 4. kbps Parameter (channel 507) 507V200 507V201 R. functions (R).254 9.. SO3. 3) State of output when the trip lockout function is in use. 4) If the optional I/O module has not been installed. 2) Either O43/O103 or O46 is to be used at a time. W Value 1. stages channel 0 channel 0 CB reclosing failed Shot due AR Lockout O24 O25 O26 O84 O85 O86 REF 610 Value 0/1 0/1 0/1 Table 4. PO3. W.6/4.. P R. W R. W. SO4 and SO5 via the SPA bus State of output (R.1. PO2.

W R... W R.65535 1) 0...254 9.65535 ms 0 Address of REF 610 in the DNP 3.. W R.. W R.. W R. W 0. W Value range (channel 503) 503V1 503V2 R..65535 1) 0.65535 1) 0.. W R.. W R.65535 1) 0..0 remote communication protocol Table 4..1.17-14Settings SPA parameter R.17-13Settings Description User-defined register 1 User-defined register 2 User-defined register 3 User-defined register 4 User-defined register 5 User-defined register 6 User-defined register 7 User-defined register 8 User-defined register 9 User-defined register 10 User-defined register 11 User-defined register 12 User-defined register 13 User-defined register 14 User-defined register 15 User-defined register 16 Unit address of the relay Data transfer rate (Modbus).... P R... W R.65535 1) 0. kbps Modbus link parity Parameter (channel 504) 504V1 504V2 504V3 504V4 504V5 504V6 504V7 504V8 504V9 504V10 504V11 504V12 504V13 504V14 504V15 504V16 504V200 504V201 504V220 R....65535 1) 0..65535 1) 1.1. W R..65532 Description Default Explanation Unit address Master address 1 2 Primary data link timeout 503V3 R..65535 1) 0.... W R...2/0.65535 1) 0.8/2.. W Value 0. W R. W R.6/4..65535 1) 0. W The default value is 0.. W R..65532 R.65535 1) 0.. W R... W R.65535 1) 0.3 0 = even 1 = odd 2 = no parity 0 = low/high 1 = high/low CRC order of Modbus RTU link 1) 504V221 R. W 0 = no data link timeout used 1.4/ 1. W R.65535 1) 0.65535 1) 0. W.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 Parameters for the Modbus remote communication protocol Table 4.. Parameters for the DNP 3..0 network Address of the master station (destination address for unsolicited responses) Used when REF 610 sends data using service 3 114 ..65535 1) 0..65535 1) 0. W 0.. W R. W R.

65535 ms 5000 503V7 R....255 R. W 1. W 0.. 2. 5.255 s R. 6 2 2 503V30 R.. W 0... W Value range (channel 503) 503V4 R.255 s R.2 2 503V11 R.. W 1.4 2 503V13 503V14 R.4 2 503V16 R. 5.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4...255 0 Confirmation on application layer 503V9 R. W 1.2 R.1... 2. W 1. W 0.. W 0.255 REF 610 Description Default Explanation Primary data link layer retransmission count Application layer confirmation timeout Application layer retransmission count 0 Number of retransmissions on data link layer Used when REF 610 sends messages with confirmation request Number of retransmissions on the application layer when REF 610 sends messages with confirmation request Used to enforce inclusion of confirmation request in all application messages (DNP 3.255 s 0 1 0 1 0 115 .255 R.... 6 2 503V18 503V19 503V20 503V21 503V22 R.. W 1.. W 0.. W 1...17-14Settings SPA parameter R...2 2 503V15 R. W 1.0 standard requires inclusion of confirmation request in event messages only) 503V6 R. W 0.. W 0.. W 0. W 0 = enabled only for event messages 1 = enabled for all messages 0 Default variation of binary input objects Default variation of binary input change event objects Default variation of analogue input objects Default variation of analogue input change event objects Default variation of counter objects Default variation of counter change event objects Default variation of frozen counter objects Class 1 event delay Class 1 event count Class 2 event delay Class 2 event count Class 3 event delay 503V10 R..

W 0...2 R.. W 0... W 0.4294967296 R..255 ms R...6/19.. W (P) R R R Value 0..17-14Settings SPA parameter R.. Scaling factor 1 Scaling factor 2 Scaling factor 3 Scaling factor 4 Scaling factor 5 Baud rate Number of stop bits Parity 503V101 503V102 503V103 503V104 503V105 503V211 503V212 503V230 1 1 1 1 1 9. dashes will be shown on the LCD and “999” when the parameter is read via the SPA bus. W 0 = disabled 1 = enabled R Bit coded 0 = OK R Bit coded 0 = OK 1MRS 755310 Description Default Explanation Class 3 event count Unsolicited reporting mode 1 0 Refer to section Unsolicited reporting start up under section Protocol parameters of REF 610. 116 . and dashes will be shown on the LCD and “999” when the thermal level is read via the SPA bus.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4..1..4294967296 R.17-15 Measured values Description Thermal level One-minute demand value Demand value during the specified time range Maximum one-minute demand value during the specified time range 1) Changing 2) Parameter (channel 0) V60 V61 V62 V63 R. W 0..4294967296 R. W 0.65535 ms R.... W 0 = UR disabled 1 = immediate 2 = empty UR 3 = empty UR and enable UR R.4 R.255 R.50 x In 2) 0.6 1 0 Silent interval Time slot width Number of time slots Collision detection enabled DNP module warning register DNP module status register 503V232 503V233 503V234 503V235 503V168 503V169 20 10 8 0 Measurements Table 4. W 1.4294967296 R.4294967296 R.. P R. W 0 = no parity 1 = odd 2 = even R... W 4.... 3) If the thermal protection has been set out of operation.. W 0. W Value range (channel 503) 503V23 503V24 R. W 0..8/9. If the demand value is reset and the specified time has not elapsed. W 0. the parameter cannot be written to.2/38.50 x In 2) 0.. W.50 x In 2) the thermal level via serial communication will generate an event code.255 R...106% 1) 3) 0.1. W 0.

262143 0.. Under normal conditions the buffer is empty.4095 0.1.1E42 2E1. five events at a time. Using the L command erases the previously read events from the buffer..1E24 1E25.1.1-2 Event codes E1..... for example in data communication..E4 and E7 Channel Event Description 0 0 0 0 0 E1 E2 E3 E4 E7 IRF IRF disappeared Warning Warning disappeared The thermal level has been changed via serial communication Table 4...4095 0.17.17. Events to be included in the event reporting are marked with the multiplier 1... Event codes Special codes have been determined to represent certain events.3E22 Setting range 0.2E16 2E17....1-1 Event masks Event mask V155 1V155 1V156 1V157 2V155 2V156 3V155 3V156 Code E31.... such as start and tripping of protection stages and different states of output signals...17.1. If needed.E51 Channel Event Description 0 0 E50 E51 Restart of relay Overflow of event buffer 117 . Should a fault occur and reading fails. Table 4..2E26 3E1..15 0.1023 Default setting 1 1365 1365 4180 3 0 1023 1008 Channel 0 Events always included in the event reporting: Table 4.3E12 3E13.. The event mask is formed by the sum of the weighting factors of all those events which are to be included in event reporting. the events can be re-read using the B command..1.65535 0..1023 0. The contents of the buffer can be read using the L command...17..4095 0.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 4. the B command can also be repeated...1......1E12 1E13. with the exception of events E50 and E51 which have to be reset using the C command.E34 1E1.. The maximum capacity of the buffer is 100 events. The events are stored in the event buffer of the relay.1-3 Event codes E50..

..E12 Channel Event Description 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 E10 E11 E12 Start signal from stage I> activated Start signal from stage I> reset Trip signal from stage I> activated Trip signal from stage I> reset Start signal from stage I>> activated Start signal from stage I>> reset Trip signal from stage I>> activated Trip signal from stage I>> reset Start signal from stage I>>> activated Start signal from stage I>>> reset Trip signal from stage I>>> activated Trip signal from stage I>>> reset Default value of event mask 1V155 Weighting Default value factor 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1365 Table 4.1-6 Event codes E13.17.1.1.1-5 Event codes E1..E34 Channel Event Description 0 0 0 0 E31 E32 E33 E34 Disturbance recorder triggered Disturbance recorder memory cleared HMI password opened HMI password closed Default value of event mask V155 Weighting Default value factor 1 2 4 8 1 0 0 0 1 Channel 1 Table 4.17.E24 Channel Event Description 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 E13 E14 E15 E16 E17 E18 E19 E20 E21 E22 E23 E24 Start signal from stage I0> activated Start signal from stage I0> reset Trip signal from stage I0> activated Trip signal from stage I0> reset Start signal from stage I0>> activated Start signal from stage I0>> reset Trip signal from stage I0>> activated Trip signal from stage I0>> reset Start signal from stage ∆I> activated Start signal from stage ∆I> reset Trip signal from stage ∆I> activated Trip signal from stage ∆I> reset Default value of event mask 1V156 Weighting Default value factor 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1365 118 .1-4 Event codes E31..1.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 Events possible to mask out: Table 4.17...

E42 Channel Event Description 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 E25 E26 E27 E28 E29 E30 E31 E32 E33 E34 E35 E36 E37 E38 E39 E40 E41 E42 Start signal from stage θ> activated Start signal from stage θ> reset Alarm signal from stage θ> activated Alarm signal from stage θ> reset Trip signal from stage θ> activated Trip signal from stage θ> reset Trip signal from stage ARC (light and current) activated Trip signal from stage ARC (light and current) reset Trip signal from stage ARC (DI and current) activated Trip signal from stage ARC (DI and current) reset Light signal output activated Light signal output reset Trip lockout signal activated Trip lockout signal reset External trip signal activated External trip signal reset CBFP activated CBFP reset Default value of event mask 1V157 REF 610 Weighting Default value factor 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 65536 131072 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 4180 Channel 2 Table 4.1.17..1.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4.E16 Channel Event Description 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 E10 E11 E12 E13 E14 E15 E16 PO1 activated PO1 reset PO2 activated PO2 reset PO3 activated PO3 reset SO1 activated SO1 reset SO2 activated SO2 reset SO3 activated SO3 reset SO4 activated SO4 reset SO5 activated SO5 reset Default value of event mask 2V155 Weighting Default value factor 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 119 .17..1-8 Event codes E1..1-7 Event codes E25..

E22 Channel Event Description 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 E13 E14 E15 E16 E17 E18 E19 E20 E21 E22 Open CB command activated Open CB command reset Close CB command activated Close CB command reset CB reclosing failed signal activated CB reclosing failed signal reset CB reclosing inhibited CB reclosing inhibited reset AR cancelled AR cancelled reset Default value of event mask 3V156 Weighting Default value factor 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1008 120 .1-9 Event codes E17.E26 Channel Event Description 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 E17 E18 E19 E20 E21 E22 E23 E24 E25 E26 DI1 activated DI1 deactivated DI2 activated DI2 deactivated DI3 activated DI3 deactivated DI4 activated DI4 deactivated DI5 activated DI5 deactivated Default value of event mask 2V156 1MRS 755310 Weighting Default value factor 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Channel 3 Table 4..E12 Channel Event Description 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 E10 E11 E12 Shot 1 initiated Shot 1 ended Shot 2 Initiated Shot 2 ended Shot 3 initiated Shot 3 ended CB position open CB position closed Definite trip alarm signal activated Definite trip alarm signal reset AR lockout signal activated AR lockout signal reset Default value of event mask 3V155 Weighting Default value factor 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1023 Table 4...REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4.1-11Event codes E13.1.1-10Event codes E1.17.1...17..1.17.

19 20. PO2. PO2. When a fault appears. enable signal or optional output relay SO3. Further. As long as the green indicator LED (ready) is blinking. a fault indication message will appear on the LCD. The fault codes are listed in the following table: Table 4.18-1 IRF codes Fault code 4 5 6 7 8 9 10. Only after the fault has been found to be permanent. The IRF code indicates the type of internal relay fault. All other output contacts will be returned to the initial state and locked for the internal relay fault. 12 13 14 15 16 17.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 4. enable signal or output relay PO1. 21 30 50. 59 51. None of the other HMI indications can override the IRF indication. SO1 or SO2 Error in optional output relay SO3 Error in optional output relay SO4 Error in optional output relay SO5 Error in the enable signal for optional output relay SO3. 52. which will prevent relay operation. 18. the green indicator LED (ready) will stop blinking and the relay will be returned to the normal service state. but the fault indication message will remain on the LCD until manually cleared. IRF indications have the highest priority on the HMI. the green indicator LED (ready) will start to blink and the self-supervision output contact will be activated. It handles run-time fault situations and informs the user about an existing fault via a LED on the HMI and a text message on the LCD.18. SO4 or SO5 Error in the feedback.1. SO4 or SO5 Auxiliary voltage dip Faulty program memory Faulty work memory Faulty parameter memory 1) 2) Faulty parameter memory. including a fault code. SO1 or SO2 Error in the feedback. calibration parameters Optional I/O module missing Optional I/O module unknown 121 . In case an internal fault disappears. Internal relay fault When an internal relay fault is detected. Self-supervision (IRF) system REF 610 is provided with an extensive self-supervision system which continuously supervises the software and the electronics of the relay.1. 54. the code is to be recorded and stated when ordering service. the relay will first try to eliminate it by restarting. 53. 11. 56 55 80 81 Type of fault Error in output relay PO1 Error in output relay PO2 Error in output relay PO3 Error in output relay SO1 Error in output relay SO2 Error in the enable signal for output relay PO1. the fault indication cannot be cleared. There are two types of fault indications: IRF indications and warnings.

refer to the Operator’s Manual. The fault codes are listed in the following table: Table 4. the relay will continue to operate except for those protection functions possibly affected by the fault. 223 240 241 253 Type of fault 1MRS 755310 Optional I/O module configuration error Power supply module faulty Power supply module unknown Hardware configuration error Communication module unknown Faulty configuration set (for IEC 60870-5-103) Internal reference voltage error Faulty input. the fault indication message is to be recorded and stated when ordering service. 203. 195. Light sensor 1 Error in the measuring unit factory setting. 139. When a fault appears.1.18-2 Warning codes Fault Battery low Trip-circuit supervision Power supply module temperature high Communication module faulty or missing DNP 3. zero during the internal fault state. refer to the Operator’s Manual.0 configuration error DNP 3.0 module faulty Continuous light detected by Light sensor 1 or 2 1) Σ 1) Weight value 1) 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 127 The external fault warning can be routed to SO2 with SGF1/8. 122 . which depending on the type of fault includes a fault code.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4. Further. and the green indicator LED (ready) will remain lit as during normal operation. one single numeric code which indicates all the faults will be displayed.1. For further information on warnings. 222. Warnings In case of a warning. 1) May be corrected by formatting to the 2) The user-defined values will be set to For further information on internal relay faults.18-1 IRF codes Fault code 82 85 86 90 95 104 131. Light sensor 2 Faulty input. will appear on the LCD. If more than one type of fault occur at the same time. The fault indication message cannot be manually cleared but will disappear with the fault. a fault indication message.

The permitted auxiliary voltage range of the relay is marked on the front panel of the relay under the handle of the plug-in unit.2.2. the positive lead is connected to terminal X4.1-5).0 mm2 wires.1-_ and X4. The relay can also be used in single or two-phase applications by leaving one or two energizing inputs unoccupied.19.1-5).5 mm2 wire or two 0. to unlatch output contacts or for remote control of relay settings.2.. External parameterization The Relay Setting Tool is used for parameterizing the relay units.2.0 mm2 wire or two max 2..2. for instance.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 4.2.1/7-8 (see table 4.2. The energizing earth-fault current of REF 610 is connected to terminals X2.1-4 and 4.1. Terminals X4. The digital inputs can be used to generate a blocking signal.1-_ for one 0. The desired language can be selected for parameter descriptions.5.5 mm2 wires and terminals X3.6.. At dc supply.1/21-24 and X3. However. Refer to the Operator’s Manual for further information.. Note! REF 610 is provided with connection socket X3.1/1-2 (see table 4.2.1-1).1/3-4 and X2. When the parameters are set locally. after which the parameters can be downloaded to the relay via a communication port. Design description Input/output connections All external circuits are connected to the terminals on the rear panel of the relay. 4. Relay parameterization Local parameterization The parameters of the relay can be set either locally via the HMI or externally via serial communication with the Relay Setting Tool. The input terminals of the optional I/O module are located on connection socket X3.2. 4..1/1.1 only if the optional I/O module has been installed.1/1-2 should be connected.1-_ are dimensioned for one 0. Terminals X2. Adjusting the parameter values using the Relay Setting Tool is done off-line.1/1-2. this function is selected with SPA parameter V243. The auxiliary voltage of the relay is connected to terminals X4.1/5-6 (see table 4. The digital inputs can also be used to trigger the disturbance recorder. The requested functions are selected separately for each input in switchgroups SGB1.1.1 (see tables 4.5. The energizing phase currents of REF 610 are connected to terminals X2. 123 .2.2.. the setting parameters can be chosen via the hierarchical menu structure. X2.. at least terminals X2.1-1).1-2).1..1/1-6 (optional) are digital input terminals (see table 4.

-3 present a rear view of REF 610..2..1.1-4).1/3-5).1.1 X5..4 RX ! NEAR INSTRUMENT TERMINALS TX DANGER ..SO5 can be used for signalling on start and tripping of the relay (see table 4. When a fault is detected by the self-supervision system or the auxiliary voltage is disconnected. PO2 and PO3. the trip signals from all the protection stages are routed to PO1.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 Output contacts PO1.RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK X5.2.2. Output contacts SO3. showing four connecting sockets: one for measuring transformers. one for the optional I/O module.SO5 are selected with the switches of switchgroups SGR4.1 X4.1 X5.1/3-4).2.PO3 are selected with the switches of switchgroups SGR1..1-4). one for power supply and one for optional serial communication... PO2 and PO3 are heavy-duty trip contacts capable of controlling most circuit breakers (see table 4.1 11 12 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 X3. X2. 4.. Output contacts SO1.. The signals to be routed to PO1.SO5 are optional and available only if the optional I/O module has been installed.SGR3.2.2 Fig. the output contact will drop off and the contact close (X4. Under normal operating conditions the relay is energized and the contact closed (X4. On delivery from the factory. Fig. On delivery from the factory.1-3).. 4.2..SGR8. The signals to be routed to SO1.. 4.1.-1.Fig.3 RX TX X5... the start and alarm signals from all the protection stages are routed to SO1 and SO2. The IRF contact functions as an output contact for the self-supervision system of the protection relay (see table 4.-1 Rear view of REF 610 with the fibre-optic communication module for plastic and glass fibre with light sensor inputs 124 RearArcGlass_a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 .

5 6 5 4 3 2 1 ! NEAR INSTRUMENT TERMINALS Fig.2.1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 DANGER .1.-2 Rear view of REF 610 with the RS-485 communication module RearRS_RE_61_a 1 125 .RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK X5. 4.1 X4.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 X2.1 11 12 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 X3.

1-6 X2.8 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 DANGER .2 A The value denotes the rated current for each input.1-3 X2.1-12 1) IL1 1 A IL2 1 A IL3 1 A I0 1 A - IL1 1 A IL2 1 A IL3 1 A I0 0.0 communication module for RS-485 Inputs for phase and earth-fault currents 1) Function REF610A12xxxx REF610A15xxxx REF610A51xxxx REF610A52xxxx REF610A55xxxx IL1 5 A IL2 5 A IL3 5 A I0 5 A REF610A11xxxx Table 4.1-10 X2.1-8 X2. 4.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 X2.1-1 Terminal X2.1. 126 RearDNP_a .1-9 X2.1-7 X2.1 X5.1 X4.RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK ! NEAR INSTRUMENT TERMINALS Fig.1-2 X2.1-5 X2.1-1 X2.2 A IL1 1 A IL2 1 A IL3 1 A I0 5 A - IL1 5 A IL2 5 A IL3 5 A I0 1 A - IL1 5 A IL2 5 A IL3 5 A I0 0.2.-3 Rear view of REF 610 with the DNP 3.1-11 X2.1-4 X2.2.1 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 X3.

1-18 X4.1-2 Terminal X4.1-17 X4.1-24 X4. common Closed. NC 1) SO5. NO PO1 (TCS). NO PO3 (trip lockout relay). NO 1) SO3.1-9 X4.1-4 X4. - Table 4. + Input.1-6 X4.1-8 X4.1-7 X4.1-15 X4.1-19 X3. NO PO1.1-22 X3.1-17 X3. NO PO2.1-20 1) Output contacts Function SO5.1-3 Terminal X4. NO SO1.1-1 X4. common SO2. NC SO1.1-5 IRF contact Function IRF.1-20 X3.1-4 Terminal X3. NO - Optional 127 .1-13 X4.1-21 X3.1-18 X3.1-23 X3.1-14 X4.1-10 X4.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 Table 4.1-12 X4.1-16 X4. common SO1. or Uaux disconnected Closed. NC 1) SO4. common 1) SO4. NO 1) SO2. no IRF.1-3 X4. NO 1) SO4. and Uaux connected Table 4. NC 1) SO3. NC SO2.1-16 X3.1-19 X4.1-11 X4. IRF. common 1) SO3.1-2 Auxiliary supply voltage Function Input.2.2.2. common 1) SO5.

1 and X5.1-23 X4. Light sensor input connections If REF 610 is provided with the optional communication module with light sensor inputs.2 Light sensor input connectors Function Input Light sensor 1 Input Light sensor 2 4.1-6 1) Digital inputs Function DI1 DI2 DI3 1) DI4 1) DI5 1) Optional 4.1-22 X3.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 Table 4.1-5 Terminal X4.1. 4. The maximum wireless operating distance depends on the transceiver of the PC. wireless communication is possible as well.2.2 only if the optional communication module with light sensor inputs has been installed (refer to section Ordering information).2.1-3 X3. Serial communication connections The optical front connection of the relay is used to connect the relay to the SPA bus via the front communication cable 1MRS050698. Rear communication of REF 610 is optional and the physical connection varies with the communication option.1-24 X4.1-5 X3. Table 4. If a PC compatible to the IrDA Standard specifications is used.1 and X5.-1).3. For further information on the arc protection.2.2.2.1-1 X3.2-1 Terminal X5. Note! REF 610 is provided with connection sockets X5.2.2 (see table 4.1-21 X4.2-1 and Fig. refer to section Arc protection.1 X5.2.1-2 X3. the pre-manufactured lens-sensor fibres are connected to inputs X5. 128 .1-4 X3.

If the internal termination resistor of 120 Ω is used.5/1-2 and X5. The jumpers have been set to no termination (X5 in the OFF position) and no biasing (X3 and X4 in the OFF position) as default. which can be done by using the internal termination resistor on the communication module. The bus is to be terminated at both ends. and the maximum length of the bus is 1200 meters. a quality twisted pair shielded cable is to be used.5/4-6. The bus is to be biased at one end to ensure fail-safe operation. a quality dual twisted pair shielded cable is to be used. half-duplex. the impedance of the cable should be the same. Table 4.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 Plastic fibre-optic connection If REF 610 is provided with the optional fibre-optic communication module for plastic fibre. A is connected to A and B to B. If signal ground is being used for balancing potential differences between devices/nodes. The RS-485 communication module follows the TIA/EIA-485 standard and is intended to be used in a Daisy-chain bus wiring scheme with 2-wire. The connection socket is a 6-pin header-type socket and the terminals are of screw compression type. When connecting one device to another. The RS-485 communication module is provided with jumpers for setting bus termination and fail-safe biasing. and one of the conductors of the other pair to signal ground.3-TX X5.3-RX Plastic fibre-optic rear connector Function Transmitter Receiver RS-485 connection If REF 610 is provided with the optional RS-485 communication module.3-1 Terminal X5. the cable is connected to terminals X5. 129 . the fibre-optic cables are connected to terminals X5.3-TX (Transmitter). Other devices connected to the bus should have the cable shield connected to earth via a capacitor (shield GND via capacitor).2. multi-point communication. one pair is connected to A and B. In this case. The pull-up and pull-down resistors are selected by setting jumpers X3 and X4 to the ON position. Note! Signal ground can only be used for balancing potential differences between devices/ nodes if all devices connected to the bus have isolated RS-485 interfaces. The cable shield is to be connected directly to earth (shield GND) in one point/ device of the bus. The maximum number of devices (nodes) connected to the bus where REF 610 is being used is 32. The conductors of the pair are connected to A and B. When connecting REF 610 to the bus.3-RX (Receiver) and X5. which can be done using the pull-up and pull-down resistors on the communication module. The termination resistor is selected by setting jumper X5 to the ON position.

-2).5-4 X5.2.5-6 X5.3-RX (Receiver) and X5. the plastic fibre-optic cables are connected to terminals X5.5-3 X5. 4.3-2 Terminal X5.4-TX 130 .4-RX (Receiver) and X5.5-1 Jumper location on the RS-485 communication module RS-485 rear connector Function Data A (+) Data B (-) Signal GND (for potential balancing) Shield GND (via capacitor) Shield GND Combined fibre-optic connection (plastic and glass) If REF 610 is provided with the optional fibre-optic communication module for plastic and glass fibre. 4.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 off on off on off on X3 X4 X5 RS_JumpersREF610_a Fig.5-5 X5.3.3. Table 4.-1 Table 4.2.3-TX (Transmitter) and the glass fibre-optic cables to terminals X5.2.5-2 X5.4-TX (Transmitter). The fibre-optic interface is selected with jumpers X6 and X2 located on the PCB of the communication module (see Fig.2.3-3 Transmitter Plastic Glass Transmitter selection Position of jumper X6 X5.3-TX X5.

the cable is connected to terminals X5.0 communication module If REF 610 is provided with the optional DNP 3. JunpersMixREF610_a 131 .or 4-wire.3 X5.3-5 Terminal X5.3 X5.4-RX Jumper location on the communication module for plastic and glass fibre Fibre-optic rear connectors (plastic and glass) Function Transmitter for plastic fibre Receiver for plastic fibre Transmitter for glass fibre Receiver for plastic fibre RS-485 connection for the DNP 3. and the maximum length of the bus is 1200 meters in optimum conditions and with slow communication speed.2. 4. The DNP communication module follows the DNP standard and is intended to be used in a Daisy-chain bus wiring scheme with 2.3-RX X5.4-RX(glass) Fig.3-TX(plastic) X5.0 communication module.8/1-2 and X5.3-TX X5.2.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 Table 4.4-RX X5. The maximum number of devices (nodes) connected to the bus where REF 610 is being used is 32.4-TX X5.3-RX(plastic) Fibre-optic Interface X5.-2 Table 4.3-4 Transmitter Plastic Glass Receiver selection Position of jumper X2 X5.4 X5. multi-point communication.2.8/4-8.4-TX(glass) X5.3-RX X5.3. half-duplex.4 TX TX RX RX X6 X2 X6 X2 X5. The connection socket is a 8-pin header-type socket and the terminals are of screw compression type.

The pull-up and pull-down resistors are selected by setting jumpers X8.RX) Data A (+ TX) Data B (. X7. If signal ground is being used for balancing potential differences between devices/nodes. The bus is to be biased at one end to ensure fail-safe operation. Note! Signal ground can only be used for balancing potential differences between devices/nodes if all devices connected to the bus have isolated DNP interfaces.2. X13 and X11 in the OFF position) as default.8-2 X5. In this case. Table 4.8-8 X5. The conductors of the pair are connected to A and B. When using a 4-wire bus. X13 and X11 to the ON position. The DNP communication module is provided with jumpers for setting bus termination and fail-safe biasing. The cable shield is to be connected directly to earth (shield GND) in one point/device of the bus. one pair is connected to +RX and -RX and the other to +TX and -TX.8-6 X5. and one of the conductors of the other pair to signal ground. When connecting one device to another. the impedance of the cable should be the same. Other devices connected to the bus should have the cable shield connected to earth via a capacitor (shield GND via capacitor).8-4 X5. The jumpers have been set to no termination (X5 in the OFF position) and no biasing (X8. a quality twisted pair shielded cable is to be used. a quality cable with three or several pairs is to be used and one of the conductors of a pair connected to signal ground. one pair is connected to A and B. X7. which can be done using the pull-up and pull-down resistors on the communication module. The termination resistor is selected by setting jumper X6 or/and X12 to the ON position.0) Function Data A (+ RX) Data B (. which can be done by using the internal termination resistor on the DNP communication module.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 When connecting REF 610 to the bus. A is connected to A and B to B.8-7 X5. If signal ground is being used.8-1 RS-485 rear connector (DNP 3.3-6 Terminal X5.TX) Signal GND (for potential balancing) Shield GND (via capacitor) Shield GND 132 . If the internal termination resistor of 120 Ω is used. The bus is to be terminated at both ends.8-3 X5. a quality dual twisted pair shielded cable is to be used.8-5 X5.

4-1 Dimensions 1) Width.2.2.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 Table 4.4. refer to the Installation Manual (1MRS 752265-MUM). case 160 mm Depth. case 164 mm Height. case 149.2.3-7 Terminal X8 X6 X7 X13 X12 X11 X14 Jumper numbering Function Pull-up Termination Pull-down Pull-up Termination Pull-down 4-wire/2-wire Signal Data A (+ TX) TX Data B (.3. frame 177 mm. frame 177 mm (4U).3 mm Weight of the relay ~3. Table 4.-3 Jumper location on the DNP 3. 4.TX) Data A (+ RX) RX Data B (.2.2. Technical data Table 4.4-2 Uaux rated Power supply Ur=100/110/120/220/240 V ac Ur=110/125/220/250 V dc Ur=24/48/60 V dc • REF610AxxHxxx • REF610AxxLxxx 133 .0 communication module 4.8 kg 1) For dimension drawings.5 kg Weight of the spare unit ~1.RX) ON X8 ON X6 ON X7 X13 ON X12 ON X11 ON DNP_JumpersREF610_a X14 4-Wire 2-Wire Fig.

.120% of Ur (dc) <9 W/13 W 1MRS 755310 Uaux variation (temporary) • REF610AxxHxxx • REF610AxxLxxx Burden of auxiliary voltage supply under quiescent (Pq)/operating condition Ripple in the dc auxiliary voltage Interruption time in the auxiliary dc voltage without resetting the relay Time to trip from switching on the auxiliary voltage Internal over temperature limit Fuse type Max 12% of the dc value <50 ms at Uaux rated <350 ms +100°C T2A/250 V Table 4.120% of Ur (dc) 80.25 A/0.2..15 A (5 A/3 A/1 A for series connection of SO4 and SO5) 100 mA at 24 V ac/dc Rated voltage Continuous carry Make and carry for 3. at 48/110/220 V dc Minimum contact load 134 .2 A • 1.2.0 s Make and carry for 0.8 x In Measured currents on phases IL1.4-5 Digital inputs ±20% of the rated voltage DI3.110% of Ur (ac) 80...4-3 Rated frequency Rated current.50 x In 0...2..DI2 • REF610AxxHxxx 110/125/220/250 V dc • REF610AxxLxxx 24/48/60/110/125/220/250 V dc • REF610AxxxxLx • REF610AxxxxHx Current drain Power consumption/input 24/48/60/110/125/220/250 V dc 110/125/220/250 V dc 2.4-2 Power supply 85.2...2....REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4.18 mA ≤ 0.5 s Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time constant L/R <40 ms..9 W Table 4. IL2 and IL3 as multiples of the rated currents of the energizing inputs Earth-fault current as a multiple of the rated current of the energizing input Table 4.5 A • 20 A •5A • 50 A <750 mΩ 1A 4A 100 A 25 A 250 A <100 mΩ 5A 20 A 500 A 100 A 1250 A <20 mΩ Thermal withstand capability • continuously • for 1 s • for 10 s Dynamic current withstand • half-wave value Input impedance Table 4..4-6 Signal output SO1 and optional SO4 and SO5 250 V ac/dc 5A 15 A 30 A 1 A/0. In Energizing inputs 50/60 Hz ± 5 Hz 0.4-4 Measuring range 0..DI5 (optional) Operating range Rated voltage DI1..

and IRF output 250 V ac/dc 5A 10 A 15 A 1 A/0...1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4.20 V) Table 4.2.15 A 100 mA at 24 V ac/dc REF 610 Rated voltage Continuous carry Make and carry for 3...5 mA 20 V ac/dc (15.+85°C according to IEC 60068-2-48 According to IEC 60068-2-2 According to IEC 60068-2-1 According to IEC 60068-2-30 135 .+70°C -40. max 1 h Minimum permissible bending radius of the connection fibre Table 4.4-7 Signal output SO2.5 s Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time constant L/R <40 ms.5 s Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time constant L/R <40 ms.2. PO3) 250 V ac/dc 5A 15 A 30 A 5 A/3 A/1 A Rated voltage Continuous carry Make and carry for 3.0 s Make and carry for 0...4-11 Environmental tests and conditions Recommended service temperature range (continuous) Limit temperature range (short-term) Transport and storage temperature range Dry heat test Dry cold test Damp heat test..2.. at 48/110/220 V dc Minimum contact load Table 4..265 V ac/dc ~1.2. cyclic -10. PO2.4-10 Enclosure class of the flush-mounted relay Front side Rear side.4-9 Lens sensor and optic fibre for arc protection -40.0 s Make and carry for 0. at 48/110/220 V dc (PO1 with both contacts connected in series) Minimum contact load TCS • Control voltage range • Current drain through the supervision circuit • Minimum voltage over a contact 100 mA at 24 V ac/dc 20.4-8 Power outputs (PO1...2.+100°C +140°C 100 mm Normal service temperature range Maximum service temperature range.+55°C -40. optional SO3. top of the relay Rear side..25 A/0. connection terminals IP 54 IP 40 IP 20 Table 4.

RF-emission (Mains terminal) EN 55011. unipolar impulses. power supply 4 kV. power supply 4 kV • I/O ports 2 kV Surge immunity test According to IEC 61000-4-5 • Power outputs. class A. energizing inputs. IEC 60255-25 CE approval Complies with the EMC directive 89/ 336/EEC and the LV directive 73/23/ EEC Table 4.2. pulse-modulated According to the ENV 50204 and IEC 60255-22-3 (2000) 10 V/m.0 kV Electrostatic discharge test. line-to-earth 1 kV. f=150 kHz. common mode According to IEC 61000-4-6 and IEC 60255-22-6 (2000) 10 V (rms).1000 MHz • Radiated. class IV According to IEC 61000-4-2. source energy 0. f=900 MHz Fast transient disturbance tests According to IEC 60255-22-4 and IEC 61000-4-4 • Power outputs. line-to-earth 2 kV..REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 Table 4. IEC 60255-25 • Radiated RF-emission EN 55011.2.4-12 Electromagnetic compatibility tests EMC immunity test level meets the requirements listed below 1 MHz burst disturbance test.90. 50 Hz. line-to-line Power frequency (50 Hz) magnetic field 300 A/m continuous IEC 61000-4-8 Voltage dips and short interruptions According to IEC 61000-4-11 30%/10 ms 60%/100 ms 60%/1000 ms >95%/5000 ms Electromagnetic emission tests According to the EN 55011 • Conducted. class A. waveform 1... f=80. energizing inputs.80 MHz • Radiated. 1 min According to IEC 60255-5 5 kV.4-13 Standard tests Insulation tests Dielectric tests • Test voltage Impulse voltage test • Test voltage According to IEC 60255-5 2 kV.2/50 µs. line-to-line • I/O ports 2 kV.5 kV • Differential mode 1.5 J 136 . class III According to IEC 60255-22-1 • Common mode 2. amplitude-modulated According to IEC 61000-4-3 and IEC 60255-22-3 (2000) 10 V/m (rms). IEC 60255-22-2 and ANSI C37..3-2001 • For contact discharge 8 kV • For air discharge 15 kV Radio frequency interference tests • Conducted.

4-13 Standard tests Insulation resistance measurements • Isolation resistance Mechanical tests Vibration tests (sinusoidal) Shock and bump test REF 610 According to IEC 60255-5 >100 MΩ.2.4-2.6 or 4. The primary side of the power supply is protected with a fuse located on the PCB of the relay. The power supply is a galvanically isolated (flyback-type) DC/DC converter.4.5 or X5. connector X5. the green indicator LED (ready) on the front panel will be on.0 or Modbus protocol • 9.8 kbps (additionally 2.8 • Fibre-optic or RS-485 connection • SPA bus. class I Table 4.6 kbps with front communication cable) Auxiliary voltage REF 610 requires a secured auxiliary voltage supply to operate.2.2 or 0.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 4. The internal power supply of the relay forms the voltages required by the relay electronics.6 or 4.2. For detailed information on power supply. 500 V dc According to IEC 60255-21-1. 1.8 kbps (9. 137 . refer to table 4. X5.3 kbps for Modbus) Front interface • Optical connection (infrared): wirelessly or via the front communication cable (1MRS050698) • SPA bus protocol • 9. DNP 3. X5. When the auxiliary voltage is connected. IEC 60870-5-103.3.4. class I According to IEC 60255-21-2.4-14 Data communication Rear interface.

stage I>> will trip the circuit breaker and initiate shot 1. like the reclaim time. 5. In this example. I> and I>>. the blocking of stage I>> will be activated.1.1. 2 and 3 Close CB Block I>> I>> Trip SG2/2=1 SG2/7=1 I>> Trip CB closed CB open t>> I> Trip I> Trip Block I>> I> Trip Block I>> Block I>> Shot 1 t> Shot 2 t> Shot 3 t> Definite Trip Fig. will start when the set dead time elapses and the AR function issues a reclosing command to the circuit breaker.1. the AR sequence will start over and over again.g. the blocking of stage I>> (in this case) will be reset before the AR function. such as fuse-saving applications involving down-stream fuses. tripping and initiation of shot 1 should be fast (instantaneous or short-time delayed) and of shot 2 and 3. i. a cutout time is used. This will lead to a pumping effect when the AR function is reset (the blocking of stage I>> included).-1 Fast initiation of shot 1 using one fast and one delayed stage In case of a short-circuit in the network. as sometimes is the case. stage I>> will be blocked by the AR function during shot 2 and 3. Stage I>> is given an instantaneous characteristic and stage I> a time delay. The cutout time. 138 ARex1REF610_a . half of the reclaim time). If the network fault is not cleared.e. To avoid such a pumping effect. two overcurrent stages are used. Stage I>> will now be able to continue the AR sequence and the pumping effect will thus be avoided. 5. and definite tripping time delayed. Open CB Open CB Trip I> 0→1 Block I>> at Shot 1. Application examples Auto-reclose function Fast tripping and initiation of shot 1 using two protection stages In several applications. By setting SG2/2 to 1 and SG2/7 to 1. As the set start value of stage I> in this example is higher than that of stage I>>. By setting the cutout time to be shorter than the reclaim time (e. 5.1. At the time of shot initiation. stage I> will trip the circuit breaker and continue the auto-reclose sequence to shot 2. it is possible that the current will not exceed the set start value of stage I> while the blocking of stage I>> is active. shot 3 and finally definite tripping.1.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 5.

-1 Fast initiation of shot 1 using start signals Shot initiation by a start signal applies only to shot 1. is to use start signals from protection stages for shot initiation. ARex2REF610_a 139 . such as Finland).e. In this case. not be used for shot initiation.1. the circuit breaker will be tripped and a shot initiated (provided that the signal Open CB Command has been routed to the trip output contact) on expiration of the factory default delay.2.1. When the set start delay elapses. the start signals will. and to definite tripping. when no more shots are allowed but the network fault has not been cleared. 5. The start time of stages I> and I0> is very short but can be extended with the settings AR I> Start Delay and AR I0> Start Delay of the AR function. since the start signals are always routed to the AR function. the shot will be initiated and the AR function will trip the circuit breaker by issuing the Open CB Command. the factory default delay of 300 s will function as a trip time limiter. in practise. i. However. The AR function of REF 610 can be initiated by the start signals from stages I> and I0>. Note! The signal Open CB Command must be routed to the output contact used for tripping the circuit breaker. Open CB 0→1 Trip I> Start t I> start delay Open CB Command Close CB Command Shots 1. if stages I> or I0> have been given an IDMT characteristic. With small currents. the operate time at IDMT characteristic may be relatively long. the AR function will trip the circuit breaker on expiration of AR I> Start Delay and AR I0> Start Delay.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 5. Note! At the factory default delay of 300 s for AR I> Start Delay and AR I0> Start Delay. However. 2 and 3 initiation Shot 1 initiation Open CB Close CB Open CB Close CB Close CB Close CB Command Command Command Command I> Start I> Trip I> Trip I> Start Open CB Command CB closed CB open Shot 1 t> Shot 2 t> Shot 3 Definite Trip I> start delay I> start delay Fig. Fast tripping and initiation of shot 1 using start signals An alternative way to achieve fast tripping and shot initiation (typical for certain countries.2.

140 . 5. either through blocking of shot initiation or inhibition of the AR function.1. I>> and I>>>. the AR sequence will include shot 1. the AR sequence includes only shot 1 • exceed the set start value of stages I>. stages I> and I0> should not be used for blocking of shot 1. Example 2 Start by checking that the switches have been properly set: Settings SG1/5=1 SG3/1=1 Number of shots = 3 Function Blocking of initiation of shot 2 and 3 by the trip signal from stage I>> Inhibition of the AR function by the trip signal from stage I>>> If one or several phase currents • exceed the set start value of stage I> but not of stages I>> and I>>>. Selecting adaptive sequence length The auto-reclose sequence can be set to adapt to the fault current. Note! Stage I>>> should have the shortest and stage I> the longest operate time. Example 1 Start by checking that the switches have been properly set: Settings SG1/1=1 SG3/1=1 Number of shots = 3 Function Blocking of initiation of shot 1 by the trip signal from stage I>> Inhibition of the AR function by the trip signal from stage I>>> If one or several phase currents • exceed the set start value of stage I> but not of stages I>> and I>>>. • exceed the set start value of stages I>.3. I>> and I>>>) are used and the number of shots of the AR sequence vary depending on which stages trips. 2 and 3. • exceed the set start value of stages I> and I>> but not of stage I>>>. I>> and I>>>.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 Note! When using AR I> Start Delay and AR Io> Start Delay for shot initiation and the signal Open CB Command has been routed to the trip output contact. 2 and 3 • exceed the set start value of stages I> and I>> but not of stage I>>>. Note! Stage I>>> should have the shortest and stage I> the longest operate time. the AR sequence will include shot 1. no shots will be performed (AR function inhibited). no shots will be performed (AR function inhibited). three overcurrent stages (I>. the AR sequence will include shot 2 and 3. In the examples below.

2.1. to detect an arc on the busbar.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 5. the arc protection stage will trip the circuit breaker of the incoming feeder. Q1 M1 3l Q2 PO3 PO1 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Fig.-1 Arc protection with one REF 610 ArcEx1REF610_a 141 . Arc protection Arc protection with one REF 610 relay In installations with limited possibilities to realize signalling between relays protecting incoming and outgoing feeders. The maximum recommended installation distance between the two lens sensors in the busbar area is 6 meters and the maximum distance from a lens sensor to the end of the busbar 3 meters.2.2.-1) is realized by installing two arc lens sensors.2. 5. connected to the relay protecting the incoming feeder.1. 5.1. or if only the relay for the incoming feeder is to be exchanged. An arc protection with one REF 610 only (see Fig. On arc detection. 5. an arc protection with a lower protective level can be achieved with one protection relay.

-1). the REF 610 protecting the incoming feeder will trip the circuit breaker of the incoming feeder and generate an external trip signal to all REF 610 relays protecting outgoing feeders. it will generate a signal to the REF 610 protecting the incoming feeder. 5. Arc protection with several REF 610 relays When using several REF 610 relays (see Fig. For maximum safety. the REF 610 relays can be configured to trip all circuit breakers.2.-1 Arc protection with several REF 610 relays 142 ArcEx2REF610_a .REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 5. On detection of the signal. which in turn will result in tripping of all circuit breakers of outgoing feeders. a REF 610 protecting an outgoing feeder will trip the circuit breaker of the outgoing feeder when detecting an arc at the cable terminations. 5.2. regardless of where the arc is detected.2. Q1 DI1 M1 3l Q2 PO3 PO1 SO1 DI1 Q3 3I+Io SO1 Q4 3I+Io DI1 DI1 Q5 3I+Io SO1 Q6 3I+Io DI1 SO1 SO1 Fig. If the REF 610 protecting the outgoing feeder detects an arc on the busbar (via the other lens sensor).2.2.2. however.

Q1 M1 3l Q2 HSO 2 HSO 1 TRIP 3 DI1 Q3 3I+Io Q4 3I+Io DI1 DI1 Q5 3I+Io Q6 3I+Io DI1 ArcEx3REF610_a S1 S2 S3 S4 Fig. which in turn will result in tripping of all circuit breakers of outgoing feeders.2.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 5.3. 5.3. However. REA 101 will trip the circuit breaker of the incoming feeder and generate an external trip signal to all REF 610 relays protecting outgoing feeders. Arc protection with several REF 610 relays and one REA 101 When realizing an arc protection with both REF 610 relays and an REA 101 (see Fig.-1 Arc protection with REF 610 and REA 101 143 . The busbar and the incoming feeder is protected by the sensor loop of the REA 101. REF 610 will trip the circuit breaker of the outgoing feeder. 5. the cable terminations of outgoing feeders are protected by REF 610 relays using one lens sensor for each relay.2.2. on detection of an arc on the busbar.-1). On arc detection at the cable terminations.3.

2A Phase-current inputs: Fig.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 6. 6. Ordering information When ordering REF 610 protection relays and/or accessories. 6.2A Phase-current inputs: Fig. 3xPO. Use the ordering key in Fig. 2xSO 5 = 5A. 1=1A. 2=0. 1=1A Earth-fault current input: 5 = 5A. 2xDI (110/125/220/250 V dc). 3xPO. 2xSO L = 24-60 V dc. 6. 2xSO 5 = 5A. 2xSO L = 24-60 V dc. 3xPO. 6.0 protocol and input for arc protection N = none I/O extension module: Power supply: H = 3xSO and 3xDI (110/125/220/250 V dc) L = 3xSO and 3xDI (24/48/60/110/125/220/250 V dc) N = none H = 100-240 V ac/110-250 V dc.0 protocol E = RS-485 including DNP 3.-2 to generate the order number when ordering spare units. REF610A55HCNP Communication module: P = plastic fibre M= plastic fibre with input for arc protection G = plastic and glass fibre K = plastic and glass fibre with input for arc protection R = RS-485 T = RS-485 with input for arc protection D = RS-485 including DNP 3. 3xPO. REF610A55HSNS I/O extension module: Power supply: H = 3xSO and 3xDI (110/125/220/250 V dc) L = 3xSO and 3xDI (24/48/60/110/125/220/250 V dc) N = none H = 100-240 V ac/110-250 V dc. 2xDI (110/125/220/250 V dc). 1=1A. 2xDI (24/48/60/110/125/220/250 V dc). 2=0.-1 to generate the order number when ordering complete protection relays. please specify the following: • Order number • Quantity The order number identifies the protection relay type and hardware as described in the figures below and is labelled on the marking strip under the lower handle of the relay.-1 Ordering key for complete relays Use the ordering key in Fig.-2 Ordering key for spare units 144 OrdInfo2REF610_a OrdInfo1REF610_a . 1=1A Earth-fault current input: 5 = 5A. 2xDI (24/48/60/110/125/220/250 V dc).

single relay 19" Rack mounting kit for single relay and RTXP18 19" equipment frame mounting (Combiflex). plain bracket 19" equipment frame mounting (Combiflex).0 1MRS050698 145 . bracket for RTXP18 Pre-manufactured lens-sensor and optic fibre for arc protection • 1.5 1MRS120534-3.0 1MRS120534-5. side-by-side 19" Rack mounting kit.5 m ±3% • 3 m ±3% • 5 m ±3% Front communication cable Order number 1MRS050696 1MRS050831 1MRS050697 1MRS050695 1MRS050694 1MRS050783 1MRS061208 1MRS061207 1MRS120534-1.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 The following accessories are available: Item Semi-flush mounting kit Inclined (/ 25o) semi-flush mounting kit Wall mounting kit 19” Rack mounting kit.

REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual 1MRS 755310 7. References Other available manuals: • Operator’s Manual. 1MRS 755311 • Installation Manual. 1MRS 752265-MUM 146 .

Input registers Internal relay fault International Organization for Standardization Liquid Crystal Display Light-emitting diode Longitudinal Redundancy Check Least significant bit Minute-pulse Most significant bit Medium Voltage Normally closed Normally open Open System Interconnection Personal Computer Printed Circuit Board Programmable Logical Controller Root Mean Square Remote Terminal Unit PO1. PO2. PO3 Power outputs 147 .1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 8. Inc. Abbreviations ANSI AR ASCII CB CBFP CD CPU CRC CT DI EEPROM EMC EPA ER FR GI HMI HR IDMT IEC IEC_103 IEEE IR IRF ISO LCD LED LRC LSB MP MSB MV NC NO OSI PC PCB PLC RMS RTU American National Standards Institute Auto-reclose American Standard Code for Information Interchange Circuit breaker Circuit-breaker failure protection Change detect Central Processing Unit Cyclical Redundancy Check Current transformer Digital input Electrically erasable programmable read-only memory Electromagnetic compatibility Enhanced Performance Architecture Event record Fault record General interrogation Human-Machine Interface Holding register Inverse definite minimum time International Electrotechnical Commission Standard IEC 60870-5-103 Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.

.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual SGB SGF SGL SGR SO1..SO5 SP TCS UDR UR Switchgroups for digital inputs Switchgroups for functions Switchgroups for programmable LEDs Switchgroups for output contacts Signal outputs Second-pulse Trip-circuit supervision User-defined register Unsolicited reporting 1MRS 755310 148 .

35.0 x In 0..30 x In 1 min 95% θt> 0..30.50. 2 and 3 0...1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual REF 610 9.0 0.1048575 0.255 0.10.00 1......0…15.0..30 x In 0.60. SGB 2 Checksum.0 0.0% In 0.50 x In 20% In 0 0 120 0 0 0 0 0 0 149 .00 s 1.50.1...04 s 1......1.04 s 0. SGF 2 Checksum. P) 1S1 1S2 1S3 1S4 1S5 1S6 1S7 1S8 1S9 1S10 1S11 1S12 1S13 1S14 1S15 1S16 1S17 1S18 1S19 1S20 1S21 1S22 1S23 1S24 1S25 0. SGF 4 Checksum...05 s 0.8 0...0 s 1..300 s 0.. W.1048575 0..35.0 0.2.0 x In 5..05.300 s 0.50 x In 1.50 x In 0.15.300 s 10.63 0.1..50 x In 0.10 s 0 Customer’s setting Current limit ArcI> of stage ARC Current limit ArcI0> of stage ARC Checksum.05 s 0 0...0 0..1048575 Default setting 0.04..05.400% In 0.. Check lists Table 9. SGB 1 Checksum.05.5.100% θt> 0.127 0.05 s 1..05..05. SGB 4 2) 1S26 1S27 1S61 1S62 1S63 1S64 1S65 1S71 1S72 1S73 1S74 2.8 0..-1 Setting group 1 Variable Start value of stage I> Operate time of stage I> Time/current characteristic for stage I> Time multiplier k Time multiplier n Resetting time of stage I> Start value of stage I>> Operate time of stage I>> Start value of stage I>>> Operate time of stage I>>> Start value of stage I0> Operate time of stage I0> Time/current characteristic for stage I0> Time multiplier k0 Time multiplier n0 Resetting time of stage I0> Start value of stage I0>> Operate time of stage I0>> Start value of stage ∆I> Operate time of stage ∆I> Full load current Time constant of stage θ> Alarm level of stage θ> Operate time of CBFP Number of AR shots Group/ Channel 1 Setting range (R.05 s 0 0.2.35.50 5.30.50..255 0...05.300 s 0...05 s 100% 60 s 0...50 s 0..0 s 0 = AR is not in use 1 = shot 1 2 = shot 1 and 2 3 = shot 1.0 x In 0.100% 1.05 5.....0 x In 0.05...0% In 0.200 min 50.1048575 0.......300 s 0..05 1. SGF 1 Checksum. SGF 5 Checksum... SGB 3 Checksum.0...04.400% In 0.100% In 0. SGF 3 Checksum.30.0...0........127 0.

15.0% In 0.00 s 1. SGL 1 Checksum.2097151 0..8388607 0....35.1. SGR 2 Checksum..5.50 5....100% In 0.05. SGL 6 Checksum.2097151 0..0..2097151 0..50.....05 s 0 0...0% In 0.05... SGL 8 Group/ Channel 1 Setting range (R.0 x In 0..05 5.05 s 0.....0 x In 0.8388607 0. SGR 5 Checksum..-1 Setting group 1 Variable Checksum.....1048575 0....2097151 Default setting 0 2108074 2108074 2108074 5461 5461 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1MRS 755310 Customer’s setting Table 9.300 s 0. W.400% In 0.300 s 0.50 x In 0. SGR 7 Checksum.05 s 100% 60 s 0.30.0…15..30 x In 0.2097151 0. SGL 7 Checksum.05.REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 9..100% 1....300 s 0.8388607 0.8 0.2. SGR 6 Checksum.35.2097151 0...30..-2 Setting group 2 Variable Start value of stage I> Operate time of stage I> Time/current characteristic for stage I> Time multiplier k Time multiplier n Resetting time of stage I> Start value of stage I>> Operate time of stage I>> Start value of stage I>>> Operate time of stage I>>> Start value of stage I0> Operate time of stage I0> Time/current characteristic for stage I0> Time multiplier k0 Time multiplier n0 Resetting time of stage I0> Start value of stage I0>> Operate time of stage I0>> Start value of stage ∆I> Operate time of stage ∆I> Full load current 150 Group/ Channel 2 Setting range (R....30.04.0 0.30 x In Customer’s setting ... SGR 8 Checksum. P) 1S75 1S81 1S82 1S83 1S84 1S85 1S86 1S87 1S88 1S91 1S92 1S93 1S94 1S95 1S96 1S97 1S98 0. SGL 3 Checksum.0 s 1..0.05.05 s 1...2.05 s 0 0. SGB 5 Checksum. SGR 3 Checksum..8388607 0.04.. SGL 4 Checksum.8388607 0..1...05.8388607 0..0.50 s 0.05 1.50 x In Default setting 0.... W. SGR 1 Checksum.04 s 1. P) 2S1 2S2 2S3 2S4 2S5 2S6 2S7 2S8 2S9 2S10 2S11 2S12 2S13 2S14 2S15 2S16 2S17 2S18 2S19 2S20 2S21 0...05... SGL 5 Checksum.50.8388607 0.1.8 0...05.0 0.8388607 0..0 0.....0 x In 0..300 s 0...50 x In 0.04 s 0.2097151 0.00 1..0 0.. SGR 4 Checksum.300 s 10. SGL 2 Checksum.2097151 0..

.. SGB 3 Checksum..255 0.....0 x In 5.10 s 0 REF 610 Customer’s setting Current limit ArcI> of stage ARC Current limit ArcI0> of stage ARC Checksum...8388607 0.... SGR 7 Checksum.31 Default setting 50 Hz 10 min 31 Customer’s setting 151 ..50... SGL 1 Checksum...2097151 0..2097151 0.1048575 0.. SGR 5 Checksum.50 x In 20% In 0 0 120 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10922 10922 10922 5461 5461 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 9... SGF 4 Checksum. SGR 1 Checksum.100% θt> 0..2097151 0.1048575 0.2097151 0..10....... SGL 5 Checksum.0. W.200 min 50... SGR 4 Checksum... SGB 1 Checksum. SGB 4 Checksum...0 s 0 = AR is not in use 1 = shot 1 2 = shot 1 and 2 3 = shot 1... 2 and 3 0..8388607 0.-3 Control parameters Description Rated frequency Time setting range for demand values in minutes Non-volatile memory settings Parameter Setting range (channel 0) V104 V105 V106 50 or 60 Hz 0...999 min 0.63 0.400% In 0.8388607 0. SGL 8 2) 2S26 2S27 2S61 2S62 2S63 2S64 2S65 2S71 2S72 2S73 2S74 2S75 2S81 2S82 2S83 2S84 2S85 2S86 2S87 2S88 2S91 2S92 2S93 2S94 2S95 2S96 2S97 2S98 2.1048575 0. SGF 2 Checksum.-2 Setting group 2 Variable Time constant of stage θ> Alarm level of stage θ> Operate time of CBFP Number of AR shots Group/ Channel 2 Setting range (R..1048575 0. SGF 5 Checksum. SGL 4 Checksum. SGB 2 Checksum.2097151 0.2097151 0. SGF 1 Checksum.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 9.8388607 0. SGL 3 Checksum..8388607 0.127 0. SGR 2 Checksum.2097151 Default setting 1 min 95% θt> 0...... SGR 3 Checksum...8388607 0.8388607 0.60..127 0... SGR 6 Checksum..8388607 0. SGB 5 Checksum...1048575 0. SGF 3 Checksum.... SGR 8 Checksum.. P) 2S22 2S23 2S24 2S25 1.... SGL 7 Checksum..2097151 0. SGL 2 Checksum. SGL 6 Checksum....35.255 0.

In (A.g. unit 00001..-4 Parameters for the disturbance recorder Description Sampling rate Parameter Setting range (channel 0) M15 800/960 Hz 400/480 Hz 50/60 Hz 0.. e..8 0 = SPA 1 = IEC_103 2 = Modbus RTU 3 = Modbus ASCII 0 = loop 1 = star 0 = light off 1 = light on 0 = not in use 1 = in use 0 0 0 1 9.16383 0.kA 0.g.254 9... kA).. kbps Rear communication protocol Parameter Setting range (channel 0) V108 0..65535.-3 Control parameters Description Time setting for disabling new trip indications on the LCD Operation indications on the LCD Trip-circuit supervision Remote control of settings Unit address of the relay Data transfer rate (SPA).In (A. unit 00001.. 10. 10...16383 0.kA M83 Factor 0. e. IL2 and IL3 Analogue channel conversion factor and unit for the earth-fault current Internal trigger signals' checksum Internal trigger signal's edge Checksum of internal signal storing mask Post-triggering recording length M18 0 M20 Max 16 characters ..6/4.16383 0... M81 Factor 0.65535..100% 682 0 751 50% V236 V237 V238 V240 152 .6 0 Connection type Line-idle state Optional communication module V204 V205 V206 0 0 0 Table 9... kA).ABB M80..9999 Default setting 800 Hz Customer’s setting Station identification/unit number Name of the feeder Analogue channel conversion factor and unit for IL1..REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 9.999 min Default setting 60 min 1MRS 755310 Customer’s setting V112 V113 V150 V200 V201 V203 0 = IEC 1 = ANSI 0 = not in use 1 = in use 0 = setting group 1 1 = setting group 2 1.

.300 s 0.1023 0..300 s 3.1.300 s 0....31 Default setting 0 0 0 REF 610 Customer’s setting Table 9.31 Default setting 0..1.2 s 300 s 300 s 10 s 0...300 s 0...1.1MRS 755310 Feeder Protection Relay Technical Reference Manual Table 9.-5 Auto-reclose parameters Description CB Closing time Start delay of stage I> Start delay of stage I0> Reclaim time Cutout time Dead time of shot 1 Dead time of shot 2 Dead time of shot 3 SG1 SG2 SG3 Parameter Value (channel 0) V121 V122 V123 V124 V125 V126 V127 V128 V129 V130 V131 0.1..10 s 0.300 s 0..255 0.3 s 30 s 30 s 0 0 15 Customer’s setting 153 ....-4 Parameters for the disturbance recorder Description External trigger signal's checksum External trigger signal's edge Checksum of external signal storing mask Parameter Setting range (channel 0) V241 V242 V243 0.300 s 0...1 s 0....31 0...300 s 0....31 0...1..

.

.

com/substationautomation 1MRS 755310 EN 10.O. +358 10 22 11 Fax.ABB Oy Distribution Automation P.abb. Box 699 FI-65101 Vaasa FINLAND Tel.2004 . +358 10 224 1094 www.

You're Reading a Free Preview

Download
scribd
/*********** DO NOT ALTER ANYTHING BELOW THIS LINE ! ************/ var s_code=s.t();if(s_code)document.write(s_code)//-->